T100 Technology Board for Operating

Instructions
MASTERDRIVES and DC MASTER Software
Manual for Software Module
MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

Edition: F Order No.: 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

General 02.99

These Operating Instructions are available in the following languages:

Language German French Spanish Italian

Order No. 6SE70.. 80-0CX84-0BB1 87-7CX84-0BB1 87-8CX84-0BB1 87-2CX84-0BB1

Software Version: 1.0 to 1.3

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its

contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design,
are reserved.

We have checked the contents of this document to ensure that they

coincide with the described hardware and software. However,
differences cannot be completely excluded, so that we do not
accept any guarantee for complete conformance. However, the
information in this document is regularly checked and necessary
corrections will be included in subsequent editions. We are grateful SIMOVERT  Registered Trade Mark
for any recommendations for improvement.

 Siemens AG 1995 All rights reserved

02.99 General

Contents
Page

0 Definitions ................................................................................................................... 0-4

1 Description .................................................................................................................. 1-1

1.1 Applications ...................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Mode of operation and diagnostics LEDs......................................................................... 1-1
1.3 How to use the software manual ...................................................................................... 1-1
1.4 Hardware requirements for operation of the T100 board ................................................. 1-2

2 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................... 2-1

3 Function Descriptions ............................................................................................ 3-1

3.1 General explanation of terms and functionality ................................................................ 3-1
3.2 Sampling times and processing sequence....................................................................... 3-4
3.3 Analog inputs.................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.4 Analog outputs.................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.5 Serial USS interface ......................................................................................................... 3-7
3.6 Serial peer-to-peer interface............................................................................................. 3-11
3.7 Operation with a communications board (CBx, SCBx) .................................................... 3-17
3.8 Exchange of signals with MASTERDRIVE MC / VC from 1997 / 98................................ 3-20
3.9 Exchange of signals with MASTERDRIVE FC / VC / SC from 1995................................ 3-22
3.10 Selecting factory setting for T100 parameters via H970 = 0 ............................................ 3-23
3.11 Dynamic reading or writing of basic unit parameters ....................................................... 3-23
3.12 Technology controller ....................................................................................................... 3-24
3.13 Comfort ramp-function generator ..................................................................................... 3-25
3.14 Motorized potentiometer................................................................................................... 3-27
3.15 Wobble generator ............................................................................................................. 3-28

4 Parameter Handling and Parameter List ........................................................ 4-1

4.1 Parameterization inputs on PMU and OP1 parameterizing units..................................... 4-1
4.2 Access to technology parameters via a serial interface ................................................... 4-1
4.3 Parameter list ................................................................................................................... 4-3

5 List of Connectors and Binectors ..................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Connector list.................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Binector list ....................................................................................................................... 5-7

6 Start-up and Parameterization ............................................................................ 6-1

7 Procedure for Replacing Software or T100 Board ..................................... 7-1

8 Faults and Alarms .................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Fault messages ................................................................................................................ 8-1
8.2 Alarm messages............................................................................................................... 8-3

9 SIMOVIS Service Program for PC/Programmer........................................... 9-1

10 Configuring Example .............................................................................................. 10-1

11 Index of Available Instruction Manuals and Software Components

for T100 ......................................................................................................................... 11-1

12 Changes ....................................................................................................................... 12-1

12.1 Software version 1.0......................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 Software version 1.1......................................................................................................... 12-1
12.3 Software version 1.2......................................................................................................... 12-2
12.4 Software version 1.3......................................................................................................... 12-2
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 3
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
General 02.99

0 Definitions
• QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
For the purpose of these instructions and the product labels, a "Qualified person" is someone who is familiar
with the installation, mounting, start-up and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. He or she
must have the following qualifications:
1. Trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in
accordance with established safety procedures.
2. Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety
procedures.
3. Trained in rendering first aid.

• DANGER
For the purpose of these instructions and the product labels, "Danger" indicates, death, severe personal
injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.

• WARNING
For the purpose of these instructions and the product labels, "Warning" indicates that death, severe personal
injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

• CAUTION
For the purpose of these instructions and the product labels, "Caution" indicates that minor personal injury or
property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

• NOTE
For the purpose of these instructions, "Note" indicates information about the product or the respective part of
the Instruction Manual to which special attention should be paid.

NOTE
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every
possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for
the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Siemens sales office.
The contents of this Instruction Manual shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement,
commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Siemens. The warranty
contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Siemens. Any statements contained
herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty.

4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 General

CAUTION

Components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge (ESD)

The board contains components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge. These components can
be easily destroyed if not carefully handled. If you have to handle electronic boards, please observe the
following:
♦ Electronic boards should only be touched when absolutely necessary.
♦ You must ensure that your own body has been discharged before you touch a board (the best way to do
this is to touch an earthed, conductive object such as a socket-outlet earth contact).
♦ Boards must not come into contact with highly insulating materials − e.g. plastic foils, insulated desktops,
articles of clothing made from man-made fibres.
♦ Boards may only be placed on surfaces which are conductive.
♦ When soldering, the soldering iron tip must be grounded.
♦ Boards and components should only be stored and transported in conductive packaging (e.g. metalized
plastic boxes, metal containers).
♦ If the packing material is not conductive, the boards must be wrapped in a conductive packaging material,
e.g. conductive foam rubber or household aluminium foil.

The necessary ESD protective measures are illustrated again below:

a = Conductive floor surface d = ESD overall
b = ESD table e = ESD chain
c = ESD footwear f = Cubicle ground connection

d d d
b b
e e

f f f f f

c a c
a a

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 5
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
General 02.99

WARNING
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation.
Owing to the DC link capacitors in the connected SIMOVERT Master Drives, the unit
remains at a hazardous potential for up to 5 minutes after it has been disconnected
(power connection and electronics power supply). For this reason, wait at least 5 minutes
before opening the unit after it has been switched off.
Failure to observe these safety instructions can result in death, severe personal injury or
substantial property damage.
Only qualified personnel should work on or around the equipment after first becoming
thoroughly familiar with all warnings and maintenance procedures contained in these
Instructions.
The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on proper handling,
storage, installation, operation and maintenance.

6 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Description

1 Description

1.1 Applications
The T100 technology board is a supplementary board in the SIMOVERT Master Drives 6SE70 and SIMOREG
DC MASTER series. It is possible to access all important signals and parameters of the technology board and
the basic converter via an additional communications board in the electronics box. The access mechanism and
the unit reactions of the T100 are identical to those of the SIMOVERT Master Drives basic converter unit.

The software module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive" extends the basic converter by a large number of drive-
related, process-oriented functions such as:

• Higher-level PID controller

• Comfort ramp-function generator

• Comfort motorized potentiometer

• Wobble generator

• 2 serial interfaces

• A large number of arithmetic, closed-loop control and logic blocks which can be freely interconnected by
means of parameterization.

1.2 Mode of operation and diagnostics LEDs

The T100 has a high-speed 16-bit microprocessor and its own parameter memory. The board is parameterized
via the basic converter unit, i.e. by means of the parameterizing unit PMU, the optional operator control unit OP1
or the SIMOVIS service program on a PC connected to the basic converter.

There are three diagnostic LEDs on the T100 board which indicate the following operating states:

• Middle, red LED flashing (3Hz): T100 is operating fault-free in cyclic mode

• Bottom, yellow LED flashing (3Hz): Data exchange between T100 and the basic converter O.K.
(basic converter increments heartbeat counter correctly)

• Top, green LED flashing (3Hz): Data exchange between T100 and communications board O.K.
(communications board increments heartbeat counter correctly)

For a description of the board (connections, technical data, etc.), please refer to the "Hardware Operating
Instructions" for the T100 board (order no.: 6SE7080-0CX87-0BB0).

1.3 How to use the software manual

Virtually all the important hardware and software functions of the T100 are illustrated in the block diagram in
Chapter 2. Instructions on how to read this diagram are given in Chapters 3.1 and 10.

Start-up, faults and alarms are described in Chapters 6 and 8.

You can skip the other chapters initially and refer to them only when you need to find out more about a function,
a parameter or a connector.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 1-1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Description 02.99

1.4 Hardware requirements for operation of the T100 board

MASTER DRIVES basic units (new series from 1997 / 98)

The T100 has been approved for operation in the following MASTER DRIVES basic units:
q SIMOVERT VC with CUVC electronics board
q SIMOVERT MC with CUMC electronics board

The T100 can only be mounted in compact, chassis or cubicle converters, but not in compact PLUS units.

The following diagram illustrates the rules regarding permissible board combinations in the electronics box:

-- L O C A T I O N S --
1 3 2
Electronics box

A F

= Data flow

C G
= Do not use slot F

- CUVC - CBX on ADB T100

- CUMC - SCB 1
- SCB 2

− The T100 must be mounted in location 2.

− A maximum of one communications board may be installed. It must be mounted in location 3.
Communications slot cards (e.g. CBP, CBC etc.) must be mounted on an ADB adapter board in slot G.
− The communications board communicates directly with the T100.
− If a SIMOLINK SLB interface is used, it must be inserted in a slot on the CUVC or CUMN basic electronics
board, preferably in slot A. The SLB communicates directly with the basic unit, signal connections to the T100
can be made by means of binector/connector links.

CAUTION: The SIMOLINK SLB interface can only operate in conjunction with T100 hardware product
version C9843...-L1-08 or later. The hardware product version is printed near the lower
backplane connector on the component side of the T100 board.

1-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Description

MASTER DRIVES basic units (old series from 1995 onwards)

The T100 has been approved for operation in the following MASTER DRIVES basic units:
q SIMOVERT FC, software version 1.2 or higher (delivery from approx. end of August, 1995)
q SIMOVERT VC, software version 1.2 or higher (delivery from approx. end of August 1995)
q SIMOVERT SC, software version 1.1 or higher (delivery from approx. beginning of September, 1995)

CAUTION: When a T100 or T300 board is installed in a SIMOVERT SC unit, the pulse frequency of the
converter must not be increased above the factory setting value of P761 = 5 kHz to avoid
overloading the converter processor.

o SIMOVERT rectifier/regenerating unit, software version 2.4 or higher

(delivery from approx. end of August, 1995).

There are two ways to determine the software version of a basic unit:

1) The software version can be read out in parameter r720,001

2) The software version is printed on the stickers on the EPROM modules on the basic electronics
board CUx in slot 1:
é With FC, VC and SC units, the software version is coded in the last 4 characters of the first
line on the EPROM sticker
Examples: "...1Axx" = software version 1.0
"...1Cxx" = software version 1.2
"...2Exx" = software version 2.4
The correct software version in VC units is also printed on the sticker attached to one of the two
large, light-grey bus connectors. The letter "K" or a following letter in the alphabet indicating the
product version must be marked on the sticker.

é In the rectifier/regenerating unit, the software version is indicated by the last two
characters of the bottom line on the EPROM sticker.
Example: "...A101-24" = software version 2.4

SIMOREG 6RA70 basic units

Approval of the T100 for use in 6RA70 units is scheduled for mid-1998.

T100 parameter settings

The following devices can be used to set the parameters of the T100 board:

q Standard parameterizing unit (PMU) for basic converters

q A PC or programmer with the service program "SIMOVIS for T100" (see Chapter 9)
q Optional OP1S plaintext operator device
q Optional OP1 plaintext operator device, version 1.00 or higher (delivery from approx. July 1995).
There are two ways to determine the correct version of an OP1 device:

1) When the device is switched on, the message "1.00" or higher will appear briefly on the
LCD display.
2) There is a sticker on the rear panel of the OP1. The last 4 digits of the number printed
at the bottom of this sticker must be "9520" or higher (year of manufacture 1995/week
of manufacture 20)

CAUTION: An OP1 device must have software version 1.02 or higher if it is to be used to
parameterize a T300 technology board.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 1-3

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Description 02.99

Communication boards
The T100 can be combined with the following communications boards

q PROFIBUS-DP CBP interface

q PROFIBUS-DP interface CB1, version V1.2 or higher (printed on sticker attached to 28-pin EPROM
module on CB1 board). Earlier versions of the CB1 can also be used provided the user does not want
to read or write any technology board parameters via the PROFIBUS-DP.

q SCB2 board:
The SCB2 has a floating serial interface which is capable of operating with either a USS protocol or a
peer-to-peer protocol. The software version installed on the SCB2 must be 1.3 or higher. The interface
can also be operated with an earlier software version provided that only the peer-to-peer protocol is
used or in cases where the user does not wish to read or write technology board parameters via the
USS protocol.
The software version of the SCB2 can be read out in parameter r720.002 or 003. It is also printed on
the sticker attached to the EPROM module of the SCB2. The coding system applying to the sticker is
described in the section headed "MASTER DRIVES basic units FC, VC and SC".

q SCB1 board (optionally with SCI1 and/or SCI2):

The SCB1 is equipped with a fibre-optic interface for peer-to-peer or terminal extension.

q CAN - CBC bus interface

q DeviceNet CBD interface

Note 1: All parameters of both the Master Drives basic unit and the T100 board can be read and written via
any of the serial interfaces (except for the peer-to-peer link).

Note 2: The T100 has not yet been approved for operation with the SIMOLINK SLB interface in board
location 3. If a SIMOLINK interface is to be used, it must be inserted in a slot on the CU board
(preferably in slot A) so that it can communicate directly with the basic unit.

Note 3: It is essential to follow the instructions given in Chapter 3.7 regarding the permissible slots for
communications boards in "slot card format".

1-4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Block diagram

2. Block diagram
The block diagram includes the full range of available functions. Further explanations are given in Chapter 3
(Function Descriptions) and Chapter 4 (Parameter List) in the form of a description of the appropriate
parameters.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 2-1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
 2-2

Block diagram
Block diagram of T100 technology board - table of contents Explanation of symbols
(see also Chapter 3.1)
Contents Sheet Contents Sheet
H105 (0)
Overview, hardware connection diagram 1 1 wobble generator 24 Setting parameter
(factory setting in brackets)
5 analog inputs 2/3 5 adders 25
H345 (0)
2 analog outputs 4 3 subtractors 25 Setting parameter in switchover parameter set
8 binary inputs 5/6 3 sign inverters 25 (factory setting in brackets)

5 binary outputs 7 1 switchable sign inverter 25

T H Z E Nibble-coded parameter
15 fixed setpoints 8 3 dividers 26 (factory setting in brackets)
H351 (0011)
6 fixed control bits 8 4 multipliers 26
d010
5 connector displays 8 3 high-resolution multipliers/ dividers 26 Display parameter
1 high-resolution connector display 8 4 absolute value generators with filter 27
K003 Connector
4 binector displays 8 2 limiters 27 (freely connectable analog signal)
4 fault message trigger signals to basic converter 8 2 limit-value monitors with filter 27
B003 Binector
4 alarm message trigger signals to basic converter 9 1 maximum selection 28 (freely connectable binary signal)
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

Voltage monitoring of electronics power supply 9 1 minimum selection 28

H104 (0) Selection of any binector (factory setting in
Process data exchange with basic converter: 2 tracking/storage elements 28 B brackets). Possibility to enter the selected
binector.
Actual values from basic unit 10, 10a 2 analog signal memories 28
Setpoints to basic unit 10, 10a H590 (0)
Control word 1/2 to basic unit 11 / 12 10 analog signal switches 29 .01 Selection of any binectors via "indexed"
Status word 1/2 from basic unit 13 / 14
B parameter (factory setting in brackets).
1 simple ramp-function generator 30 .02
B Possibility to enter the selected binectors
.03 for each index.
Read or write basic converter parameters dynamically 15 1 dead zone 30 B
Data exchange via USS interface: 3 characteristic blocks 30
Receive data 16 H170 (0) Selection of any connector (factory
1 velocity/speed calculator 31 K setting in brackets). Possibility to enter
Transmit data 16
the selected connector.
16 AND gates with 3 inputs each 32
Data exchange via peer-to-peer connection:
8 OR gates with 3 inputs each 32 H375 (1) Selection of any connectors via "indexed"
Receive data 17 .01 parameter (factory setting in brackets).
K
Transmit data 17 8 inverters 33 .02 Possibility to enter the selected con-
K nectors for each index.
Process data exchange with COM BOARD (CBx, SCBx): 3 EXCLUSIVE-OR gates with 2 inputs each 33
Block is processed at the specified position
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

Receive data 18 6 NAND gates with 3 inputs each 33 F10 e.g. F10 before F20) in the 2.2 ms sampling
Transmit data 18 time cycle (foreground task). Processing
7 RS flipflops 34
3 connector/binector converters 19 sequence of F200 to F1650 can be altered via
2 D flipflops 34 H750 to H752 (see Chapter 4 and 3.2).
3 binector/connector converters 20
5 timers 35 Block is processed at the specified position
B10
1 technology controller 21 (e.g. B10 before B20) in the 20 ms
4 binary signal switches 35 sampling time cycle (background task).
1 comfort ramp-function generator 22
Parameter set switchover 36 / 37
[10.3] Cross reference [page.column]
1 motorized potentiometer 23
e.g.. [10.3] = page 10, column 3

02.99
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

02.99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

T100 technology board

Overview X1 65
u 10 bits + Vz X8 X132:
u i RS485
3 2 1 66
50 i A Tx1 + Serial interface 1
±10V 20mA 250 D T/Rx+ 67 (USS protocol)
51 X2 Rx1
u T/Rx- 68
i A 3 2 1 M
52 X9 M
X130: ±10V 20mA D 69
250
5 analog inputs 53 X3 Microcontroller
80C166 RS485 +
±10V
- / 0.4mA or u Tx+
0 - 20mA / 250 or i A Tx2 70
Ω 54
4 - 20mA / 250 20mA D Tx- X133:
Ω ±10V 250
3 2 1 M 71
55 X4 M RS485 +
2 differential inputs Rx+ Serial interface 2
u Rx2
(terminals 50 - 53) X10 72 (peer-to-peer)
56 i A Rx-
±10V 20mA 250 D
3 single-ended M 73
inputs 57 X5 M 3 2 1
(terminals 54 - 59) u X11 M
74
58 i A
9 bit + Vz
±10V 20mA 250 D
M
59 M D U 60 X131:
A X6 3
2 61 2 analog outputs
U
I 1 I ±10V / 5mA max or
- M D U 62 0 - 20mA / 500 max or
24V 75 ϑ 90mA Ω
+ P24 INT A X7 3 4 - 20mA / 500 max
Ω
P24AUX Plug-in socket 2 63
76 U I
for software module 1 I
e.g. MS100 64
77
P24INT
X134: 78
85
8 binary inputs P24EXT +
79 86
24V DC COM OK (green)
- 24V
(input resistance:
= 4.4k Ω type) 80 87 X136:
TECH OK (red)
5 binary outputs
81 BASE OK (yellow) 88
24VDC / 90mA max
82 89

90
83
91
84
M
1/2 LBA 92
P24AUX 1/2 LBA
Communications DUAL MASTER DRIVES
1k*16

Block diagram
board PORT basic converter
DUAL PORT
RAM RAM CUx
CBx or SCBx
X135 X137 -1-
2-3
 2-4

Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Analog inputs U I Kxxx Jumper Signal type Scaling Offset

(differential inputs)
-11V ... +11V --- -110% ... +110% 3-4 0 100% 0%
-10V ... +10V --- -100% ... +100% 3-4 0 100% 0%
(see also Chapter 3.3) --- 0 ... 20mA 0 ... +100% 1-2 1 100% 0%
--- 4 ... 20mA 0 ... +100% 1-2 2 100% 0%

H104 (0) H106 (1) F10

B B
Signal type Scaling Offset Filter time [ms]
H100 (0) H101 (100) H102 (0) H103 (0) H105 (0) d010
10V = 100%
20mA = 100%
1ms -1 3
50
0
0 0%
A H101 -1 2 K003
u i +
±10V 20mA D * 100% 1
-1 1
1
Switch-in of
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

51 0
Hardware Sign reversal Filtering analog input
1 2 3 4 smoothing
X1 B003
20mA 10V Wire break (i < 2mA)

H114 (0) H116 (1) F20

B B
Signal type Scaling Offset Filter time [ms]
H110 (0) H111 (100) H112 (0) H113 (0) H115 (0) d011
10V = 100%
20mA = 100%
1ms -1 3
52
0
0 0%
A H111 -1 2 K004
u i +
±10V 20mA D * 100% 1
-1 1
1
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

Switch-in of
53 0
Hardware Sign reversal Filtering analog input
1 2 3 4 smoothing
X2 B004
20mA 10V Wire break (i < 2mA)

-2-

02.99
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

02.99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Analog inputs U I Kxxx Jumper Signal type Scaling Offset
(single-ended) -11V ... +11V --- -110% ... +110% 3-4 0 100% 0%
(see Chapter 3.3) -10V ... +10V --- -100% ... +100% 3-4 0 100% 0%
--- 0 ... 20mA 0 ... +100% 1-2 1 100% 0%
--- 4 ... 20mA 0 ... +100% 1-2 2 100% 0% H124 (0) H126 (1)
B B F30
Signal type Scaling Offset Filter time [ms]
H120 (0) H121 (100) H122 (0) H123 (0) H125 (0) d012
10V = 100%
20mA = 100%
1ms -1 3
54
0
0 0%
A H121 -1 2 K005
u i +
±10V 20mA D * 100% 1
-1 1
1
55 Switch-in of
0
Hardware Sign reversal Filtering analog input
1 2 3 4 smoothing B005
X3 Wire break (i < 2mA)
20mA 10V

H134 (0) H136 (1)

B B F40
Signal type Scaling Offset Filter time [ms]
H130 (0) H131 (100) H132 (0) H133 (0) H135 (0) d013
10V = 100%
20mA = 100%
1ms -1 3
56
0
0 0%
A H131 -1 2 K006
u i +
±10V 20mA D * 100% 1
-1 1
1
57 Switch-in of
0
Hardware Sign reversal Filtering analog input
1 2 3 4 smoothing B006
X4 Wire break (i < 2mA)
20mA 10V
H144 (0) H146 (1)
B B F50
Signal type Scaling Offset Filter time [ms]
H140 (0) H141 (100) H142 (0) H143 (0) H145 (0) d014
10V = 100%
20mA = 100%
1ms -1 3
58
0
0 0%
A H141 -1 2 K007
u i +
±10V 20mA D * 100% 1
-1 1
1
Switch-in of
59 0

Block diagram
Hardware Sign reversal Filtering analog input
1 2 3 4 smoothing B007
X5 Wire break (i < 2mA)
20mA 10V
-3-
2-5
 2-6

Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Kxxx Uout lout Jumper Signal type Scaling Offset

Analog outputs
-100% ... +100% -10V ... +10V --- 2-3 0 10V 0.00V
(see also Chapter 3.4) 0 ... +100% --- 0 ... 20mA 1-2 1 10V 0.00V Signal ground
0 ... +100% --- 4 ... 20mA 1-2 2 10V 0.00V 60

Scaling Offset F1690

H151 (0) Filter time [ms] -200.00...+200.00V -10.00...+10.00V Signal type
H152 (0) d015 H153 (10.00) H154 (0.00) H155 (0)

-1 3
X6 Kxxx
H150 (0) Uout = -10V...+10V Uout [V] = *Scaling [V] + Offset [V]
x x y
K -1 2 y [V] = * H153 + D 3 100%
100% A 61
2
1
U
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

1
0
K008
I Iout =
0...20 mA
or 62
4...20 mA

Scaling Offset F1700

H161 (0) Filter time [ms] -200.00...+200.00V -10.00...+10.00V Signal type
H162 (0) d016 H163 (10.00) H164 (0.00) H165 (0)

-1 3
X7 Kxxx
H160 (0) Uout = -10V...+10V Uout [V] = * Scaling [V] + Offset [V]
x x y
K -1 2 y [V] = * H163 + D 3 100%
100% A 63
2
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

1
0
U 1

K009
I Iout =
0...20 mA
or 64
4... 20 mA

-4-

02.99
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

02.99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Binary inputs
<1> Internal load power supply:
The total load capability of internal Indication of terminal states on 7-segment display
External load +24V (terminals 76 and 85) is 90mA.
power supply unit If this is not exceeded, the external 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77
75
load power supply unit can be omitted
DC 24V and terminal 76 used instead. d017

+ 76
24Vint <1>
K018

77 28
B008

H171 (0.00)
F60
1 B009
H170 (0) 0
K010
K
1
Signal injection
78 29
B010

H173 (0.00)
F70
1 B011
H172 (0) 0
K011
K
1
Signal injection
79 2 10
B012

H175 (0.00)
F80
1 B013
H174 (0) 0
K012
K
1
Signal injection
80 2 11
B014

H177 (0.00)
F90
1 B015
H176 (0) 0
K013
K
1

DC 24V Signal injection

Block diagram
-5-
2-7
 2-8

Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Binary inputs

DC 24V

81 2 12
B016

H179 (0,00). F100

1 B017
H178 (0) 0
K014
K
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

1
Signal injection
82 2 13
B018

H181 (0.00) F110

1 B019
H180 (0) 0
K015
K
1
Signal injection
83 2 14
B020

H183 (0.00)
F120
1 B021
H182 (0) 0
K016
K
1
Signal injection
84 2 15
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

B022

H185 (0.00)
F130
1 B023
H184 (0) 0
K017
K
1
Signal injection

-6-

02.99
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

02.99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5 Binary outputs Indication of terminal states and
overload on 7-segment display Overload
The total load capability of internal
d019 +24V (terminals 76 and 85) is 90mA.
91 90 89 88 87 85 (P24) 85 If this is not exceeded, the external
(d019 only) P24int
load power supply unit can be
omitted and a jumper inserted
d018 K019
24 V between terminals 85 and 86.
Terminal state
+
H191 (0.00s)
H192 (0) 86
T

H190 (0) 0 P24ext

T F1710
0 2 11
B
1
1 <1>
ON delay 87
Inversion
H194 (0.00s)
H195 (0)
T

H193 (0) P24ext

T 0 F1720
0 2 12
B
1 <1>
1
ON delay 88
Inversion
H197 (0.00s)
H198 (0)
T

H196 (0) P24ext

T 0 F1730
0 2 13
B
1
1 <1>
ON delay 89
Inversion
H200 (0.00s)
H201 (0)
T

H199 (0) T 0 P24ext

0 F1740
B 2 14
1
1 <1>
ON delay 90
Inversion
H203 (0.00s)
H204 (0)
T

H202 (0) T 0 P24ext

0 F1750
B 2 15
1
1 <1>
ON delay 91

Block diagram
Inversion

<1> with log. "1": Output transistor is conductive 92 -7-

2-9
 2-10

Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
14 fixed setpoints 6 fixed control bits 5 connector displays 4 binector displays 4 fault message trigger signals
Setting range -200.00 ... +199.99% belong to switchover Display in "%", therefore without to basic unit
parameter set [36] conversion they can only be used for
belong to switchover parameter set [36] connectors with scaling
"16384==100%" acc. to Chap. 5.1
H210 .1-.4 (0.00)
F210
B60 B110
K020 H230 .1-.4 (0)
d020 d026 F1590
H211 .1-.4 (0.00) F350
F220 H240 (0) H250 (0) H260 (0)
B024
K B B 1 = "Fault F120"
K021
H212 .1-.4 (0.00)
F230 H231 .1-.4 (0)
F360 B70
K022
B025 d021
H213 .1-.4 (0.00) B120
H241 (0)
F240
K d027 F1600
K023
H232 .1-.4 (0) H251 (0) H261 (0)
H214 .1-.4 (0.00) F370 B B 1 = "Fault F121"
F250 B80
B026
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

K024 d022
H215 .1-.4 (0.00) H242 (0)
F260 K
H233 .1-.4 (0)
K025 F380 B130
H216 .1-.4 (0.00) B027 d028 F1610
F270 B90 H252 (0) H262 (0)
K026 d023 B B 1 = "Fault F122"
H217 .1-.4 (0.00) H234 .1-.4 (0) H243 (0)
F280 F390 K
K027 B028
H218 .1-.4 (0.00)
F290 B100 B140
K028 H235 .1-.4 (0) d024 d029 F1620
F400 H244 (0) H253 (0) H263 (0)
H219 .1-.4 (0.00)
F300 B029 K B B 1 = "Fault F123"
K029
H220 .1-.4 (0.00)
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

F310
K030
H221 .1-.4 (0.00) Fixed setpoint <1> High-resolution connector display Constant fixed setpoints
F320 Setting range -32768 ... +32767 and control bits
K031 belongs to switchover parameter set [36]
0% K000
H222 .1-.4 (0.00) B105
F330 H224 .1-.4 (0) τ ≈ 300 ms d025 100% K001
K032 B160 H245 (0)
K177 K 0 B000
H223 .1-.4 (0.00)
F340 1 B001
K033 <1> starting with software version 1.1 -8-

02.99
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

02.99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Alarm message trigger signals to basic unit Voltage monitoring of electronics power supply

B10 POWER ON
F140
H264 (0) [28.4], [28.7],
B 1 = "Alarm A100" [30.2], [34.1],
[34.3], [34.5],
100ms [34.7]

B030
POWER ON

B20
H265 (0)
B 1 = "Alarm A101"
10ms

B031
POWER OFF

B30
H266 (0)
B 1 = "Alarm A102"

B40
H267 (0)
B 1 = "Alarm A103"

Block diagram
-9-
2-11
 2-12

Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
T100 T100
Basic unit
Slot 2
Process data exchange with MASTERDRIVES Slot 2
Basic unit
(MASTER DRIVES / SIMOREG) (MASTER DRIVES / SIMOREG)
CUVC, CUMC, CUDC ... MC / VC (from 1997 / 98) and SIMOREG 6RA70 CUVC, CUMC, CUDC ...
F180 F1670
DPRAM (see also Chapter 3.8) DPRAM
CB / TB CB / TB
Actual value area Note: setpoint area
Set bit 10 of control word 1 to "1"
if the basic unit must accept the
process data (words 1 ... 10)
from the T100.
SIMOREG U734 (0)
MASTER- P734 (0) Control word 1 Bit 0 ... Bit 15
DRIVES .01 Word 1: Status word 1 Word 1:
K 32 to basic unit B3100 B3115 <1>
Status word 1 from basic unit [13.1] Control word 1
[11.4]

d031.01 d031.09
.02 Word 2: Word 2:
K K038 K3002
Actual value 1 Setpoint 1
4 K046
*
d031.02 <3> d031.10
.03 Word 3: Word 3:
K K039 K3003
Actual value 2 Setpoint 2
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

4 K047
*
<3> Control word 2 Bit 0 ... Bit 15
.04 Word 4: Status word 2 to basic unit Word 4:
K 33 B3400 B3415 <2>
Status word 2 from basic unit [14.1] [12.4] Control word 2
d032.01 to .07
d031.03 d031.11
.05 Word 5: H275. (0) Word 5:
K K040 K3005
Actual value 3 .01 Setpoint 3
4 K048 K
* K
.02
d031.04 <3> d031.12 .03
.06 Word 6: K Word 6:
K K041 .04 K3006
Actual value 4 Setpoint 4
4 K
K049
* K
.05
d031.05 <3> d031.13 .06
.07 Word 7: K Word 7:
K K042 K3007
Actual value 5 .07 Setpoint 5
K
4 K050 .08
* K
d031.06 <3> d031.14
.08 Word 8: Word 8:
K Actual value 6 K043 Setpoint 6 K3008
4 K051
* 0,00...19,99
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

d031.07 <3> d031.15 H278 H279

.09 Word 9: x Word 9:
K K044 (1.00) (1.00) K3009
Actual value 7 Setpoint 7
4 P-gain adapt. factor
K052 y
* for speed controller
d031.08 <3> d031.16 y2 y 0.00...19.99
.10 Word 10: Word 10: K3010
K K045
Actual value 8 Setpoint 8
4 K053 y1
*
<3> x1 x2 x <1> Control word 1 is connected
<3> Scaling d033 - via P548...P575 on MASTERDRIVES
The "*4" multiplication must not normally be used on - via P648, P654...P675 on 6RA70
MASTERDRIVES MC/VC from 1997 / 98 onwards H276 H277
<2> Control word 2 is connected
or the 6RA70. (0.00) (100.00)
- via P576...P590 on MASTERDRIVES - 10 -
0.00...200.00%

02.99
- via P649, P676...P690 on 6RA70
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

02.99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Basic unit T100 Process data exchange with MASTERDRIVES T100 Basic unit
(MASTER DRIVES FC, VC or SC) (MASTER DRIVES FC, VC or SC)
basic units (old series, 1995 onwards)
F180 F1670
DPRAM (see also Chapter 3.8) DPRAM
CB / TB CB / TB
Interconnection parameters: Actual value area Setpoint area
xxx = Number of Note:
r or P parameter to Set bit 10 of the Control Word 1 to "1" if Injection of setpoints/ Scales:
be "wired up" to the basic unit must accept the process control bits via <1> 100% corresp. to P420
DPRAM data (word 1...10) from the T100 parameter: <2> 100% corresp. to P485

Control word 1
Word 1: Status word 1 Word 1: P554 ...575 Control word 1,
P694.1 = 968 to basic unit
Status word 1 from basic unit [13.1] Control word 1 = 3001 connected bit-for-bit
[11.4]

d031.01 d031.09
Word 2: Word 2: Main setpoint
P694.2 = xxx K038 P443 = 3002
Actual value 1 Setpoint 1 (frequency or speed) <1>
*4 K046
d031.02 <3> d031.10
Word 3: Word 3: Additive supplementary setpoint
P694.3 = xxx K039 P433 = 3003 (Frequency or speed) <1>
Actual value 2 Setpoint 2
*4 K047
<3> Control word 2
Word 4: Status word 2 to basic unit Word 4: P576 ...591 Control word 2,
P694.4 = 553
Status word 2 from basic unit [14.1] [12.4] Control word 2 = 3004 connected bit-for-bit
d032.01 to .07
d031.03 d031.11 Supplementary setpoint 2 after
Word 5: H275. (0) Word 5: ramp-function generator
P694.5 = xxx K040 P438 = 3005
Actual value 3 .01 Setpoint 3
K (speed or frequency
*4 K048
K
.02 with VC, SC only) <1>
d031.04 <3> d031.12 .03
Word 6: K Word 6: Supplementary torque setpoint
P694.6 = xxx K041 .04 P506 = 3006 (with VC, SC only) <1>
Actual value 4 Setpoint 4
K
*4 K049
K
.05
d031.05 <3> d031.13 .06
Word 7: K Word 7: Motor-made torque limit
P694.7 = xxx K042 .07 P493 = 3007
Actual value 5 K Setpoint 5 (with VC, SC only) <1>
*4 K050
K
.08
d031.06 <3> d031.14
Word 8: Word 8: Generator-mode torque limit
P694.8 = xxx Actual value 6 K043 Setpoint 6 P499 = 3008
(with VC, SC only) <1>
*4 K051 0.00...19.99
d031.07 <3> d031.15 H278 H279 Torque setpoint for
Word 9: x Word 9: slave drive
P694.9 = xxx K044 (1.00) (1.00) P486 = 3009
Actual value 7 Setpoint 7 (acts on torque limit;
P-gain adapt. factor
*4 K052 y
for speed controller
with VC, SC only ) <2>
d031.08 <3> d031.16 y2 y 0.00...19.99
Word 10: Word 10: Adaptation factor for P-
P694.10 = xxx K045 P226 = 3010 gain of speed controller
Actual value 8 Setpoint 8
4 K053 y1 (with VC only)
*
<3> x1 x2 x
d033

Block diagram
<3> Scaling
The "* 4" multiplication operation re-scales the basic
unit signals, which are scaled with 100% = 1000Hex H276 H277
("PZD groups" 2 to 5) to the connector representation (0.00) (100.00)
0.00...200.00% - 10a -
2-13

of the T100 (100% = 4000Hex)

 2-14

Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
<1> Bit-for-bit input of control bits via H272 <3> Meaning of control bits inSIMOREG:
Control word 1 to basic unit possible only when H272 = 2 See SIMOREG Operating Instructions

F1660 0 1 = State of control bits in basic unit control word 1 (r550) required to allow the motor to rotate
(for a "normal" application)
Selection of control word 2 = Priority of OFF Bits: OFF2 top priority, OFF3 medium priority, OFF1 lowest priority
H270 (2)
Available Connection of Connection of
K in Meaning of control bits from DPRAM basic converter on MASTERDRIVES <3> control bit on control bit
Master Drives
Bit No. A control bit takes effect in the basic unit only if it is MASTERDRIVES on SIMOREG
FC VC SC/
Selection of control bits <1> connected to DPRAM word 1 via P554 - P575 = 31xx via ("/" = "or") via ("/" = "or")
MC
H272 (0)
.01 Bit 0 1 x x x 0 = Ramp stop (OFF1): Shutdown of drive via ramp-function generator P554 P654
B
followed by pulse disable and main contactor OPEN (if installed) 2

.02 Bit 1 1 x x x 0 = Electrical OFF (OFF2: Pulse diable, main contactor OPEN P555 / P556 / P655 / P656 /
B
motor coasts to standstill) 2 P557 P657

.03 Bit 2 1 x x x 0 = Fast stop (OFF3: Braking via DC braking function or fast stop ramp followed, P558 / P559 / P658 / P659 /
B
by pulse disable and main contactor OPEN (if installed)) 2 P560 P660

.04 Bit 3 1 x x x 1 = Inverter enable / 0 = inverter disable (pulse disable P561 P661
B
and main contactor open (if installed))
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

.05
B Bit 4 1 x x x 0 = Set ramp generator output 0 (RFG-output=0) / 1 = Enable ramp function generator P562 P662

.06 Bit 5 1 x x x 0 = Stop ramp function generator (output frozen at instantaneous value) P563 P663
B
/ 1 = Start ramp function generator
.07
B Bit 6 1 x x x 1 = Enable setpoint for ramp-function generat. / 0 = Disable setp. forRFG (0 output) P564 P664

.08 Bit 7 0 x x x 0 1 edge = fault acknowledgement P565 / P566 / P665 / P666 /

B
P567 P667
.09
B Bit 8 0 x x x 1 = INCHING 1 (includes OFF1 = 1 command see bit 0) or INCHING bit 0 P568 P668
.10 Bit 9 0 _ x x 1 = INCHING 2 (includes OFF1 = 1 command, see bit 0) or INCHING bit 1 P569 P669
B

Bit 10 1 x x x 1 = Control requested (setpoints and control commands from e.g. always connected always connected
.11 communications/technology board are accepted, has no effect on if T100 if T100
<2> B
parameter transfer) / 0 = No setpoint control installed installed

.12 Bit 11 1 x x x 1 = Clockwise phase sequence (whenbit 11 = 1 and bit 12 = 1 the direction P571 P671
<2> B of rotation is determined by the setpoint sign)
Control bit 10 must be selected with "1" .13 Bit 12 1 x x x 1 = Counter-clockwise phase sequence (when Bit 11 = 0 and Bit 12 = 0 setpoint 0 P572 P672
(e.g. by setting H272.11=1) if setpoints B
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

is input allows fail-safe input of rotational direction)

of control commands are to be sent to
the basic unit via the T100 software, .14
via a serial interface of the T100 or via B Bit 13 0 x x x 1 = Raise mot. potentiometer P573 P673
communications board! .15
B Bit 14 0 x x x 1 = Lower mot. potentiometer P574 P674
.16 Bit 15 0 x x x 0 = External fault 1 (F035) P575 P675
B

Display of control bits on the 7-segment display:

K036
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Control word 1
d030.03 to basic unit [10.5] [10a.5]
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - 11 -

02.99
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

02.99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Control word 2 to basic unit <1> Bit-for-bit input of control bits via H272 <3> Meaning of control bits in SIMOREG:
possible only when H271 = 2 See SIMOREG Operating Instructions
0 1 = State of control bits in basic unit control word 2 (r551) required to allow the motor to rotate
(for a "normal" application)
F1660 3 = The data sets and fixed setpoints are selected via binary code,
i.e. 4 data sets and 4 fixed setpoints can be activated in VC, SC and MC
Selection of control word
H271 (2)
Available Connection of Connection of
K Meaning of control bits from DPRAM basic converter on MASTERDRIVES <3>
in control bit on control bit on
Bit No. Master Drives A control bit takes effect in the basic unit only if it is connected to DPRAM word 4 MASTERDRIVES SIMOREG
Selection of control bits <1>
FC VC SC MC via P554 - P576 - P591 = 34xx via <4> via
H272 (0)
.17
B Bit 16 0 x x x x Selection of function data set or setpoint channel data set switchover, bit 0 3 P576 P676
.18
B Bit 17 0 _ x x x Selection of function data set or setpoint channel data set switchover, bit 1 3 P577 P677
.19
B Bit 18 0 x x x _ Motor data set switchover, bit 0 3 P578 --
.20
B Bit 19 0 _ x _ _ Motor data set switchover, bit 1 3 P579 --
.21
B Bit 20 0 x x x x Selection of fixed setpoint, bit 0 3 P580 P680
.22
B Bit 21 0 x x x x Selection of fixed setpoint, bit 1 3 P581 P681
.23
B Bit 22 0 _ x _ _ 1 = Enable synchronization (only in conjunction with TSY board) P582 --
.24
B Bit 23 0 x x x x 1 = Enable restart-on-the-fly P583 --
.25
B Bit 24 0 _ x _ _ 1 = Enable droop, speed controller P584 P684
.26
B Bit 25 1 _ x x x 1 = Enable speed controller P585 P685
.27
B Bit 26 1 x x x x 0 = External fault 2 (F036) P586 P686
.28
B Bit 27 0 _ x x x 1/0 = Slave / master drive (1 = torque control / 0 = speed control) P587 P687
.29
B Bit 28 1 x x x x 0 = External alarm 1 (A015) P588 P688
.30
B Bit 29 1 x x x x 0 = External alarm 2 (A016) P589 P689
.31
B Bit 30 0 x x x x 0/1 =Selection of BICO data set 1 / 2 or P590 P690
basic / reserve setting for setpoints and control commands
.32
B Bit 31 1 _ _ _ _ 1 = Main contactor energized (check-back contact); -- --
not meaningful in DPRAM, can only be "wired" to basic unit terminals

Display of control bits on the 7-segmented display

K037
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 <4> On MASTERDRIVES FC / VC / SC units
Control word 2 of the old series (1995 onwards), "3004"
d030.04 [10.5] [10a.5]
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 to basic unit must be entered in each of the connection

Block diagram
parameters to wire up the control bit to T100

- 12 -
2-15
 2-16

Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Status word 1 from basic unit

Display of status bits on the 7-segment display:

d030.01 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 <1> Meaning of status bits in SIMOREG:

See SIMOREG Operating Instructions
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
K034

Meaning of status bits on MASTER DRIVES <1>

Available
in
Status word 1 must be connected to DPRAM word 1 via the following parameter settings: F170
Status word 1 Master Drives
- On MASTERDRIVES MC / VC (1997 / 98 onwards): P734.01 = 32
from basic unit Bit No. - On MASTERDRIVES FC / VC / SC (1995 onwards): P694.1 = 968
[10.3] - On SIMOREG 6RA70: U734.01 = 32
FC VC SC MC

Bit 0 x x x x 1 = Ready to switch on (status 008 or 009; open-loop / closed-loop control in operational state, B032
main contactor open (if installed), pulses disabled

Bit 1 x x x x 1 = Ready (status 010 or 011; main contactor closed (if installed);
B033
DC link charged, pulses disabled)

Bit 2 x x x x 1 = Run / 0 = pulses disabled, no voltage at output terminals B034

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

Bit 3 x x x x 1 = Fault (no power, fault number "Fxxx" on PMU and in r947.1) B035

Bit 4 x x x x 1 = Electrical OFF command applied (OFF 2 = 0; see control bit 1) B036

Bit 5 x x x x 1 = Fast stop command applied (OFF 3 = 0; see control bit 2) B037

Bit 6 x x x x 1 = Switch-on inhibit: Status 008. Drive stationary as the result of a fault or a "0" level of
control command signals "0 = Electrical OFF" (OFF 2) and / or "0 = fast stop" (OFF 3).
B038
Drive can be started only by a "1" level of these control command signals and a 0 1 edge
transition of signal "0 = ramp stop" (OFF 1, control bit 0).

Bit 7 x x x x 1 = Alarm is active. Alarm number"Axxx" on PMU. The active alarm types are indicated
B039
by the alarm bits in r953 to r960.

Bit 8 x x x x 0 = Setpoint/actual value deviation in frequency is greater than set in P792 or P517 over time
B040
period set in P794 or P518. Alarm A034 is active.

Bit 9 x x x x 1 = PZD control requested by drive (bit 9 is always set to = 1). Automatic mode (TECH or COM
BOARD) is not deselected by means of bit 9, but for example, by means of basic / reserve switchover or B041
BICO data set switchover.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

Bit 10 x x x x 1 = Comparison frequency reached: The absol. act. freq. is higher than setting in P796 or P512
B042
(hysteresis P797 or P513)

Bit 11 x x x x 1 = DC link undervoltage, fault message F008 is active B043

Bit 12 x x x x 1 = Main contactor energized (if installed) B044

Bit 13 x x x x 1 = Ramp-function generator active (ramp generator output is not equal to input) B045

Bit 14 x x x x 1 / 0 = Clockwise / counter-clockwise phase sequence B046

Bit 15 x x x _ 1 = KIP active: The "Kinetic buffering" function is active (decrease in Ud and f) B047

- 13 -

02.99
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

02.99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Status word 2 from basic unit

Display of status bits on the 7-segment display: <1> Meaning of status bits in SIMOREG:
See SIMOREG Operating Instructions
d030.02 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
<2> This signal is inverted (1 = overspeed)
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 on MASTERDRIVES MC

K035
Meaning of status bits on MASTER DRIVES <1>
Available (Status word 2 must be connected selectively to DPRAM word 4 by setting parameter P694.4 = 553)
in Status word 2 must be connected to DPRAM word 2 via the following parameter settings F170
Status word 2 Master Drives - On MASTERDRIVES MC / VC (1997 / 98 onwards): P734.04 = 33
from basic unit Bit - Nr. - On MASTERDRIVES FC / MC / SC (1995 onwards): P694.4 = 553
[10.3] - On SIMOREG 6RA70: U734.04 = 33
FC VC SC MC

Bit 16 x x x x 1 = Restart-on-the-fly or excitation active B048

Bit 17 _ x _ _ 1 = Synchronism reached (only in conjunction with TSY board) B049

Bit 18 x x x x 0 = Overspeed: Frequency actual value > P452 or P453, alarm A033 is active <2> B050

Bit 19 x x x x 1 = External fault 1 is active (F035) B051

Bit 20 x x x x 1 = External fault 2 is active (F036) B052

Bit 21 x x x x 1 = External alarm 1 or 2 is active (A015 or A016) B053

2
Bit 22 x x x x 1 = Alarm i t converter: The drive has been operating under overload for a period corresponding
to more than half the maximum permissible overlod time. If overload operation continues, B054
the current may be reduced automatically to the base load value

Bit 23 x x x x 1 = Converter overtemperature fault signal (F023): The inverter temperature has reached the B055
trip value (signal from temperature sensor on heat sink)

Bit 24 x x x x 1 = Converter overtemperature alarm signal (A022): "Inverter temperature too high" alarm active, B056
fault F023 (see bit 23) may occur if converter load conditions remain unchanged

Bit 25 x x x x 1 = Motor overtemperature alarm signal: Alarm A023 / A029

B057
(i2t - alarm for motor, see P380 / P360 to P364)
Fault F020/F021 (see bit 26) may occur if motor load conditions remain unchanged).

Bit 26 x x x x 1 = Motor overtemperature fault: Fault F020 / F021 is active (see P381 / P360 to P364)
B058
Motor temperature is measured by thermal-i2t image of motor implemented in software or
by temperature sensor)

Bit 27 _ _ _ _ Reserved for future application B059

Bit 28 x x _ x 1 = Motor stalled / blocked B060

Bit 29 x x x x 1 = Bypass contactor energized for precharging of DC link B061

Bit 30 _ x _ _ 1 = Synchronizing fault alarm (only in conjunction with TSY board) B062

B063

Block diagram
Bit 31 x x x x 1 = Pre-charging active (status 010)

- 14 -
2-17
 2-18

Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Read or write basic converter parameters dynamically <1>

(see also Chapter 3.11)

T100 Basic unit

Parameter number Index

B150 H282 H283
<3> 0...999 (0) 0...116 (0) Enable parameters
via P53 = n+16

Set H284 = 2 to
read basic unit
parameters
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

H284 (0) <2> <4> Write P parameter

K of basic unit
100% = 16384 Parameter
processing
in
basic unit
<4> Read P or r parameter
K054 of basic unit
16384 = 100%

d048 Diagnostic information

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

<1> It is possible to read or write any basic unit parameters via the USS interface of theT100 and NOTE
via the COM BOARD independently of this dynamic read/write function
The "Read or write basic converter parameters dynamically" function
<2> Change in RAM of basic unit, not in EEPROM, refresh time approx.250 ms will not be available on MASTERDRIVES MC / VC (1997 /98 series)
<3> The dynamic parameter transfer is deactivated with H282 = 0 until about mid-1998

<4> Only the HIGH word is evaluated in double word parameters

- 15 -

02.99
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

02.99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(see also Chapter 3.5)
Data exchange via USS interface on T100
<1>
Receive data Transmit data

d035.17 d035.18 d035.19 d035.20 [Hex] d036.17 d036.18 d036.19 d036.20 [Hex]
USS parameter data USS parameter data
Word1: Param. ID Word 1: Param ID
(PKE) Processing (PKE)
for
Word 2: Param.Index Word 2: Param.Index
r, P,
Word 3: Param.value Word 3: Param.value
Low word d and H Low word
Word4: Param.value parameters Word 4: Param value
High word High word

from USS to USS

interface d035.01 to .10 [Hex] interface
F1770 d036.01 to .10 [Hex]
(terminals 65...68) (terminals 65...68)
Process data Process data
[1.6] from USS interface F160 to USS interface [1.6]
H296. (0)
.01
Word 1 K161 K Word 1
.02
Word 2 K162 K Word 2
.03
Word 3 K163 K Word 3
.04
Word 4 K164 K Word 4
.05
Word 5 K165 K Word 5
.06
Word 6 K166 K Word 6
.07
Word 7 K167 K Word 7
.08
Word 8 K168 K Word 8
.09
Word 9 K169 K Word 9
.10
Word 10 K170 K Word 10

Parameters for USS interface

Fault message trigger signal to
H290 (0) USS on/off 1 = Telegram basic unit
monitoring timeout H297 (197)
H291 (0,000s) Message monitoring time (0="no time monitoring") B197 B 1 = "Fault F117"

H292 (0) Slave address

H293 (6) Baud rate B198 <1>

H294 (2) Length of process data 1s

NOTE
H295 (127) Length of parameter data
The function for accessing basic unit parameters via the USS
d037 USS diagnostic parameters

Block diagram
interface on the T100 will not be available on MASTERDRIVES
P053 Enabling parameterization MC / VC (1997 /98 series) until about mid-1998 (applies to P, r, U
(H and P parameters can be altered only P53=n+16. and n parameters)
All P, r, H and d parameters can always be read) - 16 -
2-19
 2-20

Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Data exchange via peer-to-peer connection on T100 board

(see also Chapter 3.6)

Receive data Transmit data

F150 F1760
d040.01 to.05 [Hex] d041.01 to .05 [Hex]
RS485 RS485
receiver transmitter
H304 (0)
.01
72 Rx+ Word 1 K057 K Word 1 Tx+
.02 70
Word 2 K058 K Word 2
from preceding .03 to next drive
Word 3 K059 K Word 3
drive in group 73 Rx- .04 in group
K Tx- 71
Word 4 K060 Word 4
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

.05
Word 5 K061 K Word 5

Parameters for peer-to-peer interface

H300 (0) Peer-to-peer on/off Fault message trigger signal to

1 = Telegram basic unit
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

monitoring timeout H305 (199)

H301 (0,000s) Message monitoring time
B199 B 1 = "Fault F118"
(0="no time monitoring")

H302 (10) Baud rate

B200

H303 (1) Number of words (1...5) 1s

d042 Peer-to-peer diagnostic parameter

- 17 -

02.99
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

02.99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(see also Chapter 3.7)

Process data exchange with COM BOARD (CBx or SCBx)
(the process data connection from/to the COM BOARD is not made via P694!)

Receive data Transmit data

d045.01 to .10 [Hex] <1> d046.01 to .10 [Hex]

F190 F1680
H311. (0)
<2> Word 1 K062 <5> .01
K Word 1
Word 2 K063 .02
K Word 2
Word 3 K064 .03
K Word 3
Word 4 K065 .04
K Word 4
Word 5 K066 .05
K Word 5
from COM BOARD .06 to COM BOARD
Word 6 K067 K Word 6
Word 7 K068 .07
K Word 7
Word 8 K069 .08
K Word 8
Word 9 K070 .09
K Word 9
Word 10 K071 .10
K Word 10

Parameters for COM BOARD <4>

MASTERDRIVE MASTERDRIVE 1 = Message
Fault message trigger signal to basic unit
from 1997 / 98 from 1995 monitoring time
H312 (195)
timeout
H310 (0.000s) H310 (0.000s) Message monitoring time (0="no time monitoring") <1> B195 B 1 = "Fault F116"

P918 P918 Slave address

P711 - P721 P696 - P705, COM BOARD configuration for CBx B196
P918
1s
P696 - P705 P660 - P662, COM BOARD configuration for SCBx <1> If a T100 is installed, the message monitoring time is not set on the basic unit (e.g. in
P665, P666, P704, P722 / P687, P695) but in H310, and the process data connection not made
P682 - P689 via P734 or P664, P690 and P694, but via H311 and K062 - K071.
<2> IMPORTANT !
r732, r958 r731, r958 CBx diagnostic, alarm parameters <3> The PROFIBUS interface (e.g. CBP / CB1) does not forward messages to the T100
r697 r730 SCBx dagnostic parameters
if word 1 consists entirely of zeros (suppression of "initialization messages"). For this
reason, it is advisable to use word 1 as a control word.
P053 P053 Enable parameterization
(H and P parameters can be changed only when P053=n+1 Bit 10 should in this case be reserved for "master function requested" and interconnected
for CBx or P053=n+8 for SCBx. to control word 1 of the basic unit (see note <2> on Sheet [11]).
All P, r ,U, n, H and d parameters can always be read). <3> On the "old" MASTERDRIVES (1995 onwards) the contents of CBx messages can be
monitored in r731.09 to .18 (with P696 = 1 or 2)
<4> If the T100 is installed in a SIMOREG, please consult the relevant Operating Instructions for
information about COM BOARD parameters.

Block diagram
<5> It is strongly recommended that transmit word 1 to the COM BOARD is permanently
connected to status word 1 of the basic unit, as the PROFIBUS-DP interface
CBP basically interprets bit 2^3 of this word as a fault bit, and signals a converter
fault to the control system when it changes to the "1" state. - 18 -
2-21
 2-22

Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

F410
3 connector/binector converters
Bit field 1
Connector/binector converter 1 d056
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 <1>

B064
H320 (0) B065
.01
K B066
.02
K B067
.03
K B068
B069
B070
B071
B072
B073
B074
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

B075
B076
B077
B078
B079
F430 F420

Bit field 3 Bit field 2

Connector/binector converter 3 d058 Connector/binector converter 2 d057
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 <1> 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 <1>

B096 B080
B097 B081
B098 B082
B099 B083
B100 B084
B101 B085
B102 B086
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

B103 B087
B104 B088
B105 B089
B106 B090
B107 <1> 7-segment display of bit fields B091
B108 to d056, d057 and d058 B092
B109 B093
B110 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 B094
B111 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 B095

- 19 -

02.99
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

02.99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3 Binector/connector converters

H324 (0) H325 (0)

.01 .01
B B
.02 .02
B B
.03 .03
B B
.04 .04
B B
.05 .05
B B
.06 .06
B B
.07 .07
B B
.08 .08
B B
.09 .09
B B
.10 .10
B B
.11 .11
B F1630 B F1640
.12 .12
B B
.13 .13
B B
.14 .14
B B
.15 .15
B B
.16 .16
B d053 <1> B d054 <1>

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit field 4 K072 Bit field 5 K073
Binector/connector converter 1 Binector/connector converter2

H326 (0)
.01
B
.02
B
.03
B
.04
B
.05
B
.06
B
.07
B
.08
B
.09
B
.10
B
.11
B F1650
.12
B
.13
B
.14
B
.15
B
.16
B d055 <1> <1> 7-segment display of bit fields
to d053, d054 and d055
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Block diagram
K074 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Bit field 6
Binector/connector converter 3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

- 20 -
2-23
 2-24

Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H339 (0) P -gain adaption for technology controller Technology controller F1240
K (see also Chapter 3.12)

P-gain factors K080 Setpoint/actual value difference

0.10...30.00 H347 (0.0)
Setpoint/actual value
H342 H343 K081
<1> difference after droop
(1.00) (1.00) 0%
X
H346 (0) K082 P component
<1> <1> 0 1
Y B
K083 I component
d062
Technology controller
Y2 Y droop injection

P-gain factor
1000 1 H345 (0)
Y1 H348 H349 H354 (1) H358 (1)
(100.00) (-100.00) 1 0 <1> K K
X1 X2 X
<1> <1>
H355 H359
H333 (0) H332 (0.000) (100.0) (100.0)
<1> <1> H338 H344
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

<1> <1> (3.00) (3.000) <1> <1>

H340 H341
(0.00) (100.00) 0 <1> <1>
0.00...200.00% 1
thresholds 1000
1
K075 K076 * -1 K086
K077 pos. limit
Actual value Filter time [s]
K084
H331 (0.00)
P-gain Tn [ms] d063
H330 (0) d060
.01 <1>
K D component Technology controller
K
.02 -
.03 - + x y
+ K088
+ +
K
.04
K + +
Filter time [s]
Setpoint K087
d061 H337 (0.00) Make I component follow
H334 (0) 1 so that |x| < |y|
.01 <1>

Actual value polarity

K 0% 0 neg. limit

0 = I component=0
0 = P component=0
.02 H350 (0) H357
K 0% 1 Enable technology controller K085
.03 B (100.0)
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

K
.04 + 0
K Setpoint <1>
H353 (0) Set I component
B B112
[21.8] Technology controller
H352 (0) at output limit
Setting value for I component
H336 (0) K H356 (086)
B K078 K079 K
1 0
Inject technology
controller supplem. 0 = D component is effective only in actual value channel H351
setpoint <1> parameterizable 1 = Normal PID controller: D component is effective for control deviation (0011)
T H Z E
H335 (0) supplemen. setpoint <1>
<1> Four different datasets for these parameters can be selected by means of the parameter switchover function [36] - 21 -

02.99
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

02.99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Comfort ramp-function
F1010 Ramp-up Ramp-down Lower transition Upper transition
generator time time rounding rounding Limitation in ramp-function generator
(see also Chapter 3.13)
H381 (0.00s) H382 (0.00s) H383 (0.00s) H384 (0.00s) .. RFG setting 3 H385
H376 (1) H377 (0.00s) H378 (0.00s) H379 (0.00s) H380 (0.00s) ...RFG setting 2 (100.00)
.01 H386 (101)
K
.02 K101 K B+
K
H372 H373 H374 H375 ... RFG setting 1 [22.4]
(0.00) (0,00) (0.00) (0.00)
RFG Effective -1
Adaptation of
ramp-up/ramp-down setting parameters
times 3 2
0 0 H372 - H375 H387 (102)
0 1 H377 - H380 K102 K B-
1 0 H381 - H384 [22.4]
H370 (0) RFG setting 2
B Ramp-up/ Rounding H392 (2)
This switchover to RFG setting 2 and 3 ramp-down .01
time K
has priority over input of RFG setting 3 Parameter .02 Positive
by starting integrator control K
selection .03 setpoint limit
H371 (0) K
RFG setting 3 .04 H391
B K
(100.00)
≥1 K091 K093
from starting integrator control
(see H366)
K092 [22.8] K094 Minimum
Ramp-function Lowest positive
B+ K098
H360 (0) setpoint limit
generator input y=x
K K089 B113
y=0 K097
(RFG d065
0 B114
output) 0 H390 (2) <2>
x .01
K096 K096 K K100
1 Setpoint y .02
0% 1 K
H361 (0) .03 Limitation after
Stop ramp-function generator d066 K ramp-function
B .04 B115
(freeze y) K generator has
dy/dt
responded
H362 (1) K090 <2> Factory setting 2 means
Shut down (via RFG setting 1) B- Index 01: Connected to RGF output K099
Highest negative
B setpoint limit
K095 Index 02 - 04: Fixed value 0
[22.8]
H364 (0)
Setting value 1 Maximum
K
H369 (0) H367 (0.01)
0 1 = Ramp-function Time difference [s] H394 (2)
H365 (0) generator tracking .01 <1>
Set ramp-function generator K H393
B (y=setting value) when L+/L- reached .02 <1> (-100.00)
K
.03 <1>
Starting integrator operation ON (automatic switchover to K negative
H366 (0) .04 <1> setpoint limit
RFG setting 3 after enabling of RFG and initial ramp-up 3) <3> Scaling K091 K
B to K094: 1==0.01s
<1> When H394.0x = 2, the positive limit selected

Block diagram
H368 (0) by H392.0x acts with sign inversion as a
Enable ramp-function generator
B negative limit
(with "0" signal y=0)
- 22 -
2-25
 2-26

Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 ... Motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator is bypassed in automatic mode

(effect the same as with H402 and H403 = 0)
1 ... Motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator is effective in the manual and automatic modes
Motorized potentiometer
(see also Chapter 3.14) 0 ... No storage of output value: The output (K158) is set to 0 if status word 1 Bit 2 = 0 [13.3]
(not "Run") and when the supply voltage is connected

1 ... Non-volatile storage of output value: The output value (K158) remains stored in all H404 (0)
60 1
operational states and after disconnection or failure of supply voltage. On recovery
of the power supply, the last value stored is output again. <1>
1 0

H400
(0101)
F670 T H Z E
<1>

Setpoint for automatic mode Ramp-up time Ramp-down time Time difference
H402 (10.00s) H403 (10.00s) H412 (10.00s)
H401 (0) <1>
<1> <1> <1>
K
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

H413
(+100.00%)
<1> <2>
-100% 1
Ramp-function generator dy/dt
with non-volatile memory K160
0

2 x y
1 1
1 K159
0% 1 -1
+100% 1 1
0 <1>
0
0
0 0 Operating range H411 (100) d067
0: 0% to +100% weighting
<1> <2>
1: -100% to +100%
H414 K158

K180 (-100.00%)

≥1 Output = 0
y=0
B117
0
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

Ramp-up
1 complete
y = x or at limit
(Capacitor Setting value B116
symbolizes 0
H410 (0) <1>
value memory)
K <1> Four different datasets for these parameters
1
can be selected by means of the parameter
H409 (0) set switchover function [36]
H405 (0) H406 (0) H407 (0) H408 (0)
B B B B B
<2> H413 and H414: starting with software
Raise setpoint Lower setpoint Clockwise/counter-clockwise Manual/Automatic Set mot. potentiometer version 1.1
- 23 -

02.99
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

02.99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Wobbler amplitude Wobbler frequency Phase displacement Negative P jump Positive P jump Pulse/pause ratio Wobble generator
(see also Chapter 3.15 and 6.9)
(time component of rising edge)
0.00...+20.0 0.1...120.0 0...360 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00 0...100
[% of IN] [Faults/min] [ el] [% of H421] [% of H421] [% of Tw] F1020

H421.01-04 (0.00) H422.01-04 (60.0) H423.01-04 (360) H424.01-04 (0.00) H425.01-04 (0.00) H426.01-04 (50)

<2> <2> <1> <2> <2> <2> <2> < 1 > When H423 = 360:
Synchronizing signal from master is ignored
(free-wheeling wobbler)

< 2 > Four different datasets for these parameters can

be selected by means of the parameter set
Synchronizing signal Wobbler synchronizing input switchover function [36]
from master
<1>
H419 (0)
B

H423 H423 H420 (0) Enable wobble generator

B
Modulation always starts with a positive
Wobbler triangle generator zero crossing and always ends on the
next zero crossing.
OUT
H426*Tw
H421
H424

d068
Unmodulated setpoint
0% Wobbler signal
0
H418 (0) IN OUT K103
K
t 1
Modulated setpoint

+ K104
H425
-H421
Tw = 1 / H422

Wobbler synchronizing output

Synchronizing signal
to slave
B118

0.5*Tw

Block diagram
- 24 -
2-27
 2-28

Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

5 adders

H430 (0) H433 (0) H436 (0) H439 (0) H442 (0)
K F590 K F680 K F950 K F1030 K F1370

H431 (0) H434 (0) H437 (0) H440 (0) H443 (0)
K + K105 K + K106 K + K107 K + K108 K + K109

H432 (0) H435 (0) H438 (0) H441 (0) H444 (0)
K K K K K

3 subtractors Switchable sign inverter

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

H445 (0) H447 (0) H449 (0)

K F720 K F1070 K F1310

+ + + H455 (0) F920

K110 K111 K112 B
- - -
H446 (0) H448 (0) H450 (0)
K K K H454 (0)
0
K
K116
1
x y
-1
3 sign inverters y = -x
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

F580 F840 F1450

H451 (0) H452 (0) H453 (0)
x y x y x y
K -1 K113 K -1 K114 K -1 K115

y = -x y = -x y = -x

- 25 -

02.99
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

02.99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3 dividers 4 multipliers

H456 (0) x1 H462 (0) x1 H464 (0) x1 H466 (0) x1 H468 (0) x1
K F730 K F650 K F750 K F1080 K F1460

y y y y y
K117 K120 K121 K122 K123
H457 (1) H463 (0) x2 H465 (0) x2 H467 (0) x2 H469 (0) x2
x2
K K K K K

x1 *100% x1 * x2 x1 * x2 x1 * x2 x1 * x2
x2 100% 100% 100% 100%

3 high-resolution multipliers/dividers
H458 (0) x1
K F960

y
K118 H470 (0) <1> F740 H474 (0) F910
x1 d 07 0 x1 <1>
d 07 1
H459 (1) x2 K K
K
x4 y x4 y
K124 K125
(32 bits) (16 bits) (32 bits) (16 bits)
x1 *100% H471 (0) x2 H475 (0) x2
x2 K K

x4 = y= x4 = y=
x1 * x2 x4 / x3 x1 * x2 x4 / x3
H472 (1) H476 (1)
x3 (16 bits) x3 (16 bits)
H460 (0) x1 K K
K F1380

y
K119
H461 (1) x2 F1150 Examples:
H478 (0) x1 <1>
K d 07 2
K x1 x2 x3 y
When divided by 0 (x3 = 0):
x1 *100% x4 y When x4 > 0: y = +199.99% 100% 100% 100% 100%
K126 When x4 = 0: y = 0.00% 100% 40% 50% 80%
x2 (32 bit) (16 bits)
H479 (0) x2 When x4 < 0: y = -199.99% -200% -200% -200% -200%
K

When divided by: 0 (x2 = 0): x4 = y=

When x1 > 0: y = +199.99% x1 * x2 x4 / x3

Block diagram
When x1 = 0: y = 0.00% H480 (1) <1> Value range of x4 corresponds to -400% ... +400%
x3 (16 bits)
When x1 < 0: y = -199.99% K
- 26 -
2-29
 2-30

Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

4 absolute-value generators with filter 2 limit-value monitors with filter

H483 (0) Filter time
Filter time Hysteresis
0...10000ms K131
0...10000ms H506 (0)
H484 (0)
F440 H503 (0)
-1 3
H506 H506
H482 (0) 2 H502 (0) |A|<B
-1 K127
K K A 0 H507 (0)
1 A
B B F830
0 H506 0
Filter time A<B <1>
H486 (0) 1 B123
0...10000ms 0
H487 (0) A 2
F1320 B
-1 3 H505 (0)
H504 (132) H506/2
H485 (0) 2 K132 K B A=B
-1 K128 0
K
1 A
B H506
0
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

H489 (0) Filter time Filter time Hysteresis

0...10000ms K133
0...10000ms H512 (0)
H490 (0) H509 (0)
F1530
-1 3
H512 H512
H488 (0) 2 H508 (0) |A|<B
-1 K129 0
K K A H513 (0)
1 A
B B F1540
0 H512 0
Filter time A<B <1>
H492 (0) 1 B124
0...10000ms 0
H493 (0) A 2
F1580 B
-1 3 H511 (0)
H510 (134) H512/2
H491 (0) K134 K B A=B
-1 2 K130 0
K
A
1 B H512
0
<1> Example: -50% < -40%
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

2 limiters
H496 H500
F1190 F1470
(100,00) (100.00) H499 (174)
H495 (171)
K171 K B+ y X≥B+ B119 K174 K B+ y X≥B+ B121
B+ B+
H494 (0) H498 (0)
x x y
K x y K173 K x K176

H497 (172) B– H501 (175) B–

-1 K172 K B– X≤B- B120 -1 K175 K B– X≤B- B122

- 27 -

02.99
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

02.99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Maximum selection 2 tracking/storage elements

1 ⇒y=x Power On Mode 1 ⇒y=x Power On Mode
H522 (0) H527 (0)
⇒ freeze y H524 (0) ⇒ freeze y H529 (0)
B <1> B <1>

H514 (0) x1
K F1390 TRACK TRACK
H520 (0) H525 (0)
K x y K137 K x y K138
H515 (0) x2 y H523 (0) H528 (0)
K MAX K135
B B
STORE F450 STORE F460
H516 (0) x3
K
RESET (y=0) RESET (y=0)
Priority: Priority:
1. RESET 1. RESET
H521 (0) 2. TRACK H526 (0) 2. TRACK
B 3. STORE B 3. STORE
y = maximum of x1, x2, x3
(e.g. -40% greater than -50%)
<1> Power On Mode: H524/H529=0: Not "non-volatile storage":
Zero appears at output on supply recovery
H524/H529=1: "Non-volatile" storage:
On disconnection or failure of power supply, instantaneous output
value is stored and output again on supply recovery

Minimum selection 2 analog signal memories

H517 (0) x1 H533 (0)

H531 (0)
K F1400 SET SET
B B
(y=x) F470 (y=x) F480

H518 (0) x2 H530 (0) H532 (0)

y
K MIN K136 K K139 K K140

H519 (0) x3 RESET RESET

K POWER ON POWER ON
(y=0) (y=0)
[9.8] [9.8]

Block diagram
y = minimum of x1, x2, x3
(e.g. -50% less than -40%)
- 28 -
2-31
 2-32

Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10 analog signal switches

H534 (0) H546 (0) H558 (0)

B B B
F490 F810 F1160
H535 (0) H547 (0) H559 (0)
0 0 0
K K K
K141 K145 K149
H536 (0) 1 H548 (0) 1 H560 (0) 1
K K K

H537 (0) H549 (0) H561 (0)

B B B
F550 F860 F1220
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

H538 (0) H550 (0) H562 (0)

0 0 0
K K K
K142 K146 K150
H539 (0) 1 H551 (0) 1 H563 (0) 1
K K K

H540 (0) H552 (0)

B B
F640 F1060
H541 (0) H553 (0)
0 0
K K
K143 K147
H542 (0) 1 H554 (0) 1
K K
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

H543 (0) H555 (0)

B B
F780 F1130
H544 (0) H556 (0)
0 0
K K
K144 K148
H545 (0) 1 H557 (0) 1
K K

- 29 -

02.99
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

02.99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Simple ramp-function generator 3 characteristic blocks

Y values
Ramp-up time [s] Ramp-down time [s]
H582.01 to .10 (0)
H571 (0.00) H572 (0.00)
F760
0s 0s
y 10
Bypass simple ramp-function y10
H575 (0) generator 0 1 0 1
B F900 H580 (0) -200%
<1> x y
K x1 x K153

23 x10
TH TR +200%
1 y1
H570 (0) x y
K K151
y=x H581.01 to.10 (0)
freeze y y=0 B193
X values
H574 (0) Stop simple ramp-function generator Y values
B
H585.01 to 10 (0)
R Q B194
1 = Enable simple ramp-function generator F930
H573 (1) 0 = Set simple ramp-function 0 = Ramp function y 10
B generator first y10
generator output to zero ≥1 S start
POWER ON H583 (0) -200%
[9.8] x y
Priority: K x1 x K154
1. S (SET)
2. R (RESET) 23 x10
y1 +200%
1

<1> When H575 = 194 the ramp-function generator operates only once after it has been enabled in
each case ( - edge) H584.01 to.10 (0)
X values

Dead zone Y values

H588.01 to .10 (0)
F1330
F570 Dead zone z y 10
y10
H577 (0.00)
H586 (0) x -200% y
K x1 x K155
y
H576 (0) x -z y 23 x10
K K152 +200%
z x 1 y1

Block diagram
H587.01 to .10 (0)
X values - 30 -
2-33
 2-34

Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Velocity/speed calculator

Actual velocity
Actual speed (-32.768...32.767 m/s)
Speed/velocity calculator B50
d075 d076

H690 (0)
<2>
K n act v act K156
D ∗ π ∗ nrated nact
vact = ----------------- ∗ --------
i 100%
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

Setpoint velocity
(-32,768...32,767 m/s) Setpoint speed
Velocity/speed calculator F1230
d077 d078

H691 (0)
K v set n set K157
vset ∗ i
nset = ----------------- ∗ 100%
D ∗ π ∗ nrated
<2>

i D n rated

<1> <1> <1>

H692 (1.00) H693 (216.0) H694 (1450)

Gear ratio Diameter Rated speed

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

<2>

<1> Four different datasets for these parameters can be selected by means of the parameter set switchover function [36]

<2> If asynchronous motors are used, the synchronous speed ns should be normally be entered here

120 * line frequency in [Hz]

( ns = --------------------------------------- ; Example: ns = 1500 min-1 for 50 Hz line frequency and 4-pole machine )
no. of poles - 31 -

02.99
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

02.99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

16 AND gates with 3 inputs each 8 OR gates with 3 inputs each

H590 (1) F500 H598 (1) F1100 H606 (0) F510

.01 .01 .01
B B B
.02 .02 .02
B
.03 & B125 B
.03 & B133 B
.03 ≥1 B141
B B B

H591 (1) F600 H599 (1) F1180 H607 (0) F610

.01 .01 .01
B B B
.02 .02 .02
B
.03 & B126 B
.03 & B134 B
.03 ≥1 B142
B B B

H592 (1) F690 H600 (1) F1210 H608 (0) F790

.01 .01 .01
B B B
.02 .02 .02
B
.03 & B127 B
.03 & B135 B
.03 ≥1 B143
B B B

H593 (1) F770 H601 (1) F1420 H609 (0) F990

.01 .01 .01
B B B
.02 .02 .02
B
.03 & B128 B
.03 & B136 B
.03 ≥1 B144
B B B

H594 (1) F850 H602 (1) F1490 H610 (0) F1260

.01 .01 .01
B B B
.02 .02 .02
B
.03 & B129 B
.03 & B137 B
.03 ≥1 B145
B B B

H595 (1) F870 H603 (1) F1510 H611 (0) F1340

.01 .01 .01
B B B
.02 .02 .02
B
.03 & B130 B
.03 & B138 B
.03 ≥1 B146
B B B

H596 (1) F980 H604 (1) F1550 H612 (0) F1360

.01 .01 .01
B B B
.02 .02 .02
B
.03 & B131 B
.03 & B139 B
.03 ≥1 B147
B B B

H597 (1) F1050 H605 (1) F1570 H613 (0) F1500

.01 .01 .01
B B B
.02 .02 .02
B
.03 & B132 B
.03 & B140 B
.03 ≥1 B148
B B B

Block diagram
- 32 -
2-35
 2-36

Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

8 Inverters 3 EXCLUSIVE-OR gates with 2 inputs each 6 NAND gates with 3 inputs each

F660 F520 H625 (1) F540

H622 (0) .01
H614 (0) B
.01 .02
B
B 1 B149
.02 =1 B157 B
.03 & B160
B B

F700 F620 H626 (1) F800

H623 (0) .01
H615 (0) B
.01 .02
B
B 1 B150
.02 =1 B158 B
.03 & B161
B B

F710 F1410 H627 (1) F1040

H624 (0) .01
H616 (0) B
.01 .02
B
1 =1
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

B B151 B159 B & B162

.02 .03
B B

F890 H628 (1) F1250

.01
H617 (0) B
.02
B 1 B152 B
.03 & B163
B

F970 H629 (1) F1350

.01
H618 (0) B
.02
B 1 B153 B
.03 & B164
B

F1090 H630 (1) F1480

.01
H619 (0) B
.02
B 1 B154 B
.03 & B165
B

F1520
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

H620 (0)
B 1 B155

F1560
H621 (0)
B 1 B156

- 33 -

02.99
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

02.99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

7 RS flipflops 2 D flipflops

H647 (0)
H631 (0) H637 (0) H643 (0) B
SET SET SET
B Q B166 B Q B172 B Q B178
(Q=1) (Q=1) (Q=1)
SET (Q=D)
H632 (0) F880 H638 (0) F1270 H644 (0) F1440 H645 (0)
B B B B D Q B180
RESET RESET RESET
≥1 (Q=0)
Q B167 ≥1 Q B173 ≥1 Q B179 H648 (0)
POWER ON POWER ON (Q=0) POWER ON (Q=0)
[9.8] [9.8] [9.8] B F820
Priority: Priority: Priority: STORE
1. RESET 1. RESET 1. RESET
2. SET 2. SET 2. SET Q B181

RESET (Q=0)
H646 (0) Priority:
H633 (0) H639 (0) B 1. RESET
SET SET 2. SET
B Q B168 B Q B174
(Q=1) (Q=1) ≥1 3. STORE
POWER ON
[9.8]
H634 (0) F940 H640 (0) F1300
B B
RESET RESET
≥1 (Q=0)
Q B169 ≥1 (Q=0)
Q B175 H651 (0)
POWER ON POWER ON
[9.8] [9.8] B
Priority: Priority:
1. RESET 1. RESET
2. SET 2. SET
SET (Q=D)
H649 (0)
B D Q B182
H635 (0) H641 (0)
SET SET H652 (0)
B Q B170 B Q B176
(Q=1) (Q=1) B F1280
STORE
H636 (0) F1120 H642 (0) F1430
Q B183
B B
RESET RESET RESET (Q=0)
≥1 (Q=0)
Q B171 ≥1 (Q=0)
Q B177
H650 (0)
POWER ON POWER ON Priority:
[9.8] [9.8] B 1. RESET
Priority: Priority: 2. SET
1. RESET 1. RESET ≥1 3. STORE
2. SET 2. SET POWER ON
[9.8]

Block diagram
- 34 -
2-37
 2-38

Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

5 timers H661 (0.00) H664 (0.000) H667 (0.00)

(0.00...600.00s) H662 (0) (0...60.000s) H665 (0) (0.00...600.00s) H668 (0)
T Mode T Mode T Mode

ON delay ON delay ON delay

F530 F1110 F1170
T O 0 T O 0 T O 0
1 1 1
OFF delay OFF delay OFF delay
O T 2 O T 2 O T 2
H660 (0) 3 H663 (0) 3 H666 (0) 3
B ON/OFF delay B184 B ON/OFF delay B185 B ON/OFF delay B186
T T 4 T T 4 T T 4
5 5 5
Pulse generator Pulse generator Pulse generator
T 6 T 6 T 6
7 7 7

H670 (0.00) H673 (0.000)

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

(0.00...600.00s) H671 (0) (0...60.000s) H674 (0)

T Mode T Mode
ON delay ON delay
F1200 F1290
T O 0 T O 0
1 1
OFF delay OFF delay
O T 2 O T 2
H669 (0) 3 H672 (0) 3
B ON/OFF delay B187 B ON/OFF delay B188
T T 4 T T 4
5 5
Pulse generator Pulse generator
T 6 T 6
7 7

4 binary signal switches

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

H675 (0) H678 (0) H681 (0) H684 (0)

B B B B
F560 F630 F1000 F1140
H676 (0) H679 (0) H682 (0) H685 (0)
0 0 0 0
B B B B
B189 B190 B191 B192
H677 (0) 1 H680 (0) 1 H683 (0) 1 H686 (0) 1
B B B B

- 35 -

02.99
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Modul MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

02.99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Parameter set switchover H703 (012)

H700 (0) Copy function: H703=1xy ⇒copy parameter set x to parameter set y
x1
B
F200
x1 = 0 x1 = 1 x1 = 0 x1 = 1
H701 (0) x2 = 0 x2 = 0 x2 = 1 x2 = 1
x2
B Block dia. Index .01 (d080=1) Index .02 (d080=2) Index .03 (d080=3) Index .04 (d080=4)
Pa.r No. Designation Factory setting (parameter set 1) (parameter set 2) (parameter set 3) (parameter set 4)
[page.col.]

H210 [8.1] K020 FixedSetpnt 0.00 %

d080 H211 [8.1] K021 FixedSetpnt 0.00 %

(1...4)
H212 [8.1] K022 FixedSetpnt 0.00 %
Selected H213 [8.1] K023 FixedSetpnt 0.00 %
parameter set
(Index .01 to .04) H214 [8.1] K024 FixedSetpnt 0.00 %
H215 [8.1] K025 FixedSetpnt 0.00 %
H216 [8.1] K026 FixedSetpnt 0.00 %
H217 [8.1] K027 FixedSetpnt 0.00 %
H218 [8.1] K028 FixedSetpnt 0.00 %
H219 [8.1] K029 FixedSetpnt 0.00 %
H220 [8.1] K030 FixedSetpnt 0.00 %
H221 [8.1] K031 FixedSetpnt 0.00 %
H222 [8.1] K032 FixedSetpnt 0.00 %
H223 [8.1] K033 FixedSetpnt 0.00 %
<1> H224 [8.3] K177 FixedSetpnt 0
H230 [8.2] B024 Fixed Bit 0
H231 [8.2] B025 Fixed Bit 0
H232 [8.2] B026 Fixed Bit 0
H233 [8.2] B027 Fixed Bit 0
H234 [8.2] B028 Fixed Bit 0
H235 [8.2] B029 Fixed Bit 0
H331 [21.2] TeCntr ActFilt_s 0.00 s
H332 [21.4] TeCntr R-Time_s 0.000 s
H333 [21.4] TeCntr R-T*1000 0 (=Factor 1)
H335 [21.1] TeCntr C SuppSet 0%
H337 [21.2] TeCntr SetFilt_s 0.00 s
H338 [21.5] TeCntr PGain 3.00

Block diagram
H340 [21.2] TeCntr PGadpt_x1 0.00 %
Continued on next sheet
H341 [21.2] TeCntr PGadpt_x2 100.00 %

- 36 -
2-39

<1> Parameter H224: starting with software version 1.1

 2-40

Block diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Parameter set switchover

(continued)
Block dia. Index .01 (d080=1) Index .02 (d080=2) Index .03 (d080=3) Index .04 (d080=4)
Par No. [page.col.] Designation Factory setting
(parameter set 1) (parameter set 2) (parameter set 3) (parameter set 4)
F200 H342 [21.1] TeCntr PGadpt_y1 1.00
H343 [21.1] TeCntr PGadpt_y2 1.00
H344 [21.6] TeCntr ResetTime 3.000 s
H345 [21.6] TeCntr R-T*1000 0 (= Factor 1)
H347 [21.5] TeCntr Droop_% 0.0 %
H348 [21.5] TeCntr Droop L+ 100.00 %
H349 [21.5] TeCntr Droop L- -100.00 %
H351 [21.6] TeCntr CntrTyp 0011
H355 [21.7] TeCntr Output L+ 100.0 %
H357 [21.7] TeCntr Output L- 100.0 %
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"

H359 [21.8] TeCntr OutptScal 100.0 %

H400 [23.4] MOP Op-Mode 0101
H401 [23.1] MOP AutoSetpoint 0
H402 [23.5] MOP RampUpTime_s 10.00 s
H403 [23.6] MOP RampDown_s 10.00 s
H404 [23.8] MOP TUp/Down*60 0 (= Factor 1)
H410 [23.5] MOP C_SettingVal 0
H411 [23.7] MOP WghtFactor 100 %
H412 [23.7] MOP dydt TimeDif 10.00 s
<1> H413 [23.6] MOP Limit + 100.00 %
<1> H414 [23.6] MOP Limit - -100.00 %
H421 [24.2] Wobb Amplitude 0.00 %
H422 [24.2] Wobb Frequency 60.0 faults / min
H423 [24.3] Wobb Phase-Shift 360 Oel
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

H424 [24.4] Wobb PJump neg 0.00 % of H421

H425 [24.5] Wobb PJump pos 0.00 % of H421
H426 [24.6] Wobb Pls/PausRat 50 % of Tw
H692 [31.4] v-n_Cal i g-rat 1.00
H693 [31.5] n>v_Calc Diam 216.0 mm
H694 [31.5] n>v_Calc n-rated 1450 / min

<1> Parameters H413 and H414: starting with software version 1.1 - 37 -

02.99
02.99 Function Descriptions

3 Function Descriptions
Note: All the functions which are available on the T100 technology board are shown in the block diagrams
(Chapter 2).
Chapter 3 does not attempt to provide a full description of these functions, but simply to explain in more
detail individual characteristics, which cannot be illustrated properly in a block diagram, together with
examples of their application.

3.1 General explanation of terms and functionality

Function blocks

Although the function blocks shown are implemented in digital form (as so-called "software modules"), it is
possible to "read" the function charts in a similar way to the circuit diagrams of an analog device.

Configurability

The T100 technology board is characterized by the free configurability of the available function blocks. Free
configurability means that the connections between individual function blocks can be selected by means of
parameters.

Connectors

All output variables and important operands within the function blocks are available as "Connectors" (e.g. for
further processing as input signals in other function blocks). Variables which can be accessed via connectors
correspond in nature to the output signals or measuring points in an analog circuit and are identified by their
"Connector number" (e.g. K003 = connector 3).
Exceptions: K000 = Fixed value with 0% signal level
K001 = Fixed value with 100% signal level

The internal number notation in the software is: 100% corresponds to 4000 hexadecimal = 16384 decimal. The
resolution is 0.006% (step change).
The value range of the connectors is -200% to +199.99%.

Example: The data received via the peer-to-peer connection are available at connectors K057 to K061 (block
diagram sheet 17)

Receive data

d040.01 to .05
RS485 -
Receiver

72 Rx+ Word 1 K057

Word 2 K058
from preceding drive in
group Word 3 K059
73 Rx-
Word 4 K060
Word 5 K061

Binectors

All binary output variables and all important binary output signals of the function blocks are available as
"Binectors" (connectors for binary signals). Binectors can assume the states log. "0" and log."1". The variables
which can be accessed via binectors correspond in nature to the output signals or measuring points in a digital
circuit and are identified by their "Binector number" (e.g. B003 = binector 3).
Exceptions: B000 = Fixed value log."0"
B001 = Fixed value log."1"

Example: The status of terminal 77 is available at binector B008 and inverted at binector B009 (block diagram
sheet 5)

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 3-1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Function Descriptions 02.99

77 28
B008

1 B009 0

Selector switches, connections

The inputs of the function blocks are defined by means of assigned selection parameters at "selector switches".
For this purpose, the number of the connector or binector which is to act as the input quantity is set in the
parameter for the relevant selector switch.

Representation in block diagram (examples):

H240 (0) Selection of a connector (represented by "K")

K
Parameter number = H240, factory setting = 0 (i.e. fixed value 0%)
H250 (0) Selection of a binector
B
Parameter number = H250, factory setting = 0 (i.e. fixed value 0)
H376 (1) Selection of connectors ("indexed" parameter with 2 indices)
.01
K
K
.02 Parameter number = H376, factory setting = 1 (i.e. fixed value 100%; this factory setting
applies to all indices of H376)
H606 (0) Selection of binectors ("indexed" parameter with 3 indices)
.01
B
B
.02 Parameter number = H606, factory setting = 0 (i.e. fixed value 0; this factory setting applies to
.03
B all indices of H606).

The selected setting can be entered in the empty field(s). The value in brackets next to the parameter number is
the factory setting of the selection parameter.

Examples: Examples of how to program connectors and binectors are given below. In addition, a detailed
configuring example is given in Chapter 10.

Example 1: As a function of the status of terminal 77 (B008 - see block diagram, sheet 5), analog input 1 (K003
- see block diagram sheet 2) or analog input 2 (K004 - see block diagram sheet 2) must be applied
to the output of the 1st analog signal switch (K141 - see block diagram sheet 29).
The sign of this output must then be inverted (sign inverter, see block diagram sheet 25).

H534 (0)
B

H535 (0) H451 (0)

0 x y
K
K141
K -1 K113

H536 (0) 1 y = -x
K

The following settings must be made:

1. H534 = 8: parameterizes binector B008 (status of terminal 77) as the control signal for switchover
to the analog signal switch
2. H535 = 3: applies connector K003 (analog input 1) to the 1st input of the switch (switches through
when B008 = 0)
3. H536 = 4: applies connector K004 (analog input 2) to the 2nd input of the switch (switches
through when B008 = 1)
4. H451 = 141: applies connector K141 (output of analog signal switch) to the sign inverter block

The result is now available at connector K113.

3-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
02.99 Function Descriptions

Example 2: The setpoint for the technology controller (see block diagram sheet 21) must be the sum of the
simple ramp-function generator output (K151 - see block diagram sheet 30) and analog input 1
(K003 - see block diagram sheet 2).
d061
H334 (0)
.01
K
.02
K
.03
K
.04
+
K

The following settings must be made:

1. H334.Index 1 = 151: applies connector K151 (ramp-function generator output) to the first
summation input for the setpoint
2. H334.Index 2 = 3: applies connector K003 (analog input 1) to the second summation input for
the setpoint

H334.indices 3 and 4 remain at factory setting (0 = connector K000 = fixed value 0%) and therefore
have no effect on the summation operation.

Setting parameters

Apart from the parameters which are used to select a signal (connector, binector), there are also parameters
which define an operating mode or the parameter value for some function.

Parameter set switchover:

Some of the parameters (switchover parameter set) have four data sets which can be selected by means of the
parameter set switchover function (see block diagram sheet 36). Switchover between these data sets is
controlled by the binectors selected in H700 and H701, i.e. depending on the state of these binectors, index.01,
.02, .03 or .04 of these parameters may be effective. The parameters in the switchover parameter set must not
be confused with other parameters which also (coincidentally) have 4 indices. Such parameters are not affected
by the parameter set switchover.

Representation in block diagram:

The value in brackets next to or under the parameter number is the factory setting.
H101 (100)
Setting parameter
Parameter number = H101, factory setting = 100
H333 (0)
Setting parameter in switchover parameter set
Parameter number = H333, factory setting = 0

H351 Nibble-coded parameter

(0011) T H Z E
Parameter number = H351, factory setting = 0011

Examples: H101 on block diagram sheet 2 defines the signal type of the analog input (voltage input ±10V,
current input 0...20mA, current input 4...20mA).

H105 on block diagram sheet 2 determines the filter time for the analog input (adjustable in ms).

H355 on block diagram sheet 21 is a supplementary setpoint which can be added to the setpoint of
the technology controller.

H581 and H582 on block diagram sheet 30 both define 10 associated characteristic points in 10
indices.

The operating mode of the technology controller is determined by the ones, tens, hundreds and
thousands places of H351 on block diagram sheet 21 (switchover between PI/PID controller,
reversal of actual value polarity, setting to 0 of P and I components).

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 3-3

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Function Descriptions 02.99

H333 on block diagram sheet 30 applies fixed value 1 or 1000 to the multiplier element for the D
component of the technology controller.

Display parameters

The values of certain signals can be displayed in display parameters (d parameters). It is possible to link all
connectors to display parameters using connector displays (block diagram sheet 8) and thus to display their
values.

Representation in block diagram:

d010
Display parameter
Parameter number = d010

3.2 Sampling times and processing sequence

One characteristic of the T100 technology board as a microprocessor-based controller module is that the
individual function blocks are processed sequentially and cyclically at specific time intervals (computing cycle).
Consequently, the reaction of a function block to a change in an input quantity will be delayed by up to one
computing cycle.

The function blocks of the T100 technology board are processed on 2 time levels with different cycle times:

• Background tasks (background programs) with a computing cycle of 20 ms (i.e. every function block is
processed once every 20 ms):

Representation in block diagram

B10
= Background task 10

Processing sequence according to task number (B10 before B20 and so on)

• Foreground tasks (foreground programs) with a computing cycle of 2.2 ms (e.g. every function block is
processed once every 2.2 ms):

Representation in block diagram

F10
= Foreground task 10

Processing sequence according to task number (F10 before F20 and so on)

Since it is possible to configure the available function blocks freely, very long, undesirable signal delays may
result if the time sequence in which the blocks are processed (task numbers) is not observed.

For this reason, functions which can be programmed multiply (e.g. 5 adders, 16 AND gates, etc.) are not
positioned in the processing sequence so as to be processed chronologically, but are distributed over the
computing cycle in such a way (e.g. AND gate 1 = F500 to AND gate 16 = F1570 - see block diagram sheet 32)
that it is possible in most cases to include all the desired functions in the processing sequence without incurring
long runtimes.

The processing sequence of foreground tasks F200 to F1650 can be altered in parameters H750 to H752 (see
also Chapter 4 / parameters H750 to H752).

Starting with software version 1.1 the optimum processing sequence can be implemented by setting H750 = 2.

3-4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
02.99 Function Descriptions

3.3 Analog inputs

See also block diagram sheets 2 and 3 (Chapter 2) and parameter list (Chapter 4, parameters H100 to H146)

The T100 technology board has 5 analog inputs:

- 2 differential inputs Terminals 50/51 and 52/53
- 3 single-ended inputs Terminals 54/55, 56/57 and 58/59

Signal type

There are three available signal types:

- Voltage input ±10 V
- Current input 0...20 mA
- Current input 4...20 mA

The selection is made via plug-in jumpers and parameters for signal type (see also Tables in block diagram).

Scaling

The %-value which is to represent an input voltage of 10 V or an input current of 20 mA must be set in the
scaling parameter.

Example: Analog input terminals 50/51, voltage input, 5V at input must correspond to 100%

Formula acc. to parameter list - parameter H101:

H101[%] = 10V ∗ Y / X where X = input voltage in volts
Y = %-value which represents input voltage X
Therefore: H101 = 10V ∗ 100% / 5V = 200%

Note: In this example, parameter H100 must be set to 0 and plug-in jumper inserted in position 3-4 in
order to select the signal type.

Example: Analog input terminals 54/55, current input, 0...20mA at input must correspond to 0...120%

Formula acc. to parameter list - parameter H121 (H101):

H121[%] = 20mA ∗ Y / X where X = input current in mA
Y = %-value which represents input current X
Therefore: H121 = 20mA ∗ 120% / 20mA = 120%

Note: In this example, parameter H120 must be set to 1 and plug-in jumper X3 inserted in position 1-2
in order to select the signal type.

See parameter list and block diagram for setting of other parameters.

3.4 Analog outputs

See also block diagram sheet 4 (Chapter 2) and parameter list (Chapter 4, parameters H150 to H165)

Signal type

There are three available signal types:

- Voltage output ±10 V
- Current output 0...20 mA
- Current output 4...20 mA

The selection is made via plug-in jumpers and parameters for signal type (see also Tables in block diagram).

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 3-5

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Function Descriptions 02.99

Scaling

As regards the scaling parameter setting (H153/H163), it is assumed that "voltage output" is selected as the
signal type (as if H155/H165 = 0). When the signal type actually selected is a current output, then an output
voltage of 0...10V must correspond to an output current of 0...20mA (with signal type 1) or 4...20mA (with signal
type 2).

∆y[V ]
H153(H163) = * 100%
∆x[%]

In this case ∆y = change in output voltage in [V] in line with above assumption
∆x = associated change in input quantity in [%]
(scaling of input quantity: 16384 = 100%)

Offset

The voltage value set in the offset parameter is added to the output voltage according to the above assumption.

Example: Analog output 1 (terminal 61/62) as voltage output

A value range of -25% ... +25% for the connector selected with H150 (internal representation =
-4096...+4096) must be mapped to the 0...10V voltage range at the analog output.

1. Scaling:
∆y = 10V - 0V = 10V
∆x = +25% - (-25%) = 50%
H153 = 10V ∗ 100% / 50% = 20.00V

2. Offset:
The output voltage must be +5V with an input quantity of 0%
Therefore H154 = 5.00V

3. Signal type:
Signal type H155 = 0 is set for the voltage output
Plug-in jumper X6 is inserted in position 2-3

Example: Analog output 2 (terminals 63/64) as current output

A value range of 0 ... -25% for the connector selected with H160 (internal representation =
0...-4096) must be mapped to the 4...20mA current range at the analog output.

1. Scaling:
Output 4...20mA corresponds with voltage output 0...10V to
∆y = 10V - 0V = 10V
∆x = -25% - 0% = -25%
H163 = 10V ∗ 100% / (-25%) = -40.00V

Note: By setting H161=2, the input value range could be converted to 0...+25%, in which case the
scaling would need to be set to +40. 00V.

2. Offset:
The output current must be 4mA with an input quantity of 0% (corresponds to 0V with voltage output)
Therefore H164 = 0.00V

3. Signal type:
Signal type H165 = 2 is set for current output 4...20 mA
Plug-in jumper X7 is inserted at position 1-2

3-6 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
02.99 Function Descriptions

3.5 Serial USS® interface (interface 1; X132, terminals 65 ... 69)

On T100 boards equipped with the "Multi-Purpose Drive" software module, the SIEMENS USS® protocol is
implemented for serial interface 1. The USS® protocol is used in all Siemens digital converter devices and
permits a point-to-point or a bus-type link to be made to a master station. Any mix of converter types may be
linked to the bus. The USS protocol permits access to all relevant process data, diagnostic information and
parameters of the T100 and Master Drives basic converters.

Interface hardware
The hardware for the USS interface is designed according to the RS485 standard. The terminal assignments are
shown on block diagram sheet 1. The interface is non-floating and operates with a 2-wire lead in half duplex
mode. The positive and negative terminals of the 2-wire lead are connected in parallel to terminal pairs 65/66
and 67/68; this allows the incoming and outgoing bus leads to be connected to separate terminals with only one
wire connected to each terminal instead of two. A maximum of 32 nodes (1 master and max. 31 slaves) can be
connected in the bus configuration. The baud rate can be set between 300 baud and 187500 baud in parameter
H293.

The maximum length of the bus cable is 1000 m in total, but only 500 m for a baud rate of 187500. The cable
must be terminated with terminating resistors (see Fig. 3.5) on the two nodes which are situated at the beginning
and end of the bus. These resistors can be activated by resetting plug-in jumpers X8 and X9 to setting 1-2 on the
T100. The bus terminating resistors must be deactivated on all nodes situated between the "terminals". Tap lines
may not be inserted in the USS bus circuit. Document /6/ listed in the documentation index in Chapter 11
provides further information about the bus circuit arrangement and instructions on how to achieve noise-proof
interface wiring.

Master Slave 1 Slave 2 Slave n (n<=31))

(Bus terminating (Bus terminating (Bus terminating (Bus terminating
resistors activated) resistors deactivated) resistors deactivated) resistors activated

SIMATIC S5
MASTER DRIVE MASTER DRIVE MASTER DRIVE
CP524 with RS485
module...0AA43
(jumper X3: 20-18 --> T100 T100 T100
2-wire lead)
Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx

8 64 12 3 12 3 12 3
14 1210 X3 32 1 X8 32 1 X8 32 1 X8
X3 - + X9 - + - + X9 - + - + X9 - + - +
4 11 66 65 68 67 66 65 68 67 66 65
150 Ω

SUB-D connectors
15-pin
1) 2)

Fig. 3.5: Wiring example for a USS bus

1) The screens of the interface cables must be connected in a low-impedance
connection to the device or cubicle earth directly on the units (e.g. via a clamp)
2) Twisted pair cable, e.g. LIYCY 2x0,5 mm2; an equipotential bonding lead must be provided for longer
cables to ensure that the difference in the ground potentials between the link partners remains below 7 V.

Further details about USS protocol

The USS protocol ("Universal Serial Interface Protocol") is a powerful, reliable communications protocol with an
extremely low management overhead. It is the ideal protocol for use in drive systems where real-time
requirements are often extreme. The structure of the USS protocol is specified in document /6/ (see Chapter 11).

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 3-7

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Function Descriptions 02.99

Potential USS link partners

The USS protocol is a pure master-slave protocol. With this protocol, a converter can only ever function as a
slave. The converter only transmits a message to the master if it has received a message from the master
beforehand. Converters cannot therefore exchange data directly with one another via the USS protocol (this can
only be done with a peer-to-peer connection, see Chapter 3.6).

The following master stations are currently available as link partners for the USS protocol:

1. SIMATIC S5 - 115U/ -135U/ -155U with

- Communications processor CP524 (for wiring example, see Fig. 3.5)
- RS485 interface module for CP524 (e.g. Order No. 6ES5752-0AA43)
- Special driver "Parameterizable Master-Slave Procedure" for CP524
(Order No. for German-language version: 6ES5897-2MB11)
(Order No. for English-language version: 6ES5897-2MB12)
- EPROM memory module for CP524 for storing special driver
(Order No. : 6ES5373-1AAx1; storage capacity x >= 1)
- Parameterizing software COM525 for CP524
(Order No. for German-language version: 6ES5895-4SA11)
(Order No. for English-language version: 6ES5895-4SA21)
- Software package DVA_S5 with SIMATIC communications blocks for data exchange
between SIMATIC S5 and SIMOREG/SIMOVERT converters (see /4/ and /5/ in
Chapter 11)

2. SIMADYN D with
- Communications module CS7 ("carrier module" for SSx submodules)
- Communications submodule SS4 for the CS7
- Interface submodule SS31 (RS485 hybrid) for SS4
(max. baud rate: with SS4 from and incl. release "T": 187.5 kbaud
with releases earlier than SS4: 19.2 kbaud)

3. Non-Siemens computers
- The USS protocol is described in detail in document /3/ for users who wish to write their own master driver.
This has been put into practice successfully in the past and is relatively simple to implement thanks
to the simple and easy-to-understand structure of the USS protocol.

Software packages for the following master stations are currently being prepared:

4. SIMATIC S5 -95U with

- Communications processor CP521
- USS protocol and drive communications blocks (are being integrated into software package /4/
DVA_S5; available from end of 1995)
- Interface converter RS232 ⇒ RS485 (e.g. Siemens SU1)

5. SIMATIC S5 -95U with second serial interface and

- USS protocol and drive communications blocks
- Cable for TTY ↔ V.24 conversion (Order No. 6ES5 734-1BD20)
- Interface converter RS232 ⇒ RS485 (e.g. Siemens SU1)

6. SIMATIC S7 -200 (CPU214) with

- USS protocol and drive communications blocks

7. SIMATIC S7 -300 with

- Communications processor CP340
- USS protocol and drive communications blocks
- Configuring software for CP340
(Order No. for German-language version: 6SE7 340 - 1AH00 - 7AA0)
- Interface converter RS232 ⇒ RS485 (e.g. Siemens SU1)

3-8 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
02.99 Function Descriptions

8. SIMATIC S7 -400 with

- Communications processor CP441 - 1
- Interface module IF963 - X27 (RS232 / RS485) Order No. 6SE7 963 - 3AA00 - 0AA0
- USS protocol and drive communications blocks
- Configuring software for CP441 - 1
(Order No. for German-language version: 6SE7 441 - 2AA00 - 7AG0)

9. PC with
- SIEMENS USS driver software (offers a programming interface to user programs written
in C and a simple, hexadecimal test operator interface; available from end of 1995)
- Interface converter RS232 ⇒ RS485 (e.g. Siemens SU1)

Important note:
The necessary USS protocol and drive communications software will be integrated in the
appropriate software package (DVA_S5, DVA_S7 or DVA_PC) after completion of the tests and
approval. Please contact your nearest Siemens sales office if you would like to use one of these
software packages 4 ... 9. We will be pleased to provide you with further details about their
availability.

Important note
At the time of compilation of this software manual, only the link variants described in paragraph 1
(SIMATIC S5-115U/-135U/-155U) and paragraph 2 (SIMADYN D) had been tested with the T100
and approved. Please contact your nearest Siemens sales office if you would like to use one of the
other variants.

User data which can be transferred via USS protocol

Document /6/ contains detailed information about the application of the USS protocol in the Master Drives
devices.

The user data connections and the parameters relevant to configuring the USS interface on the T100 are shown
in block diagram, sheet 16.

If you wish to read or write parameters of the basic converter and T100 via the USS interface, then H295 must
be set to 3, 4 or 127 (only select setting 4 to transfer double-word parameters). H295 = 0 must be set if no
parameters are to be transferred. Changes to parameters can be made via the USS protocol only if the T100
has been enabled for parameterization via basic unit parameter P53 (P53:= "0ld value + 16"). Parameters can
always be read regardless of the setting in P53.

The number of process data words to be transferred is basically identical for both the send and receive direction
and can be input via H294. The number notation "100% corresp. to 4000h = 16384d" applies for all connectors.
If setpoints and control commands must be forwarded to the basic unit, then basic unit control bit 10 "Control
requested" must be set to "1" (see block diagram, sheet 11).

Notation of parameter numbers and values on serial interfaces

The numbers of the technology parameters (H and d parameters) are preceded by a "1" to distinguish them from
the numbers of the basic unit parameters (r and P parameters), i.e. they differ by an offset of 1000d (example:
"d041 is addressed on the serial interface with the number 1041d and "H343" with the number 1343d).

The number notation of a parameter value depends on the parameter "type" specified in each case in the
parameter list. The various parameter types are explained at the beginning of the list. The parameters are
always transferred in the form in which they are specified in the "value range" column of the parameter list, but
with the decimal point (if any) omitted. (Example: Display value 123.45 --> the number 12345d = 3039h is
transmitted via the interface). Further information on parameter transmission via the serial interfaces can be
found in Chapter 4.2 and document /6/.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 3-9

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Function Descriptions 02.99

Diagnosis and monitoring functions for the USS interface

All user data words which have been sent or received can be checked in display parameters d035 and d036
(directly at the internal software interchange point between USS driver and T100 user software).
Diagnostic parameter d037 provides information about the time intervals between error-free and errored
messages and indicates the nature of any communications errors.

It is possible to set a time monitoring function in H291 which results in a fault trip with F117 in the case of a
timeout. This fault message can be acknowledged even if the fault status is permanent. This ensures that the
drive can always continue operation in manual mode even if the USS interface has failed.

Broadcast messages with USS protocol

Broadcast messages are supported by the T100 as specified in the documentation /3/ (Chap.12). A broadcast
message allows an (identical) setpoint or control command to be output simultaneously to all USS slaves on the
bus which support the broadcast function. The above-mentioned software package DVA_S5 for the SIMATIC
does not, however, support the broadcast function at the present time.

3.5.1 Operation of USS protocol according to the PROFIBUS user profile

(e.g. with block package DVA_S5)

We can supply communications software for the automation system (e.g. DVA_S5, see /4/) to permit the T100 to
be operated with the USS protocol or with an additional communications module (e.g. SIMATIC S5/S7,
SIMADYN D, etc.). These module packages support the PROFIBUS "Variable-speed drives" application profile
(see /7/). Defined characteristics are consequently essential for certain process data elements.
We therefore recommend implementing the following settings on the T100 if our module packages are used:

a) Position of main control word and main status word

Word 1 of the T100 receive data should always be used as the main control word (connector K161, see block
diagram sheet [16.4]).
Word 1 of the T100 receive data should always be used as the main status word (applies to connector selected
via H296.01 [16.5]).

b) Control bit 10 ("Control requested")

Control bit 10 should be "wired through" directly from the USS receive data area to the basic unit. For this
purpose, for example, bit 10 of K161 [16.4] must be isolated by means of a connector/binector converter and
supplied to the basic unit via H272.11 [11.2].

With a "1" status of bit 10, the automation system declares all its setpoints and control commands to be valid
and requests the converter to accept them.

Bit 10 is not directly supported on the T100, i.e. the setpoints and control commands from the automation
system which are connected to the T100 are always accepted regardless of bit 10 (but can, of course, be
disabled or enabled on the T100 as a function of bit 10 if required). However, since the basic unit does not
accept any setpoints or control commands at its dual-port RAM as long as the "wired-through" bit 10 is "0", it can
always be guaranteed that no hazardous situations will arise.

c) Status bits 3, 7 and 9

The following status bits should be "wired through" from status word 1 of the basic converter to word 1 of the
USS transmit area (see [13.7]):
- Bit 3 "Fault" (binector B035)
- Bit 7 "Alarm" (binector B039)
- Bit 9 "Unit requests process data control from automation system" (binector B041)

These binectors should be connected to bits 3, 7 and 9 of the connector which can be selected via H296.01
16.5], thus ensuring that the communications display word in DVA_S5 is updated.

3-10 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
02.99 Function Descriptions

d) Adjustable length of process data area for USS messages

The process data area for USS messages can be between 0 and 10 words in length. When the length is "0",
points a) to c) of this section do not apply and bits 6, 7 and 8 of the communications display word in the SIMATIC
are not updated in DVA_S5.

3.6 Serial peer-to-peer interface (interface 2, X133, terminals 70...74)

Application of peer-to-peer interface
The peer-to-peer interface designed by Siemens is implemented as serial interface 2 on the T100 for the
software module "Multi-Purpose Drive".

"Peer-to-peer connection" means "Connection between equal partners". In contrast to the classic master-slave
bus systems (e.g. USS and PROFIBUS), the peer-to-peer connection allows one converter to be both the
master (setpoint source) as well as the slave (setpoint drain). Similar arrangements which have no definitive
master are also common today in small computer networks (e.g. MS-WINDOWS for Workgroups ® ).

The peer-to-peer connection allows signals to be transferred from converter to converter in fully digitized form.
Examples:

- Velocity setpoints for generating a setpoint cascade, e.g. for paper and foil machines, for wire-drawing
machines as well as textile drawframes

- Torque setpoints for load distribution controls of drives which are coupled mechanically or via the material,
e.g. line-shaft drives of a printing press or S-roller drives

- Acceleration setpoints (dv/dt) for acceleration feedforward control for multi-motor drives.

In the past, these types of signals were mostly transmitted as analog signals (-10V to +10V) from converter to
converter.

Advantages of peer-to-peer interface

The peer-to-peer offers the following advantages:

- Fully digitized signal transmission from converter to converter

Converters no longer need to exchange output signals with one another. These signals are transferred in
fully digitized form via the peer-to-peer connection on all new digital converters supplied by SIEMENS.
Offset errors, drift errors and hum effects are now a thing of the past. The signal resolution is 0.006%, a
level of resolution which would be extremely expensive to implement via analog inputs/outputs.

- Less wiring
The peer-to-peer connection helps to reduce the amount of wiring required. A 2-wire lead can carry up to
5 signals over a distance of up to 1000 m.

- Transmission of control commands

It is also possible to transfer control commands and status bits via the peer-to-peer connection (see
Section "User data which can be ......"

- Reliable data transmission

The peer-to-peer connection is reliable. Every peer-to-peer message is provided with data saving
information which is evaluated by the receiver. A wire break or the failure of a node is detected and
signalled immediately (see Section "Diagnosis and monitoring")

- Relief of load on control system

As the application example for a multi-motor drive system below illustrates, the peer-to-peer connection
can relieve the load on the control system by performing a large number of high-speed setpoint
calculations. Autonomous operation without any control system is also possible. The drives are able to
organize high-speed setpoint distribution via the connection independently of any control system.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 3-11

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Function Descriptions 02.99

Interface hardware and peer-to-peer protocol

Peer-to-peer communication takes place via a non-floating, RS485 4-wire interface with separate transmit and
receive connections. The terminal assignments are shown on block diagram sheet 1. A high-speed, special
SIEMENS protocol requiring nominal administration is used. The transmission rate can be set in H302 to
between 300 and 187500 baud and the message length in H303 to between 1 and 5 words. The baud rate and
message length apply equally to the receive and transmit directions and must be set to the same values for all
the link partners. Examples of the net transmission rate from one drive to the next are given in the following table
as a function of the set transmission rate and message length.

Message length Baud rate Net transmission time

(words of 16 bits each) Peer-to-peer connection
5 words 187.5 kbd 1 msec
2 words 187.5 kbd 0.5 msec
5 words 38.4 kbd 4 msec
2 words 38.4 kbd 2 msec
5 words 19.2 kbd 8 msec
2 words 19.2 kbd 4 msec
2 words 9.6 kbd 8 msec
1 word 9.6 kbd 5.7 msec

Every drive is able to receive data from the preceding drive in the group via its peer receive-connection and
transmit data to one (or several) drives connected after it in the group via its transmit-connection. The section
headed "Possible connection types" shows the possible configurations of the peer-to-peer connection.

The maximum cable length of a peer-to-peer connection from the transmitter to the last receiver connected to
the same transmit output is 1000 m, but only 500 for a baud rate of 187500.

Bus terminating resistors are soldered in at the transmit output of the peer-to-peer connection. You can activate
the terminating resistors on the receive input by re-positioning plug-in jumpers X10 and X11 to setting 1-2; in the
case of a "parallel connection", this may only be done on the last device connected (see Section "Possible
connection types..." and the hardware operating instructions of the T100 /1/).

Potential peer-to-peer link partners

The following devices can be operated together with T100 boards in a peer-to-peer connection:

- Other MASTER DRIVES devices with T100, T300 or SCB2 supplementary board
- SIMOREG series 6RA24 converters.

It must be noted that the high baud rates of the T100 and the full scope of message length settings are not
implemented on all these link partners (example: The message length is preset to 5 words for the 6RA24).

User data which can be transferred via peer-to-peer connection

The user data connections and the relevant parameters for configuring the peer-to-peer connection are shown
on block diagram sheet 17. You can select any connectors to act as transmit data (number notation: 100%
corresponds to 4000h = 16384d).

The peer-to-peer connection is not only capable of transferring word variables ("analog signals") but also control
commands and status bits which can be "wired into" a transmit word by means of a binector/connector converter
(block diagram sheet 20). If setpoints and control commands must be forwarded to the basic converter, control
bit 10 of the basic unit ("Control requested") must be set to "1" (see block diagram sheet 11). It is not possible to
transmit parameters via the peer-to-peer connection.

3-12 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
02.99 Function Descriptions

Diagnosis and monitoring for the peer-to-peer connection

All user data words which have been sent or received can be checked in display parameters d040 and d041
(directly at the internal software interchange point between peer driver and T100 user software). Diagnostic
parameter d042 provides information about the time intervals between error-free and errored messages and
indicates the nature of any communications errors.

It is possible to set a time monitoring function in H301 which results in a fault trip with F118 in the case of a
timeout. This fault message can be acknowledged even if the fault status is permanent. This ensures that the
drive can always continue operation in manual mode even if the peer-to-peer interface has failed.

With the "Series connection" (Fig. 3.6.2), the first drive in the peer string can monitor the entire string if the
transmit cable of the last drive is coupled back to the receive input of the first drive.

Example of application of peer-to-peer connection

Fig. 3.6.1 shows a section of a foil-coating plant.
IM308

SIMATIC S5 - 115U
COROS OP25
Operator panel
PROFIBUS-DP
V set V2/V1 V3/V2
Tension setpoint (machine (draught ratio) (draught ratio)
velocity)

CB1 communica- CB1 communica- CB1 communica- CB1 communica-

tions board tions board tions board tions board

T300 T100 T100 T100

Actual tension Central
Winder ramp-
software function
MS320 generator
V1
dV/dt
MAS- MAS- MAS- MAS-
TER TER TER TER
Peer DRIVE Peer DRIVE Peer DRIVE Peer DRIVE
V1, dV1/dt V1, dV1/dt V2, dV2/dt V3, dV3/dt

M
~ M M M
~ ~ ~

V1 V2 V3

Uncoiler with
tension measurement Master drive Coating Drying oven Tension group

Fig. 3.6.1: Example of the application of a peer-to-peer connection in a foil-coating plant

(The entire installation runs up and down automatically via the central ramp-function generator implemented
in the master drive.)

All converters are linked to a SIMATIC S5 control system via a PROFIBUS-DP (a USS bus can, of course, be
used in place of the PROFIBUS-DP which means that the PROFIBUS-DP interface CB1 can be omitted on the
drives with a T100).

The master drive receives the machine velocity setpoint Vset via the PROFIBUS-DP. The other drives receive
their individual draught ratios or tension setpoints via the PROFIBUS-DP

The drives which are interlinked via the peer-to-peer connection form an autonomous setpoint cascade and
automatically follow the specified velocity setpoint Vset via the central ramp-function generator implemented in
the master drive.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 3-13

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Function Descriptions 02.99

The setpoints are therefore transferred automatically at high speed from drive to drive via the peer-to-peer
connection without any interference from the master system.

The master system is therefore relieved of the task of specifying time-critical setpoints during ramp-up and
ramp-down operations and is only responsible for transferring the following signals, which rarely change, to the
drives:

- Setpoint Vset to which the machine as a whole must run up or down

- Start command for central ramp-function generator in master drive
- Tension setpoints for tension-controlled drives
- Draught ratios for individual drives as a function of processed material and occasional interventions by the
machine operator via the operator panel
- Control signals for converter control, e.g. ON/OFF commands

Possible types of peer-to-peer connection

The peer-to-peer connection is flexible. Figs. 3.6.2 to 3.6.4 show the 3 possible types of peer-to-peer connection.

- The signals can flow through the drives in a series connection (Fig. 3.6.2); with this connection type, each
drive processes the data as required before passing them on to one other drive (classic setpoint cascade).

- In a parallel connection (Fig. 3.6.3), a total of 31 drives can be connected in parallel to the transmit cable
of one drive. All these drives receive their (identical) data sets simultaneously. The signal delay time of
approximately 1 to 10 msec (see table above) occurs only once with the parallel connection.

- Any desired mixed combinations of series and parallel connections can be implemented. Fig. 3.6.4 shows
an example of this type of connection.

3-14 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
02.99 Function Descriptions

Drive n
Drive 2 Drive 3
Drive 1 n=any number of drives
(bus terminating (bus terminating
(activate bus terminating (bus terminating
resistors activated) resistors activated)
resistors when data resistors activated)
feedback is used)

MASTER DRIVE MASTER DRIVE MASTER DRIVE MASTER DRIVE

T100 T100 T100 T100

Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx

32 1 12 3 32 1 12 3 32 1 12 3 32 1 12 3
X11 X10 X11 X10 X11 X10 X11 X10
- + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
73 72 71 70 73 72 71 70 73 72 71 70 73 72 71 70

2)

Data feedback 3)

Fig. 3.6.2: Peer connection type "Series"

Every drive receives its own individual setpoint from the preceding drive in the group (classic setpoint cascade)
1) The screens of the interface cables must be connected directly to the units in a low-impedance connection to the
device or cubicle earth (e.g. via a clamp).
2) Twisted-pair cable, e.g. LIYCY 2x0,5 mm2; an equipotential bonding lead must be provided for longer cables to
ensure that the difference in the ground potentials between the link partners remains below 7V.
3) Optional data feedback which allows drive 1 to monitor the operation of the entire peer string.

Drive 2 Drive 3 Drive n (n <= 32)

Drive 1 (bus terminating (bus terminating (bus terminating
resistors deactivated) resistors deactivated) resistors activated)

MASTER DRIVE MASTER DRIVE MASTER DRIVE MASTER DRIVE

T100 T100 T100 T100

Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx

32 1 12 3 32 1 12 3 32 1 12 3 32 1 12 3
X11 X10 X11 X10 X11 X10 X11 X10
- + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
73 72 71 70 73 72 71 70 73 72 71 70 73 72 71 70

1) 2)

Fig. 3.6.3: Peer connection type "Parallel"

Up to 31 drives receive identical setpoints from drive 1
1), 2): see Fig. 3.6.2

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 3-15

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Function Descriptions 02.99

Drive 1 Drive 2 Drive 3 Drive n

(bus terminating (bus terminating n=any number of
resistors activated) resistors deactivated) drives (bus terminating
resistors activated)

MASTER DRIVE MASTER DRIVE MASTER DRIVE MASTER DRIVE

T100 T100 T100 T100

Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx

32 1 12 3 32 1 12 3 32 1 12 3 32 1 12 3
X11 X10 X11 X10 X11 X10 X11 X10
- + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
73 72 71 70 73 72 71 70 73 72 71 70 73 72 71 70

1) 2)

Drive 3.1
(bus terminating
resistors deactivated)

MASTER DRIVE

T100
Rx Tx

32 1 12 3
X11 X10
- + - +
73 72 71 70

Drive 3.2
(bus terminating
resistors activated)

MASTER DRIVE

T100
Rx Tx

32 1 12 3
X11 X10
- + - +
73 72 71 70

Fig. 3.6.4: Peer connection type "mixed combination"

Drives 1 to n are arranged in a series combination.
The three drives 3, 3.1 and 3.2 form a combined group; they are linked in a parallel connection
to drive 2 and receive identical setpoints from this drive.
1), 2) see Fig. 3.6.2.

3-16 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
02.99 Function Descriptions

3.7 Operation with a communications board type CBx or SCBx

At the present time, the T100 can be operated in conjunction with one of the following communications boards
which must be mounted in slot 3 of the electronics box:

- CBx: Field bus interface, e.g. CBP / CB1 for PROFIBUS DP, CBC for CAN bus, etc.

- SCB1: Interface board with fibre-optic connection for either a

serial I/O system with SCI1/2 (terminal extension) or a
peer-to-peer connection

- SCB2: Interface board with floating RS485 interface for USS protocol or peer-to-peer connection

IMPORTANT: The T100 cannot be operated with a communications board mounted on the CU board (in slot A
or C)!
If you are using a T100 board, it is absolutely essential to insert communications board SCBx /
CBx in location 3 or in the lower slot (slot G) of an ADB adapter board mounted in location 3!.

Interconnection of process data

Data are exchanged with a communications board - and therefore also with the connected communications
partners - via a DUAL PORT RAM located on the CBx /SCBx (see block diagram sheet 1). This means that data
which have to be exchanged with the basic unit must flow through the technology board.

If a communications board is installed, the technology board is responsible for distributing the data from the CBx
/SCBx to the basic unit as well as to its own software functions and vice versa. The process data from the CBx /
SCBx are not connected on the basic unit (e.g. via P664, P690 and P694), but on the T100 by means of the
mechanisms shown on sheet 18 of the block diagram.

a) COM BOARD → T100

The meaning of the data received from the COM BOARD depends on which COM BOARD is installed as well as
on the selected interface protocol. The following list provides an overview of the COM BOARDS which are
currently available.

Data received from from CB1 from SCB1 from SCB2 from SCB1, SCB2 Applied to
COM BOARD on with SCI board(s) with USS with peer-to-peer connector:
T100 board
Word 1 PZD 1 Binary inputs, PZD 1 PZD 1 → K062
in setpoint channel slave 1 in setpoint channel
Bit 0: Bin. input 1
Bit 1: Bin. input 2
etc.
Bit 15: Bin.input 16
Word 2 PZD 2 Analog input 1, PZD 2 PZD 2 → K063
slave 1
Word 3 PZD 3 Analog input 2, PZD 3 PZD 3 → K064
slave 1
Word 4 PZD 4 Analog input 3, PZD 4 PZD 4 → K065
slave 1
Word 5 PZD 5 Binary inputs, PZD 5 PZD 5 → K066
slave 2
Bit 0: Bin. input 1
Bit 1: Bin. input 2
etc.
Bit 15: Bin.input 16
Word 6 PZD 6 Analog input 1, PZD 6 Undefined → K067
slave 2
Word 7 PZD 7 Analog input 2, PZD 7 Undefined → K068
slave 2
Word 8 PZD 8 Analog input 3, PZD 8 Undefined → K069
slave 2
Word 9 PZD 9 Undefined PZD 9 Undefined → K070
Word 10 PZD 10 Undefined PZD 10 Undefined → K071

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 3-17

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Function Descriptions 02.99

The process data received from the COM BOARD "arrive" in connectors K062 to K071. They do not, therefore,
go straight to the basic converter. They need to be connected for transfer to the basic unit on the T100. The
basic unit is only able to receive T100 process data, a point which must be noted when process data connections
are made on the basic unit.

b) T100 → COM BOARD

The meaning of the data sent to a COM BOARD depends on the type of COM BOARD used and on the selected
interface protocol. The following lists provides an overview of the currently available COM BOARDs.

Selection Data sent to COM → CB1 → SCB1 → SCB2 → SCB1, SCB2

parameter BOARD by T100 with SCI board(s) with USS with peer-to-peer
H311.01 → Word 1 PZD 1 Binary outputs, PZD 1 PZD 1
in actual-value slave 1 in actual-value
channel Bit 0: Bin. output 1 channel
Bit 1: Bin. output 2
etc.
Bit11: Bin.output
12
H311.02 → Word 2 PZD 2 Analog output 1, PZD 2 PZD 2
slave 1
H311.03 → Word 3 PZD 3 Analog output 2, PZD 3 PZD 3
slave 1
H311.04 → Word 4 PZD 4 Analog output 3, PZD 4 PZD 4
slave 1
H311.05 → Word 5 PZD 5 Binary outputs, PZD 5 PZD 5
slave 2
Bit 0: Bin. output 1
Bit 1: Bin. output 2
etc.
Bit11: Bin.output
12
H311.06 → Word 6 PZD 6 Analog output 1 PZD 6 No destination
slave 2
H311.07 → Word 7 PZD 7 Analog output 2, PZD 7 No destination
slave 2
H311.08 → Word 8 PZD 8 Analog output 3, PZD 8 No destination
slave 2
H311.09 → Word 9 PZD 9 No destination PZD 9 No destination
H311.10 → Word 10 PZD 10 No destination PZD 10 No destination

Process data sent to the COM BOARD are connected via parameter H311. They do not, therefore, arrive directly
from the basic unit. The process data sent by the basic unit (actual values) must be connected on the T100 for
transfer to the COM BOARD. The COM BOARD is only able to receive T100 process data. This must be noted
when process data connections are made on the basic unit.

Note: If setpoints and control words must be transferred to the basic unit, then control bit 10 "Control
requested" of the basic unit must be set to "1" (see sheet 11 of block diagram).

Please see Chapter 5 for the number notation of the process data (connectors).

Access to parameters via CBx / SCBx

It is possible to access all parameters of both the T100 (dxxx and Hxxx) and the basic unit (rxxx and Pxxx) via
the CBx/SCBx (exception: SCB1). Write access to parameters can be obtained, however, only if the CBx /SCBx
has been enabled for parameterization via P053 (P053=n+1 for CBx or P053=n+8 for SCBx).
With regards to the notation of parameter numbers and values, the information given in Chapters 3.5 and 4.2
applies.

3-18 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
02.99 Function Descriptions

Configuration of CBx / SCBx on MASTERDRIVES MC / VC from 1997 / 98

Even if a T100 board is installed, the CBx is configured by means of the following basic unit parameters:
- P711 ... P721 if CBx is installed
- P696 ... P705 if SCBx is installed

These configuring parameters are "pushed through" the T100 to the CBx /SCBx when the Master Drives unit is
switched on and after their settings have been altered.

Diagnosis and monitoring of CBx / SCBx on MASTERDRIVES MC / VC from 1997 / 98

Parameters r731 and r958 provide important diagnostic information about the CBx. Parameter r679 provides
diagnostic information about the SCBx.

It is possible to set a time monitoring function in H310 which results in a fault trip with F116 in the case of a
timeout (do not use parameters P722 and P704 described in the operating instructions for the basic unit for this
purpose). Fault message F116 can be acknowledged even if the fault status is permanent. This ensures that the
drive can always continue operation in manual mode, even after a communications failure.

Configuration of CBx / SCBx on MASTERDRIVES FC / VC / SC from 1995

Even if a T100 board is installed, the CBx is configured by means of the following basic unit parameters:
- P696 ... P705 and P918 if CBx is installed
- P660 ... P662, P665, P666, P682 ... P689 if SCBx is installed

These configuring parameters are "pushed through" the T100 to the CBx /SCBx when the Master Drives unit is
switched on and after their settings have been altered.

Diagnosis and monitoring of CBx / SCBx on MASTERDRIVES FC / VC / SC from 1995

Parameters r731 and r958 provide important diagnostic information about the CBx. Parameter r730 provides
diagnostic information about the SCBx.

It is possible to set a time monitoring function in H310 which results in a fault trip with F116 in the case of a
timeout (do not use parameters P687 and P695 described in the operating instructions for the basic unit for this
purpose). Fault message F116 can be acknowledged even if the fault status is permanent. This ensures that the
drive can always continue operation in manual mode, even after a communications failure.

3.7.1 Operation of CBx/SCBx in accordance with the PROFIBUS user profile

(e.g. with block package DVA_S5)

If you are operating the T100 on an automation system (e.g. SIMATIC S5, SIMADYN D etc.) via PROFIBUS or
the USS protocol and if you have installed our block packages (e.g. DVA_S5, see /4/) in the automation system,
then please note the following: Our block packages support the "PROFIBUS User Profile Variable-Speed Drives"
(see /7/) and therefore require defined characteristics for a number of process data elements.

We recommend the following settings on the T100 for use in conjunction with our block packages:

a) Position of main control word and main status word

Word 1 of the T100 receive data should always be used as the main control word (connector K062, see block
diagram sheet [18.3]).
Word 1 of the T100 receive data should always be used as the main status word (applies to connector selected
via H311.1)

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 3-19

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Function Descriptions 02.99

b) Control bit 10 ("Control requested")

Control bit 10 should be "wired through" directly from the CBx /SCBx to the basic unit. For this purpose, for
example, bit 10 of K062 [18.3] must be isolated by means of a connector/binector converter and supplied to the
basic unit via H272.11.

With a "1" status of bit 10, the automation system declares all its setpoints and control commands to be valid
and requests the converter to accept them.

Bit 10 is not directly supported on the T100, i.e. the setpoints and control commands from the automation
system which are connected to the T100 are always accepted regardless of bit 10 (but can, of course, be
disabled or enabled on the T100 as a function of bit 10 if required). However, since the basic unit does not
accept any setpoints or control commands at its dual-port RAM as long as the "wired-through" bit 10 is "0", it can
always be guaranteed that no hazardous situations will arise.

c) Status bits 3, 7 and 9

The following status bits should be "wired through" from status word 1 of the basic converter to transmit word 1
of the CBx / SCBx (see [13.7]):
- Bit 3 "Fault" (binector B035)
- Bit 7 "Alarm" (binector B039)
- Bit 9 "Unit requests process data control from automation system" (binector B041)

These binectors should be connected to bits 3, 7 and 9 of the connector which can be selected via H311.1
[18.5], thus ensuring that the communications display word in DVA_S5 is updated.

d) Adjustable length of process data area for PROFIBUS messages (PPOs)

The PROFIBUS profile only permits process data lengths of 2, 6 or 10 words (PPO types 1 to 5).

e) Adjustable length of process data area for USS messages

The length of the process data area for USS messages can be between 0 and 10 words. When the length is "0",
points a) to c) of this section do not apply and bits 6, 7 and 8 of the communications display word in the SIMATIC
are not updated in DVA_S5.

3.8 Exchange of signals with MASTERDRIVES MC / VC from 1997 / 98

The data exchange with the basic unit takes place via a high-speed DUAL PORT RAM located on the T100 (see
sheet 1 of block diagram). A maximum of 10 values in the actual value area can be transferred at a time from the
basic unit to the T100 and in the setpoint area from the T100 to the basic unit. The connection of these data -
both in the basic unit and in the T100 - is shown on sheets 10 ... 14 of the block diagram.

Note: Pages 10 ... 14 of the block diagram show the process data exchange with the Master Drives VC and
MC. Please consult the Operating Instructions of your Master Drives basic unit for details of the
process data interface between the basic unit and technology board ("TB") which is currently available.
The connection of process data exchanged with the T100 in the Master Drives infeed/regenerative
feedback units is not shown in the diagram. These connections must be made on the same basis as
the mechanisms described in this manual in accordance with the operating instructions of the
input/regenerative feedback unit used.

Actual value area (signals from basic unit ⇒ T100)

It is possible to link any connectors of the basic unit to the words in the actual value area by means of
P734.01...10.

Example: - Basic unit is a MASTER DRIVE VC

- The actual frequency value KK151 must be linked to the T100 in word 2 of the actual value area
- ⇒ Set P734.02=151!
- The actual frequency value is available in K038

3-20 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
02.99 Function Descriptions

It is advisable to link status words 1 and 2 (K032 and K033) to words 1 and 4 of the actual value area by setting
P734.01=32 and P734.04=33.

Before the basic unit actual values can be processed on the T100, they must be converted to the internal
"connector format" (100% = 4000 Hex = 16384 Dec). For "PZD groups" 2 to 4, this conversion involves a
multiplication by 4 and the connector which has the multiplier "∗4" at its input should be selected to process the
actual values. This multiplication by 4 is not normally required on new series MASTERDRIES MC / VC
converters (from 1997 / 98).

Status bits from basic unit (sheets 13 and 14 of block diagram)

There are 32 basic unit status bits available as binectors for further processing on the T100. All status bits can be
viewed in d030.01 and d030.02. A luminous bar is assigned to each status bit on the 7-segment display of the
PMU operator panel.

Setpoint area (signals T100 ⇒ basic unit)

The setpoints and control bits which the T100 sends to the basic unit are only effective in the unit if they are
gated there via the injection or connection parameters specified on sheets 10 ... 12 of the block diagram. There
is, however, one exception:

Important: If a T100 is installed, then control bit 10 "Control requested" is always connected to the basic unit
(sheet 11 of block diagram). It is essential to set this control bit 10 to "1" on the T100 - e.g. via
H272.11 = 1 if the basic unit must accept setpoints and control commands from the T100.

In other cases, a setpoint or a control bit in the basic unit should only be connected to the source "TB" (=T100) if
the application requires this signal to be specified by the T100. Sheet 10 of the block diagram shows a possible
connection of the relevant setpoints and control words if this is required.

It is advisable to reserve words 1 and 4 in the setpoint area as selectable sources for the basic converter control
bits 0 to 31. Word 10 in the setpoint area is intended for the P-gain adaptation factor of the speed controller in
the Master Drives VC. The characteristic block shown on sheet 10 of the block diagram generates this
adaptation factor from the connector selected via H275.08.

Note: The P-gain adaptation function on the T100 is not normally used on new series MASTERDRIVES MC /
VC, as the new basic unit already has this functionality.

Control bits to basic unit (sheets 11 and 12 of block diagram)

The 32 available control bits can be connected either word-serially via H270 and H271 or (if H270/H271=2) bit-
for-bit via H272 to the DUAL PORT RAM. They can be connected from the RAM to the desired control function in
basic unit control words 1 and 2 via P554 ... P590 in the basic converter if required. Control bit 10 "Control
requested" is an exception, see box above.

Use of analog and digital inputs/outputs of the basic converter by the T100

The T100 is able to use the free analog and digital inputs/outputs of the Master Drives VC and MC provided that
appropriate connector and binector connections have been made in the basic converter.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 3-21

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Function Descriptions 02.99

3.9 Exchange of signals with MASTERDRIVES FC / VC / SC from 1995

The data exchange with the basic unit takes place via a high-speed DUAL PORT RAM located on the T100 (see
sheet 1 of block diagram). A maximum of 10 values in the actual value area can be transferred at a time from the
basic unit to the T100 and in the setpoint area from the T100 to the basic unit. The connection of these data -
both in the basic unit and in the T100 - is shown on sheets 10 ... 14 of the block diagram.

Note: Pages 10 ... 14 of the block diagram show the process data exchange with the Master Drives FC, VC
and SC in the version available in July 1995. Please consult the Operating Instructions of your Master
Drives basic unit for details of the process data interface between the basic unit and technology board
("TB") which is currently available. The connection of process data exchanged with the T100 in the
Master Drives infeed/regenerative feedback units is not shown in the diagram. These connections must
be made on the same basis as the mechanisms described in this manual in accordance with the
operating instructions of the input/regenerative feedback unit used.

Actual value area (signals from basic unit ⇒ T100)

It is possible to link any signals (defined as non-indexed r or P parameters) of the basic unit to the words in the
actual value area by means of P694.01...10.

Example: - Basic unit is a MASTER DRIVE VC

- The actual frequency value r218 must be linked to the T100 in word 2 of the actual value area
- ⇒ Set P694.2=218!
- The actual frequency value is available in K038

It is advisable to link status words 1 and 2 (r968 and r553) to words 1 and 4 of the actual value area by setting
P694.1=968 and P694.4=553.

Before the basic unit actual values can be processed on the T100, they must be converted to the internal
"connector format" (100% = 4000 Hex = 16384 Dec). For "PZD groups" 2 to 4, this conversion involves a
multiplication by 4 and the connector which has the multiplier "∗4" at its input should be selected to process the
actual values.

Example:- The basic units is a MASTER DRIVE VC with "Closed-loop speed control" method
- The converter output current r004 must be connected to the T100 in word 9 of the actual value area.
r004 has numerical notation "100% equals 1000 Hex"
- ⇒ Set P964.9=004
- The output current is available in K052 in the normal connector representation "100% equals
4000 Hex"

Status bits from basic unit (sheets 13 and 14 of block diagram)

There are 32 basic unit status bits available as binectors for further processing on the T100. All status bits can be
viewed in d030.01 and d030.02. A luminous bar is assigned to each status bit on the 7-segment display of the
PMU operator panel.

Setpoint area (signals T100 ⇒ basic unit)

The setpoints and control bits which the T100 sends to the basic unit are only effective in the unit if they are
gated there via the injection or connection parameters specified on sheets 10 ... 12 of the block diagram. There
is, however, one exception:

Important: If a T100 is logged on with the basic unit (P090=2), then control bit 10 "Control requested" is always
connected to the basic unit (sheet 11 of block diagram). It is essential to set this control bit 10 to "1"
on the T100 - e.g. via H272.11 = 1 if the basic unit must accept setpoints and control commands from
the T100.

3-22 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
02.99 Function Descriptions

In other cases, a setpoint or a control bit in the basic unit should only be connected to the source "TB" (=T100) if
the application requires this signal to be specified by the T100. Sheet 10 of the block diagram shows a possible
connection of the relevant setpoints and control words if this is required.

It is advisable to reserve words 1 and 4 in the setpoint area as selectable sources for the basic converter control
bits 0 to 31. Word 10 in the setpoint area is intended for the P-gain adaptation factor of the speed controller in
the Master Drives VC. The characteristic block shown on sheet 10 of the block diagram generates this
adaptation factor from the connector selected via H275.08.

Control bits to basic unit (sheets 11 and 12 of block diagram)

The 32 available control bits can be connected either word-serially via H270 and H271 or (if H270/H271=2) bit-
for-bit via H272 to the DUAL PORT RAM. They can be connected from the RAM to the desired control function in
basic unit control words 1 and 2 via P554 ... P590 in the basic converter if required. Control bit 10 "Control
requested" is an exception, see box above.

Use of analog inputs/outputs of the basic converter by the T100

The T100 is able to use the free analog inputs/outputs of the Master Drives VC and SC provided that the
technology controller of the basic converter is wired up accordingly and the basic converter is wired as follows:

− An analog value to be output is initially sent from the DPRAM (dual-port RAM) via P526 or P531 = 30xx to the
setpoint or actual-value input of the technology controller in the basic converter. The assigned display
parameter r529 or r534 can then be wired through to the analog output.

− An analog value to be input is initially sent from the analog input of the basic converter via P526 or P531 =
1003 / 1004 to the setpoint or actual-value input of the technology controller. The assigned display parameter
r529 or r534 can then be wired through to the DPRAM of the T100 via P694.x = 529 / 534.

3.10 Selecting factory setting for T100 parameters via H970=0

The purpose of this function is to reset all (H) parameters on the T100 technology board to the factory setting
(delivery state) as specified in the parameter list (Chapter 2).
O O O
The "Factory setting" selection can be made in all operating modes except for Run ( 014, 015, 018).

Operational sequence:

⇓ H970 = 0 Select "Factory setting" function

⇓ P key H970 appears

All H parameters are reset to the factory setting specified in the parameter list

⇓ P key To indicate execution of the function, the numbers 1xxx of the Hxxx parameters
being processed are output sequentially as the "parameter value" on the parameter
display

⇓ After the parameters have been set to the factory setting, H970 is automatically set to 1

3.11 Dynamic reading or writing of basic unit parameters

See also sheet 15 of block diagram

With this function, it is possible to read P and r parameters of the basic unit and alter the P parameter settings
from the T100 board. The changes in the basic unit are stored only in the RAM and are not stored when the

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 3-23

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Function Descriptions 02.99

supply voltage is disconnected. In order to read a basic unit parameter, H284 must be set to 2. The contents of
the selected parameter are then available at connector K054.

Example: The setting of parameter P444 index.02 in the basic unit must be altered according to the voltage at
analog input terminal 50/51.
Apart from the analog input settings, the following settings must be made:

1. H284 = 3: Switches connector K003 (analog input terminal 50/51) to the input of the
transfer block
2. H282 = 444: Selects the number of the basic unit parameter
3. H283 = 2: Selects the index of the basic unit parameter which is to be written
(H283=0 must be set for "non-indexed" parameters)

3.12 Technology controller

See also sheet 21 of block diagram and parameter list (Chapter 4, parameters H330-H359)

Controller type

The controller type can be selected via parameter H351:

- P controller (I component = 0)
- I controller (P component = 0)
- PI controller / PID controller

Technology controller

0
Kp +
1
+
P comp.
0
Tn 1
I comp.

T H Z E
H351
Z=0 ... P comp.:=0
E=0 ... I comp.:=0

Reset time setting range

H345 = 0: Range of effective reset time Tn: 0.000 to 60.000 sec

H345 = 1: Range of effective reset time Tn: 60 to 60000 sec (1 minute to approx. 16.7 hours !)
The setting H345 = 1 may only be used when reset times of > 60 sec actually need to be set. (The
settings H345 = 1 and H344 = 0.001 sec would in theory also produce an effective reset time Tn of
1 sec. However, the internal calculations for these settings are extremely inaccurate.)

Control signals for technology controller

Enable technology controller:

0 = Disable controller, controller output = 0, K082 (P component) = 0, K083 (I component) = 0
1 = Enable controller

Set I component:
I component is set to the setting value on 0 → 1 signal transition at selected binector

3-24 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
02.99 Function Descriptions

Limitation

A special characteristic of the limitation function is that the lower limitation can also be set to positive values and
the upper limitation to negative values (see H354 and H356). A limit set in this way also acts as a lower limit
(minimum value) for the output signal of the technology controller in the opposite sign direction.

Warning! If the positive output limitation of the technology controller is set to a negative value or the negative
output limitation set to a positive value, then the motor may accelerate in an uncontrolled manner in
some operating modes and configurations, e.g. if there is no motor counter-torque and the technology
controller output is connected to the torque supplementary setpoint of the basic unit.

D component in actual-value channel or setpoint/actual value deviation channel

The derivative-action time of the D component has the following setting ranges:

H333 = 0: Range of effective derivative-action time Tv: 0.000 to 30.000 sec

H333 = 1: Range of effective derivative-action time Tv: 30 to 30000 sec (= approx. 8.3 hours !)
The setting H333 = 1 may only be used when derivative-action times of > 30 sec actually need to be
set. (The settings H333 = 1 and H332 = 0.001 sec would in theory also produce an effective
derivative-action time Tv of 1 sec. However, the internal calculations for these settings are extremely
inaccurate.)

As a basis for selecting the derivative-action time, the maximum possible rate of rise which can occur at the input
of the D-action element must be calculated. The derivative-action time should then be set shorter than the period
of time required by the input signal to change from 0 to 100% at the calculated maximum rate of rise.

3.13 Comfort ramp-function generator

See also sheet 22 of block diagram and parameter list (Chapter 4, parameters H360-H394)

Note: The ramp-function generator will only operate if the following conditions are fulfilled:
- Enable ramp-function generator = 1(e.g. by setting H368 = 1)
- Disable ramp-function generator = 0 (e.g. by setting H362 = 0)

Definitions

Ramp-up = Acceleration from low positive to high positive speeds (e.g. 10% to 90%) or from low negative
to high negative speeds (e.g. -10% to -90%)

Ramp-down = Braking from high positive to low positive speeds (e.g. 90% to 10%) or from high negative to
low negative speeds (e.g. -90% to -10%)

On transition from negative to positive speeds e.g. -10% to +50%:

from -10% to 0 = ramp-down and
from 0 to +50% = ramp-up and vice versa

Ramp-up time is the time required by the ramp-function generator to pass through the 100% at the ramp-
generator output with a lower and upper transition rounding setting of 0 and a step change in
the input quantity from 0 to 100%, or from 0 to -100%. With less abrupt changes at the input,
the rate of rise at the output is constant.

Ramp-down time is the time required by the ramp-generator to pass through 100% at the ramp-generator output
with a lower and upper transition rounding setting of 0 and a step change in the input quantity
of 100% to 0 or of -100% to 0. With less abrupt changes at the input, the rate of rise at the
output is constant.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 3-25

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Function Descriptions 02.99

Mode of operation of ramp-function generator

K090 RUT RDT RDT

K096
100%
RUT

LTR/2 UTR/2

LTR/2 UTR/2 t
LTR/2

Ramp function generator setpoint

(K090)

Ramp-funct. generat.output
(K096)
-100%

K095 LTR UTR LTR 1) LTR UTR LTR 2) LTR LTR 3)

(dy/dt)

t
dy/dt (K095)

RUT ... Ramp-up time (H372, H377, H381), RDT ... Ramp-down time (H373, H378, H382)
LTR ... Lower transition rounding (H374, H379, H383), UTR ... Upper transition rounding (H375, H380, H384)

1) Transition from slope of run-down ramp to slope of run-up ramp

2) The lower transition rounding changes to the upper transition rounding before the maximum run-down slope is reached
3) Owing to the step change at the generator input, only the last part of the upper transition rounding is executed here

Control signals for comfort ramp-function generator

Stop ramp-function generator:

1 = Ramp-function generator is stopped at the currently applied value (generator output is injected as the
generator input).

Disable ramp-function generator:

1 = Ramp-function generator setting 1 becomes valid and "0" is applied to the input (ramp-function generator
output decreases to 0)

Set ramp-function generator:

1 = Ramp-function generator output is set to setting value

Enable ramp-function generator:

0 = Ramp-function generator disabled, generator output is set to 0
1 = Ramp-function generator enabled

Starting integrator operation ON: See parameter list H366

Note: If the "Starting integrator operation ON" signal is switched to 1 when the ramp generator is enabled,
then ramp generator setting 3 becomes valid immediately

Ramp-function generator settings 2 and 3: See parameter list H370 and H371
RFG setting 1 is valid if neither setting 2 nor setting 3 is selected. If RFG settings 2 and 3 are selected
simultaneously, alarm A104 (RFG setting ambiguous) is activated. During this period, the last unambiguous
setting is effective.

3-26 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
02.99 Function Descriptions

Limitation in ramp-function generator, ramp-function generator tracking

H369 = 0: The limitation in the ramp-function generator is ineffective. The limitation of the output signal (K100),
but not of the internal integrator in the ramp generator (K096), is effected by means of the
downstream limiter stage (H390...H394).
H369 = 1: The limitation in the ramp-function generator is effective. When the limitations defined via
H385...H387 (L+, L-) are reached, the ramp-function generator (K096) follows the limitation via the
effective ramp-generator setting.

Limitation at ramp-function generator output

This limiter stage can be used completely independently of the ramp-function generator because the input signal
can be freely selected. A special feature of this limitation function is that the lower limitation can also be set to
positive values and the upper limitation to negative values (see H391 and H393). A limit set in this way is then
applied as the lower limit (minimum value) for the output signal of the ramp-function generator in the opposite
sign direction. Please observe the warning given in Chapter 3.11!

Example: H392.01-04 = 2 (= 200%)

H391 = 100.00 (%)
H393 = 10.00 (%)
H394.01-04 = 2 (= -200%)
results in a limitation of the value range of K100 to +10.00% to +100.00%

Velocity signal dy/dt (K095)

This signal specifies the variation in the ramp-function generator output K096 during the period set in H367.

Restriction in SW version 1.0:

In SW version 1.0, the signal dy/dt is generated correctly only if the comfort ramp-function generator is active. If
the change at the RFG output is generated, for example, by a ramp at the RFG input with a lower rate of rise
than the run-up/run-down ramp, then the dy/dt signal is "0" because the RFG ramp time has always expired in
this case. The same also applies when a ramp-up/ramp-down time of "0" is set.

3.14 Motorized potentiometer

See also sheet 23 of the block diagram and parameter list (Chapter 4, parameters H400 to H411)

Modes of operation

It is possible to switch over between operating modes either by a parameter setting (H400) or by means of a
control binector (selected via H408).

Automatic mode / Ramp-function generator mode:

The ramp-function generator follows the automatic-mode setpoint. The Raise/Lower commands are ignored.

Manual mode / Motorized potentiometer mode:

The ramp-function generator is operated according to Raise/Lower commands. The automatic-mode setpoint is
ignored.

The following settings can be made in manual mode / motorized potentiometer mode:

Operating range 0% to ±100%, Clockwise / Counter-clockwise:

When "Raise setpoint" is selected, a setpoint of +100% is applied to the ramp-generator input (for Clockwise
selection) or a setpoint of -100% (for Counter-clockwise selection). When "Lower setpoint" is selected, setpoint 0
is applied to the generator input.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 3-27

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Function Descriptions 02.99

Operating range -100% to +100%

When "Raise setpoint" is selected, +100% is applied as a setpoint to the ramp-generator input and -100% for
"Lower setpoint". The Clockwise/Counter-clockwise switchover is not operative in this mode.

The operating range is selected by means of parameter setting (H400). Clockwise / counter-clockwise switchover
and Raise/Lower inputs are selected by means of control binectors.

Ramp-function generator

Ramp-up time:
is the time required by the ramp-function generator to pass through the 100% at the ramp-generator output with
a step change in the input quantity from 0 to 100%, or from 0 to -100%. With less abrupt changes at the input,
the rate of rise at the output is constant.

Ramp-down time:
is the time required by the ramp-generator to pass through 100% at the ramp-generator output with a step
change in the input quantity of 100% to 0 or of -100% to 0. With less abrupt changes at the input, the rate of rise
at the output is constant.

Set motorized potentiometer:

The ramp-function generator is set to the setting value when binector = 1.

Other settings via parameter H400:

- Selection of non-volatile storage of ramp-generator status on disconnection of power supply
- Bypass of ramp-generator in automatic mode (as for ramp-up/ramp-down time = 0)

Velocity signal dy/dt (K160)

This signal specifies the variation in the ramp-function generator output K158 during the period set in H412 and
H404.

Restriction in SW version 1.0:

In SW version 1.0, the signal dy/dt is generated correctly only if the ramp-function generator is active. If the
change at the RFG output is generated, for example, by a ramp at the RFG input with a lower rate of rise than
the run-up/run-down ramp, then the dy/dt signal is "0" because the RFG ramp time has always expired in this
case. The same also applies when a ramp-up/ramp-down time of "0" is set.

3.15 Wobble generator

See also sheet 24 of block diagram and parameter list (Chapter 4, parameters H408 to H426)

Note: Prerequisites for operation of the wobble generator:

In order to run up the wobble generator from the factory setting, you must:
− Set the wobble amplitude to H421 > 0
− Issue the wobble enable command (e.g. with H420 = 1)
− Input an "unmodulated setpoint" with a value other than zero, e.g. with H418 = 1

Synchronizing signal:
If H423 ≠ 360 is set, then the wobble generator operates in synchronism with a "master wobble generator", e.g.
installed on another T100:

- Every positive edge of the wobble synchronizing input signal results in termination of the current period of the
wobble triangle generator on completion of the phase shift parameterized in H423 and to the start of a new
period ("retriggering").
- If the frequency of the wobble synchronizing signal does not tally with the parameterized frequency (H422),
then "re-triggering" takes place if the wobble synchronizing signal frequency is higher - as described above.

3-28 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
02.99 Function Descriptions

When the wobble synchronizing signal frequency is lower, there is a pause at the end of every period of the
triangle generator during which the wobble generator output remains at zero.

Parameterization
- The values of parameters H420, H421, H422, H424, H425 and H426 are transferred only after one full period
of the wobble triangle generator and on commencement of a new period. They then remain valid for the whole
of the next period even if the value of one parameter changes in the meantime.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 3-29

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Function Descriptions 02.99

3-30 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
02.99 Parameter List

4 Parameter Handling and Parameter List

The T100 has its own EEPROM parameter memory. The technology parameters must therefore be input again
(see Chapter 7) when a new board is installed.

Note: The technology parameters are set to the factory values via H970 (not in P052, P970 or H052)!

4.1 Parameterization inputs on PMU and OP1 parameterizing units

T100 parameters are identified by the initial letters "d" and "H". "d" parameters are display parameters. They can
be read but not altered. "H" parameters are the setting parameters. The "d" parameters are positioned before the
"H" parameters and after the "r" and "P" parameters of the basic unit. The order in which parameters are called
on the parameterizing units is thus as follows:

- "r" and "P" parameters of basic unit

- "d" parameters (display parameters of T100, appear after P999)
- "H" parameters of T100

Important note
When parameter numbers are scrolled through on the display of the parameterizing unit, no distinction is made
initially beween "d" and "H" parameters. The appropriate letter "d" or "H" is output next to the parameter value
only after the Raise or Lower key has been released.
The reason for this is that the Raise/Lower key of the parameterizing unit is processed in the basic unit without
any continuous communication taking place with the T100 so that the basic unit does not know initially whether
the parameter is of the "d" or "H" type.

Important regarding OP1 unit

Technology parameters can be entered directly on the OP1 if they are preceded by "1" (e.g. type in "1025" in
order to address d025).

4.2 Access to technology parameters via a serial interface

Number notation of parameter numbers and values on the serial interfaces

The numbers of the technology parameters (H and d parameters) are preceded by a "1" to distinguish them from
the numbers of the basic unit parameters (r and P parameters) i.e. they differ by an offset of 1000d (example:
"d041 is addressed on the serial interface with the number 1041d and "H343" with the number 1343d).

The number notation of a parameter value depends on the parameter "type" specified in each case in the
parameter list. The various parameter types are explained at the beginning of the list. The parameters are always
transferred in the form in which they are specified in the "value range" column of the parameter list, but with the
decimal point (if any) omitted. (Example: Display value 123.45 --> the number 12345d = 3039h is transmitted via
the interface).

The parameter numbers are thus represented as follows:

Parameter number on PMU and OP1 Parameter number on the serial interface

P000 - P999 000 - 999 dec = 0000 - 03E7 hex

r000 - r999 000 - 999 dec = 0000 - 03E7 hex
d000 - d999 1000 - 1999 dec = 03E8 - 07CF hex
H000 - H999 1000 - 1999 dec = 03E8 - 07CF hex

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

Parameter values are transferred as follows on the serial interface (negative values in two’s complement):

Parameter Value range in parameter list Value range on serial interface

type and on PMU / OP1
I2 -32768 ... 32767
-3276.8 ... 3276.7 -32768 ... 32767 dec
-327.68 ... 327.67 =
-32.768 ... 32.767 8000 ... 7FFF hex
O2 0 ... 65535
0 ... 6553.5 0 ... 65535 dec
0 ... 655.35 =
0 ... 65.535 0000 ... FFFF hex
V2

0000 ... FFFF hex

on PMU =
0 ... 65535 dec
0000 0000 00000000 ... 11111111 1111 1111
on OP1 + SIMOVIS
L2 0000 ... FFFF 0000 ... FFFF hex = 0 ... 65535 dec

Note: Technology parameters changed in the RAM are transferred to the EEPROM by means of H971 and
not via P971 (applies only to parameter changes via a serial interface with parameter job "Change in
RAM").

Note: H and P parameters can be changed via the serial interfaces only if the particular interface has been
enabled for parameterization via P053, e.g.:

- P053=n+16 ⇒ Parameter settings can be changed via the USS interface of the T100
- P053=n+8 ⇒ Parameter settings can be changed via the SCBx communications board
(e.g. SCB2)
- P053=n+1 ⇒ Parameter settings can be changed via the CBx communications board
(e.g. CB1)

Parameters can be read via any of the serial interface regardless of how P053 is set.

Note: The factory setting of the H parameters is restored via parameter H970 (see Chapter 3.9).

4-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

4.3 Parameter list

Overview of parameter list

Parameter number Function
range
d000 - d002 Board identification
d010 - d049 Display parameters
H050 Language selection
H051 Code parameter
d052 - d099 Display parameters
H100 - H146 Analog inputs (F10 to F50)
H150 - H165 Analog outputs (F1690, F1700)
H170 - H185 Binary inputs (F60 to F130)
H190 - H204 Binary outputs (F1710 to F1750)
H210 - H224 Fixed setpoints (B160, F210 to F340)
H230 - H235 Fixed control bits (F350 to F400)
H240 - H245 Connector displays (B60 to B105)
H250 - H253 Binector displays (B110 to B140)
H260 - H263 Fault-message trigger signals (F1590 to F1620)
H264 - H267 Alarm-message trigger signals (B10 to B40)
H270 - H284 Process data exchange with basic unit (F170, F1660, F180, F1670, B150)
H290 - H297 Data exchange via USS interface (F160, F1770)
H300 - H305 Data exchange via peer-to-peer connection (F150, F1760)
H310 - H312 Process data exchange with COM BOARD (CBx or SCBx) (F190, F1680)
H320 Connector/binector converters (F410 to F430)
H324 - H326 Binector/connector converters (F1630 to F1650)
H330 - H359 Technology controller (F1240)
H360 - H394 Comfort ramp-function generator (F1010)
H400 - H414 Motorized potentiometer (F670)
H418 - H426 Wobble generator (F1020)
H430 - H444 Adders (F590, F680, F950, F1030, F1370)
H445 - H450 Subtracters (F720, F1070, F1310)
H451 - H455 Sign inverters (F580, F840, F1550, F920)
H456 - H461 Dividers (F730, F960, F1380)
H462 - H469 Multipliers (F650, F750, F1080, F1460)
H470 - H480 High-resolution multipliers/dividers (F740, F910, F1150)
H482 - H493 Absolute-value generators with filter (F440, F1320, F1530, F1580)
H494 - H501 Limiters (F1190, F1470)
H502 - H513 Limit-value monitors with filter (F830, F1540)
H514 - H519 Maximum/minimum selection (F1390, F1400)
H520 - H529 Tracking/storage elements (F450, F460)
H530 - H533 Analog signal memories (F470, F480)
H534 - H563 Analog signal switches (F490, F550, F640, F780, F810, F860, F1060, F1130, F1160, F1220)
H570 - H575 Simple ramp-function generator (F900)
H576 - H577 Dead zone (F570)
H580 - H588 Characteristic blocks (F760, F930, F1330)
H590 - H630 Logic functions
H631 - H644 RS flipflops (F880, F940, F1120, F1270, F1300, F1430, F1440)
H645 - H652 D flipflops (F820, F1280)
H660 - H674 Timers (F530, F1110, F1170, F1200, F1290)
H675 - H686 Binary signal switches (F560, F630, F1000, F1140)
H690 - H694 Velocity/speed calculators (B50, F1230)
H700 - H703 Parameter set switchover (F200)
H750 - H752 Task sequence selection
H917 - d998 System parameters

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-3

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

Overview of abbreviations used in parameter list

Example:
PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. indices Read
[unit] Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H190 BA87SourceBinect 8) 0 to 200 Ind: None 5) 6)

* Selection of binector to be applied to the terminal FS=0 1/UHABR

1) 1/UHAB
7)
0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=4A6 Hex; Type=O2; 2) Normalization: 1==1; 3) Block diag.: [7.1] 4)

1) An
* under the parameter number indicates that this is an acknowledgement parameter, i.e. the changed
value is not activated until the P key (shift key) has been pressed. If the P key (on PMU) is not pressed within
about 10 s of the last value change, then the change to the value is discarded and the previous value displayed
again.

2) Specification of parameter type

O2 Unsigned 16-bit value (range 0 to 65535)

I2 Signed 16-bit value (range -32768 to +32767), negative numbers in two's complement

V2 Bit-coded quantity (2-bytes bit array)

Every one of the 16 bits is significant in its own right. The individual bits of a parameter of type V2 are represented on the
7-segment display in the following way (the decimal point in the centre of the display always lights up to indicate an active
function):

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

L2 Nibble-coded quantity (2 bytes consisting of 4 mutually independent nibbles)

The nibble values A Hex to F Hex are displayed as hexadecimal numbers.
The limitation of an L2-type parameter is also "nibble-oriented", i.e. each nibble is limited to the values specified in the
column headed "Value range".
Example: Parameter H400 has a value range of 0001 to 1112
i.e.. Nibble 0 (units position): Lower limitation = 1, upper limitation = 2
Nibble 1 (tens position): Lower limitation = 0, upper limitation = 1 etc.

3) Specification of normalization for transmission of parameter value via a serial interface

4) Specification of block diagram [sheet.column] in which parameter can be found

5) Access level (H051) from which a parameter can be altered or displayed

0 d and H parameters can be read, but not

changed
1 Standard mode
2 Expert mode
3 Logbook mode

6) Specification of operational states in which the parameter can be displayed (see chapter "Parameter List" in
the operating instructions of the basic unit)

4-4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

7) Specification of operational states in which the parameter setting can be changed

6) 7) Operational states
U MLFB (machine- o000
readable product
designation) input
H Hardware configuration o002, o004
A Drive setting o005
B Ready (incl.: Fault ) o007, o008, o009, o010,
o011, o012, o021
R Run o014, o015, o018

8) Abbreviated parameter designation on OP1 and in the SIMOVIS service program. This can be read out of the
Master Drive units via the serial interface (see e.g. /3/).

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-5

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)

Board identification
d000 HWBoardCodeSlot2 131 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=3E8 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 131==TECH BOARD T100
d001 TechSoftwareType (software module type) 0.00 to 99.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
0.xx = "Multi-Purpose Drive” software module
PNU=3E9 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01
d002 TechSoftwareVers (software version) 0.0 to 25.5 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=3EA Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.1

Display parameters
d010 AE50_InputSignal (for F10) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Analog input terminal 50: Display of normalized and filtered input [%]
voltage
PNU=3F2 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0,1 %; Block diag.: [2.8]
d011 AE52_InputSignal (for F20) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Analog input terminal 52: As for d010 [%]
PNU=3F3 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0,1 %; Block diag.: [2.8]
d012 AE54_InputSignal (for F30) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Analog input terminal 54: As for d010 [%]
PNU=3F4 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0,1 %; Block diag.: [3.8]
d013 AE56_InputSignal (for F40) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Analog input terminal 56: As for d010 [%]
PNU=3F5 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0,1 %; Block diag.: [3.8]
d014 AE58_InputSignal (for F50) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Analog input terminal 58: As for d010 [%]
PNU=3F6 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0,1 %; Block diag.: [3.8]
d015 AA61_Outp.Signal (for F1690) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Analog output terminal 61: [%]
Display of value selected for the analog output. The signal injection mode
and the filter time are also taken into account.
PNU=3F7 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0,1 %; Block diag.: [4.3]
d016 AA63_Outp.Signal (for F1700) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Analog output terminal 63: As for d015 [%]
PNU=3F8 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0,1 %; Block diag.: [4.3]
d017 Bin.Input 77-84 (for F60 to F130) Ind: None 1/UHABR
Binary inputs terminals 77 to 84:
indicates the states of the terminals by means of illuminated bars on the
7-segment display

Kl.84 Kl.83 Kl.82 Kl.81 Kl.80 Kl.79 Kl.78 Kl.77

PNU=3F9 Hex; Type=V2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [5.5]

d018 Bin.Output 87-91 (for F1710 to F1750) Ind: None 1/UHABR
Binary outputs terminals 87 to 91:
indicates the states of the terminals by means of illuminated bars on the
7-segment display

Kl.91 Kl.90 Kl.89 Kl.88 Kl.87

PNU=3FA Hex; Type=V2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [7.4]

4-6 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
d019 Bin.OutputOverld (for F1720 to F1760) Ind: None 1/UHABR
Binary outputs terminals 87 to 91:
indicates on the illuminated bars of the 7-segment display whether the
short-circuit monitor or the internal P24 supply monitor has responded for
a binary output

P24
Kl.91 Kl.90 Kl.89 Kl.88 Kl.87
Kl.85

PNU=3FB Hex; Type=V2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [7.4]

d020 ConnDisp (H240) (for B60) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Connector display 1: Display of connector selected in H240 [%]
PNU=3FC Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0,1 %; Block diag.: [8.5]
d021 ConnDisp (H241) (for B70) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Connector display 2: Display of connector selected in H241 [%]
PNU=3FD Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0,1 %; Block diag.: [8.5]
d022 ConnDisp (H242) (for B80) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Connector display 3: Display of connector selected in H242 [%]
PNU=3FE Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0,1 %; Block diag.: [8.5]
d023 ConnDisp (H243) (for B90) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Connector display 4: Display of connector selected in H243 [%]
PNU=3FF Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.1 %; Block diag.: [8.5]
d024 ConnDisp (H244) (for B100) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Connector display 5: Display of connector selected in H244 [%]
PNU=400 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.1 %; Block diag.: [8.5]
d025 ConnDisp (H245) (for B105) -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
High-resolution connector display: [%]
Display of connector selected in H245
PNU=401 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [8.6]
d026 BinecDisp (H250) (for B110) 0 to 1 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Binector display 1: Display of binector selected in H250
PNU=402 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [8.6]
d027 BinecDisp (H251) (for B120) 0 to 1 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Binector display 2: Display of binector selected in H251
PNU=403 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [8.6]
d028 BinecDisp (H252) (for B130) 0 to 1 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Binector display 3: Display of binector selected in H252
PNU=404 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [8.6]
d029 BinecDisp (H253) (for B140) 0 to 1 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Binector display 4: Display of binector selected in H253
PNU=405 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [8.6]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-7

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
d030 StatusBits BUnit (for F170. F1660) Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Data exchange with basic unit:
Display of control and status words

i01: Display of status word 1

i02: Display of status word 2
i03: Display of control word 1
i04: Display of control word 2

indicates states of bits in status or control word by means of illuminated

bars on the 7-segment display

Display of status/control word 1 (bits 0 to 15):

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Display of status/control word 2 (bits 16 to 31):

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Note: The status bits can be observed only if the appropriate

connections in the basic unit have been made (via P694.01=968
and P694.04=553).
The functions assigned to the control bits are effective in the basic
unit only if the appropriate connections in the unit have been made
(via P554 ... 590)
PNU=406 Hex; Type=V2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [11...14]
d031 ActValuesFromBU (= F180) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: 16 1/UHABR
Data exchange with basic unit: [%]
Display of actual values from basic unit

i01: Display actual value 1

i02: Display actual value 2
...
i08: Display actual value 8

i09: Display (actual value 1) * 4

i10 Display (actual value 2) * 4
...
i16 Display (actual value 8) * 4

PNU=407 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.1 %; Block diag.: [10.2.3]

d032 Setpoints To BU (for F1670) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: 7 1/UHABR
Data exchange with basic unit: [%]
Display of setpoints 1 - 7 to basic unit

i01: Display setpoint 1

i02: Display setpoint 2
...
i07: Display setpoint 7

PNU=408 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.1 %; Block diag.: [10.5]

d033 Setpoint8 To BU (for F1670) 0.00 to 19.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Data exchange with basic unit:
Display setpoint 8 to basic unit
PNU=409 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01; Block diag.: [10.5]

4-8 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
d035 USS ReceiveData (= F160) 0000 to FFFF H Ind: 20 1/UHABR
Data exchange via USS interface:
Display of data received via the USS interface

i01: Display process data word 1

...
i10: Display process data word 10
i11 Reserved
...
i16 Reserved
i17: Display parameter data word 1
...
i20: Display parameter data word 4

PNU=40B Hex; Type=L2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [16.3.4]

d036 USS TransmitData (for F1770) 0000 to FFFF H Ind: 20 1/UHABR
Data exchange via USS interface:
Display data transmitted via USS interface

i01: Display process data word 1

...
i10: Display process data word 10
i11 Reserved
...
i16 Reserved
i17: Display parameter data word 1
...
i20: Display parameter data word 4

PNU=40C Hex; Type=L2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [16.5.6]

d037 USS Diagnos.Info (for F1770) Ind: 10 1/UHABR
Diagnostic information for USS
(decoupled counter, overflow at 255)

i001: flTC Number of error-free messages

i002: Terr Number of errored messages *)
i003: Ferr Number of byte-frame errors *)
i004: Orun Number of overrun errors
i005: Prty Parity error *)
i006: STX STX error *)
i007:
i008: BCC Block check error
i009: TLen Incorrect message length
i010: Taus Timeout

*) If a T100 is operated on the same USS bus as the serial interface

SST1 or SST2 of a converter, these counters may be incremented if
the baud rate is 38.4 kBd. This is due to the poor tolerances of the
baud rate. Data exchange is not affected, however. This behaviour
can therefore be ignored.

PNU=40D Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [16.1]

d040 Peer ReceiveData (= F150) 0000 to FFFF H Ind: 5 1/UHABR
Data exchange via the peer-to-peer connection:
Display of data received via the peer-to-peer connection

i01: Display word 1

i02: Display word 2
...
i05: Display word 5

PNU=410 Hex; Type=L2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [17.3]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-9

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
d041 PeerTransmitData (for F1760) 0000 to FFFF H Ind: 5 1/UHABR
Data exchange via the peer-to-peer connection:
Display of data transmitted via the peer-to-peer connection

i01: Display word 1

i02: Display word 2
...
i05: Display word 5

PNU=411 Hex; Type=L2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [17.5]

d042 Peer Diagnosis (for F1760) Ind: 10 1/UHABR
Diagnostic information for peer-to-peer connection
(decoupled counter, overflow at 255)

i001: flTC Number of error-free messages

i002: Terr Number of errored messages
i003: Ferr Number of byte-frame errors
i004: Orun Number of overrun errors
i005: Prty Parity error
i006: STX STX error
i007:
i008: BCC Block check error
i009: Lerr Incorrect message length
i010: Taus Timeout

PNU=412 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [17.1]

d045 CB/SCB RecvData (= F190) 0000 to FFFF H Ind: 10 1/UHABR
Process data exchange with the COM BOARD (CBx or SCBx):
Display of data received via the COM BOARD

i01: Display word 1

i02: Display word 2
...
i10: Display word 10

PNU=415 Hex; Type=L2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [18.3]

d046 CB/SCB TrnsmData (for F1680) 0000 to FFFF H Ind: 10 1/UHABR
Process data exchange with the COM BOARD (CBx or SCBx):
Display of data transmitted via the COM BOARD

i01: Display word 1

i02: Display word 2
...
i10: Display word 10

PNU=416 Hex; Type=L2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [18.6]

d048 dynParTransDiagn (for B150) -1 to 255 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Diagnostic information for dynamic parameter transfer

-1: No error on transfer of parameter

0: Illegal parameter number selected (via H282).
Selected parameter does not exist
1: Parameter value cannot be changed (viewing parameter)
2: Lower or upper value limit exceeded
3: Incorrect index selected via H283
4: Not an array parameter (H283 must be 0!)
11: No parameterizing enable signal (P953 must contain value
"16"!)
12: Password missing (P051 is not appropriately set!)
17: Parameter cannot be changed in current operational state of
converter
101: Parameter is currently deactivated (P051 is not appropriately
set!)
104: Parameter value is illegal
105: Array parameter (H283 may not be 0 !)

PNU=418 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [15.4]

4-10 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)

H050 Language 0 to 4 Ind: None 1/UHABR

Language of plaintext display on optional operator panel OP1 and in the FS=0 1/UHABR
PC service program SIMOVIS

0: German Deutsch
1: English English
2: Spanish Español
3: French Français
4: Italian Italiano

In the software version 1.0 only the language "German" is available

PNU=41A Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1

H051 AccessLevel HPar 0 to 3 Ind: None

Code parameter FS=1

0 = d and H parameters can be read only Read param.

1 = Standard mode for technology parameters: Standard
All technology parameters can be changed and read; however,
the binector and connector selection switches can only be
changed in the "Not running" state (basic unit status bit = 2)
Expert
2 = Expert mode for technology parameters:
As for setting 1, but binector and connector selection switches
can be changed in all operational states
Logbook
3 = Logbook mode:
Only the d parameters and those H parameters which are not
set to the factory value can be read; no parameter settings
can be changed

PNU=41B Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1

d053 Bin>ConBitField1 (for F1630) Ind: None 1/UHABR

Binector/connector converter 1:
Display of bit field 4 (first converted binector set)

indicates states of bits in bit field by means of illuminated bars on the 7-

segment display

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

PNU=41D Hex; Type=V2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [20.4]

d054 Bin>ConBitField2 (for F1640) Ind: None 1/UHABR
Binector/connector converter 2:
Display of bit field 5 (second converted binector set) as for d053
PNU=41E Hex; Type=V2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [20.8]
d055 Bin>ConBitField3 (for F1650) Ind: None 1/UHABR
Binector/connector converter 3:
Display of bit field 6 (third converted binector set) as for d053
PNU=41F Hex; Type=V2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [20.4]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-11

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
d056 Con>BinBitField1 (for F410) Ind: None 1/UHABR
Connector/binector converter 1:
Display bit field 1 (first converted connector)

indicates states of bits in bit field by means of illuminated bars on the 7-

segment display

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

PNU=420 Hex; Type=V2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [19.8]

d057 Con>BinBitField2 (for F420) Ind: None 1/UHABR
Connector/binector converter 2:
Display of bit field 2 (second converted connector) as for d056
PNU=421 Hex; Type=V2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [19.8]
d058 Con>BinBitField3 (for F430) Ind: None 1/UHABR
Connector/binector converter 3:
Display of bit field 3 (third converted connector) as for d056
PNU=422 Hex; Type=V2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [19.4]
d060 TeCntr ActValue (for F1240) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Technology controller: [%]
Display of actual value (summation value) selected in H330
PNU=424 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.1 %; Block diag.: [21.2]
d061 TeCntr Setpoint (for F1240) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Technology controller: [%]
Display of setpoint (summation value) selected in H334
PNU=425 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.1 %; Block diag.: [21.2]
d062 TeCntr P-GainFac (for F1240) 0.00 to 30.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Technology controller:
Display of effective P-gain factor
PNU=426 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01; Block diag.: [21.3]
d063 TeCntr Output (for F1240) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Technology controller: [%]
Display of technology controller output
PNU=427 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.1 %; Block diag.: [21.8]
d065 ComfRFG Input (for F1010) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Comfort ramp-function generator: [%]
Display of ramp-function generator input
PNU=429 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.1 %; Block diag.: [22.3]
d066 ComfRFG Output (for F1010) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Comfort ramp-function generator: [%]
Display of ramp-function generator output
PNU=42A Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.1 %; Block diag.: [22.5]
d067 MotorPot. Output (for F670) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Motorized potentiometer: [%]
Display of motorized potentiometer setpoint
PNU=42B Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.1 %; Block diag.: [23.8]
d068 WobbleGen. Outpt (for F1020) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Wobble generator: [%]
Display of wobbler signal
PNU=42C Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.1 %; Block diag.: [24.7]
d070 MULDIV1 Output (for F740) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
High-resolution multiplier/divider 1: Display of result [%]
PNU=42E Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.1 %; Block diag.: [26.5]
d071 MULDIV2 Output (for F910) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
High-resolution multiplier/divider 2: Display of result [%]
PNU=42F Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.1 %; Block diag.: [26.7]

4-12 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
d072 MULDIV3 Output (for F1150) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
High-resolution multiplier/divider 3: Display of result [%]
PNU=430 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.1 %; Block diag.: [26.5]
d075 n>v_Calc Input (for B50) -100.0 to 100.0 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Speed/velocity calculator: [%]
Display of actual speed selected in H690
PNU=433 Hex; Type=I2; Norm.: 1==0.1% of n_rated Block diag.: [31.3]
d076 n>v_Calc Output (for B50) -32.768 to 32.767 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Speed/velocity calculator: Display of actual velocity [m/s]
PNU=434 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.001 m/s; Block diag.: [31.7]
d077 v>n_Calc Input (for F1230) -32.768 to 32.767 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Velocity/speed calculator: [m/s]
Display of setpoint velocity selected in H691
PNU=435 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.001 m/s; Block diag.: [31.3]
d078 v>n_Calc Output (for F1230) -200.0 to 199.9 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Velocity/speed calculator: Display of setpoint speed [%]
PNU=436 Hex; Type=I2; Norm.: 1==0.1% of n_rated Block diag.: [31.7]
d080 ActiveParSet (for F200) 1 to 4 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Parameter set switchover: Display of currently active parameter set
PNU=438 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [36.1]
d096 Int.Fact.Disp6 0 to 65535 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=448 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1
d097 Int.Fact.Disp7 Ind: 16 1/UHABR
PNU=449 Hex; Type=L2
d098 Int.Fact.Disp8 0 to 100 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
PNU=44A Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1% [%]
d099 Int.Fact.Disp9 Ind: 28 1/UHABR
PNU=44B Hex; Type=L2

Analog Inputs (F10 to F50) See also Chapter 3.3

Analog input terminal 50 (terminal 50, 51) F10
H100 AE50 SignalType 0 to 2 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of analog input mode (signal type) FS=0 1/UHAB

0 = Voltage input 0 to ±10 V +/- 10V

1 = Current input 0 to 20 mA 0 .. 20 mA
2 = Current input 4 to 20 mA 4 .. 20 mA

PNU=44C Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [2.2]

H101 AE50 Normaliz._% -1000 to 1000 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Specification of %-value which is to represent an input voltage of 10 V or [%] FS=100 1/UHABR
an input current of 20 mA at the analog input

The following generally applies:

For voltage input:

H101[%] = 10V * Y / X X .... Input voltage in volts

Y .... %-value which represents the input
voltage X
For current input:

H101[%] = 20mA * Y / X X .... Input current in mA

Y .... %-value which represents the input
current X

PNU=44D Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==1 %; Block diag.: [2.4]

H102 AE50 Offset_% -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Additive value for analog input [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=44E Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [2.4]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-13

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H103 AE50 Sign/Abs 0 to 3 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of signal injection mode at analog input FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Signal injection according to sign y= Signal

1= Injection of absolute value of signal y= |Signal|
2= Signed signal injection, inverted y= -Signal
3= Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted y=-|Signal|

PNU=44F Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [2.5]

H104 AE50 B_SignRev 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of control bit for sign reversal at analog input FS=0 1/UHAB

0= No sign reversal
1= Sign reversal
2= No sign reversal
3= Sign reversal controlled by B003 (”1” = sign reversal)
4= Sign reversal controlled by B004 (”1” = sign reversal)
etc.

PNU=450 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [2.6]

H105 AE50 FiltTime_ms 0 to 10000 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Filter time for analog input [ms] FS=0 1/UHABR
(a hardware filtering operation of approx. 1 ms must be added)
PNU=451 Hex; Type=O2. Normalization: 1==1 ms; Block diag.: [2.7]
H106 AE50 B_Enabling 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Enabling of analog input FS=1 1/UHAB

0= Input not enabled

1= Input enabled at all times
2= Input not enabled
3= Enabling of input controlled by B003 (”1” = enabled)
4= Enabling of input controlled by B004 (”1” = enabled)
etc.

PNU=452 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [2.7]

Analog input terminal 52 (terminal 52, 53) F20

H110 AE52 SignalType as for H100 0 to 2 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=456 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [2.2] FS=0 1/UHAB

H111 AE52 Normaliz._% as for H101 -1000 to 1000 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=457 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==1 %; Block diag.: [2.4] [%] FS=100 1/UHABR
H112 AE52 Offset_% as for H102 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=458 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [2.4] [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H113 AE52 Sign/Abs as for H103 0 to 3 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=459 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [2.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

H114 AE52 B_SignRev as for H104 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=45A Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [2.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

H115 AE52 FiltTime_ms as for H105 0 to 10000 Ind: None 1/UHABR

PNU=45B Hex; Type=O2. Normalization: 1==1 ms; Block diag.: [2.7] [ms] FS=0 1/UHABR
H116 AE52 B_Enabling as for H106 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=45C Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [2.7] FS=1 1/UHAB

Analog input 54 (terminal 54, 55) F30

H120 AE54 SignalType as for H100 0 to 2 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=460 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [3.2] FS=0 1/UHAB

H121 AE54 Normaliz._% as for H101 -1000 to 1000 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=461 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==1 %; Block diag.: [3.4] [%] FS=100 1/UHABR
H122 AE54 Offset_% as for H102 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=462 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [3.4] [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR

4-14 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H123 AE54 Sign/Abs as for H103 0 to 3 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=463 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [3.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

H124 AE54 B_SignRev as for H104 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=464 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [3.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

H125 AE54 FiltTime_ms as for H105 0 to 10000 Ind: None 1/UHABR

PNU=465 Hex; Type=O2. Normalization: 1==1 ms; Block diag.: [3.7] [ms] FS=0 1/UHABR
H126 AE54 B_Enabling as for H106 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=466 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [3.7] FS=1 1/UHAB

Analog input terminal 56 (terminal 56, 57) F40

H130 AE56 SignalType as for H100 0 to 2 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=46A Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [3.2] FS=0 1/UHAB

H131 AE56 Normaliz._% as for H101 -1000 to 1000 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=46B Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==1 %; Block diag.: [3.4] [%] FS=100 1/UHABR
H132 AE56 Offset_% as for H102 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=46C Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [3.4] [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H133 AE56 Sign/Abs as for H103 0 to 3 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=46D Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [3.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

H134 AE56 B_SignRev as for H104 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=46E Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [3.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

H135 AE56 FiltTime_ms as for H105 0 to 10000 Ind: None 1/UHABR

PNU=46F Hex; Type=O2. Normalization: 1==1 ms; Block diag.: [3.7] [ms] FS=0 1/UHABR
H136 AE56 B_Enabling as for H106 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=470 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [3.7] FS=1 1/UHAB

Analog input terminal 58 (terminal 58, 59) F50

H140 AE58 SignalType as for H100 0 to 2 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=474 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [3.2] FS=0 1/UHAB

H141 AE58 Normaliz._% as for H101 -1000 to 1000 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=475 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==1 %; Block diag.: [3.4] [%] FS=100 1/UHABR
H142 AE58 Offset_% as for H102 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=476 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [3.4] [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H143 AE58 Sign/Abs as for H103 0 to 3 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=477 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [3.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

H144 AE58 B_SignRev as for H104 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=478 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [3.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

H145 AE58 FiltTime_ms as for H105 0 to 10000 Ind: None 1/UHABR

PNU=479 Hex; Type=O2. Normalization: 1==1 ms; Block diag.: [3.7] [ms] FS=0 1/UHABR
H146 AE58 B_Enabling as for H106 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=47A Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [3.7] FS=1 1/UHAB

Analog outputs (F1690, F1700) See also Chapter 3.4

Analog output terminal 61 (terminal 61, 62) F1690

H150 AA61 C_OutpValue 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector value to be output at the analog output FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=47E Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [4.1]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-15

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H151 AA61 Sign/Abs 0 to 3 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of signal injection mode at analog output FS=0 1/UHAB

0 = Signal injection according to sign y= Signal

1 = Injection of absolute value of signal y= |Signal|
2 = Signed signal injection, inverted y= -Signal
3 = Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted y=-|Signal|

PNU=47F Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [4.2]

H152 AA61 FiltTime_ms 0 to 10000 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Filter time for the analog output [ms] FS=0 1/UHABR

PNU=480 Hex; Type=O2. Normalization: 1==1 ms; Block diag.: [4.3]

H153 AA61 Normaliz._V -200.00 to 200.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Normalization of analog output [V] FS=10.00 1/UHABR

y[V] = x * H153 / 100%

x = Normalization input (corresponds to filter output)

y = Normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at
analog output with an offset of 0 and circuit as voltage output)

PNU=481 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 V; Block diag.: [4.4]

H154 AA61 Offset _V -10.00 to 10.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Additive value for analog output [V] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=482 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 V; Block diag.: [4.5]
H155 AA61 SignalType 0 to 2 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of analog output mode (signal type) FS=0 1/UHAB

0 = Voltage output 0 to ±10 V

1 = Current output 0 to 20 mA
2 = Current output 4 to 20 mA

PNU=483 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [4.5]

Analog output terminal 63 (terminal 63, 64) F1700

H160 AA63 C_OutpValue as for H150 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=488 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [4.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

H161 AA63 Sign/Abs as for H151 0 to 3 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=489 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [4.2] FS=0 1/UHAB

H162 AA63 FiltTime_ms as for H152 0 to 10000 Ind: None 1/UHABR

PNU=48A Hex; Type=O2. Normalization: 1==1 ms; Block diag.: [4.3] [ms] FS=0 1/UHABR
H163 AA63 Normaliz._V as for H153 -200.00 to 200.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=48B Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 V; Block diag.: [4.4] [V] FS=10.00 1/UHABR
H164 AA63 Offset _V as for H154 -10.00 to 10.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=48C Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 V; Block diag.: [4.5] [V] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H165 AA63 SignalType as for H155 0 to 2 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=48D Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [4.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

4-16 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)

Binary inputs (F60 to F130)

Binary input terminal 77 F60
Function: Depending on the state of terminal 77, either the signal determined by H170 or the value from H171 is applied to connector
K010.
H170 BE77=1 C_SetVal. 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of signal to be applied to connector when terminal state = 1 FS=0 1/UHAB

0 = Fixed value 0
1 = Fixed value 100 %
2 = Fixed value 0
3 = Connector K003
4 = Connector K004
etc.

PNU=492 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [5.5]

H171 BE77=0 SetVal -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Value which is applied to connector when terminal state = 0 [%] FS=0.00 1/UHAB

PNU=493 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01%; Block diag.: [5.6]

Binary input terminal 78 F70

Function: Depending on the state of terminal 78, either the signal determined by H172 or the value from H173 is applied to connector
K011.
H172 BE78=1 C_SetVal. as for H170 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=494 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [5.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

H173 BE78=0 SetVal as for H171 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=495 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01%; Block diag.: [5.6] [%] FS=0.00 1/UHAB

Binary input terminal 79 F80

Function: Depending on the state of terminal 79, either the signal determined by H174 or the value from H175 is applied to connector
K012.
H174 BE79=1 C_SetVal. as for H170 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=496 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [5.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

H175 BE79=0 SetVal. as for H171 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=497 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01%; Block diag.: [5.6] [%] FS=0.00 1/UHAB

Binary input terminal 80 F90

Function: Depending on the state of terminal 80, either the signal determined by H176 or the value from H177 is applied to connector
K013.
H176 BE80=1 C_SetVal. as for H170 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=498 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [5.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

H177 BE80=0 SetVal. as for H171 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=499 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01%; Block diag.: [5.6] [%] FS=0.00 1/UHAB

Binary input terminal 81 F100

Function: Depending on the state of terminal 81, either the signal determined by H178 or the value from H179 is applied to connector
K014.
H178 BE81=1 C_SetVal. as for H170 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=49A Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [6.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

H179 BE81=0 SetVal. as for H171 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=49B Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01%; Block diag.: [6.6] [%] FS=0.00 1/UHAB

Binary input terminal 82 F110

Function: Depending on the state of terminal 82, either the signal determined by H180 or the value from H181 is applied to connector
K015.
H180 BE82=1 C_SetVal. as for H170 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=49C Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [6.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-17

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H181 BE82=0 SetVal. as for H171 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=49D Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01%; Block diag.: [6.6] [%] FS=0.00 1/UHAB

Binary input terminal 83 F120

Function: Depending on the state of terminal 83, either the signal determined by H182 or the value from H183 is applied to connector
K016.
H182 BE83=1 C_SetVal. as for H170 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=49E Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [6.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

H183 BE83=0 SetVal. as for H171 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=49F Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01%; Block diag.: [6.6] [%] FS=0.00 1/UHAB

Binary input terminal 84 F130

Function: Depending on the state of terminal 84, either the signal determined by H184 or the value from H185 is applied to connector
K017.
H184 BE84=1 C_SetVal. as for H170 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4A0 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [6.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

H185 BE84=0 SetVal. as for H171 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4A1 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01%; Block diag.: [6.6] [%] FS=0.00 1/UHAB

Binary outputs (F1710 to F1750)

Binary output terminal 87 F1710
H190 BA87SourceBinect 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to be applied to the terminal FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=4A6 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [7.1]

H191 BA87 ONDelay_s (ON delay) 0.00 to 300.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Delay in signal applied to terminal on transition from log. "0" to log. "1" [s] FS=0.00 1/UHAB
(transition from log. "1" to log. "0" is instantaneous)
Owing to the ON delay, a positive edge is switched through only if the
signal level has remained continuously at "1" for the period of time
parameterized in H191. If a negative input edge occurs during this period,
the ON delay timer is restarted (re-triggered).
PNU=4A7 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==0.01s; Block diag.: [7.2]
H192 BA87 Inversion (inversion) 0 to 1 Ind: None 1/UHABR
FS=0 1/UHABR
0 = No inversion of binary output y= Q
1 = Inversion of binary output y= /Q

PNU=4A8 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [7.3]

Binary output terminal 88 F1720

H193 BA88SourceBinect as for H190 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4A9 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [7.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

H194 BA88 ONDelay_s as for H191 0.00 to 300.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4AA Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==0.01s; Block diag.: [7.2] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHAB

H195 BA88 Inversion as for H192 0 to 1 Ind: None 1/UHABR

PNU=4AB Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [7.3] FS=0 1/UHABR

Binary output terminal 89 F1730

H196 BA89SourceBinect as for H190 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4AC Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [7.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

4-18 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H197 BA89 ONDelay_s as for H191 0.00 to 300.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4AD Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==0.01s; Block diag.: [7.2] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHAB

H198 BA89 Inversion as for H192 0 to 1 Ind: None 1/UHABR

PNU=4AE Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [7.3] FS=0 1/UHABR

Binary output terminal 90 F1740

H199 BA90SourceBinect as for H190 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4AF Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [7.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

H200 BA90 ONDelay_s as for H191 0.00 to 300.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4B0 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==0.01s; Block diag.: [7.2] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHAB

H201 BA90 Inversion as for H192 0 to 1 Ind: None 1/UHABR

PNU=4B1 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [7.3] FS=0 1/UHABR

Binary output terminal 91 F1750

H202 BA91SourceBinect as for H190 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4B2 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [7.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

H203 BA91 ONDelay_s as for H191 0.00 to 300.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4B3 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==0.01s; Block diag.: [7.2] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHAB

H204 BA91 Inversion as for H192 0 to 1 Ind: None 1/UHABR

PNU=4B4 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [7.3] FS=0 1/UHABR

Fixed setpoints (B160, F210 to F340)

Function: The value set in the parameter is applied to the specified connector.
Four different datasets for these parameters can be selected by means of the parameter set switchover function.

Note: In software version 1.0 the parameters H210 to H223 were acknowledgement parameters.

H210 K020 FixedSetpnt (F210) -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 1/UHABR

is applied to K020 [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=4BA Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [8.1]
H211 K021 FixedSetpnt (F220) -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
is applied to K021 [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=4BB Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [8.1]
H212 K022 FixedSetpnt (F230) -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
is applied to K022 [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=4BC Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [8.1]
H213 K023 FixedSetpnt (F240) -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
is applied to K023 [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=4BD Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [8.1]
H214 K024 FixedSetpnt (F250) -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
is applied to K024 [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=4BE Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [8.1]
H215 K025 FixedSetpnt (F260) -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
is applied to K025 [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=4BF Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [8.1]
H216 K026 FixedSetpnt (F270) -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
is applied to K026 [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=4C0 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [8.1]
H217 K027 FixedSetpnt (F280) -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
is applied to K027 [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=4C1 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [8.1]
H218 K028 FixedSetpnt (F290) -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
is applied to K028 [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=4C2 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [8.1]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-19

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H219 K029 FixedSetpnt (F300) -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
is applied to K029 [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=4C3 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [8.1]
H220 K030 FixedSetpnt (F310) -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
is applied to K030 [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=4C4 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [8.1]
H221 K031 FixedSetpnt (F320) -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
is applied to K031 [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=4C5 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [8.1]
H222 K032 FixedSetpnt (F330) -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
is applied to K032 [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=4C6 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [8.1]
H223 K033 FixedSetpnt (F340) -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
is applied to K033 [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=4C7 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [8.1]
H224 K177 FixedSetpnt (starting with software version 1.1) (B160) -32768 bis +32767 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
is applied to K177 FS=0 1/UHABR
PNU=4C8 Hex; Typ=I2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [8.3]

Fixed control bits (F350 to F400)

Function: The value set in the parameter is applied to the specified binector.
Four different datasets for these parameters can be selected by means of the parameter set switchover function

H230 B024 Fixed Bit (F350) 0 to 1 Ind: 4 1/UHABR

is applied to B024 FS=0 1/UHABR
PNU=4CE Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [8.2]
H231 B025 Fixed Bit (F360) 0 to 1 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
is applied to B025 FS=0 1/UHABR
PNU=4CF Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [8.2]
H232 B026 Fixed Bit (F370) 0 to 1 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
is applied to B026 FS=0 1/UHABR
PNU=4D0 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [8.2]
H233 B027 Fixed Bit (F380) 0 to 1 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
is applied to B027 FS=0 1/UHABR
PNU=4D1 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [8.2]
H234 B028 Fixed Bit (F390) 0 to 1 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
is applied to B028 FS=0 1/UHABR
PNU=4D2 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [8.2]
H235 B029 Fixed Bit (F400) 0 to 1 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
is applied to B029 FS=0 1/UHABR
PNU=4D3 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [8.2]

Connector displays (B60 to B105)

Note: In software version 1.2 and earlier, H240 to H245 are "offline parameters", i.e. they cannot be changed in the "R" state.
Connector display 1 B60
Function: The connector selected in the parameter is output in display parameter d020.
H240 d020 C_Display 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be output in display parameter FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=4D8 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [8.4]

4-20 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
Connector display 2 B70
Function: The connector selected in the parameter is output in display parameter d021.
H241 d021 C_Display as for H240 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4D9 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [8.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

Connector display 3 B80

Function: The connector selected in the parameter is output in display parameter d022.
H242 d022 C_Display as for H240 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4DA Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [8.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

Connector display 4 B90

Function: The connector selected in the parameter is output in display parameter d023.
H243 d023 C_Display as for H240 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4DB Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [8.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

Connector display 5 B100

Function: The connector selected in the parameter is output in display parameter d024.
H244 d024 C_Display as for H240 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4DC Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [8.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

High-resolution connector display B105

Function: The connector selected in the parameter is filtered with τ ≈ 300ms and output in display parameter d025.
H245 d025 C_Display as for H240 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4DE Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [8.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

Binector displays (B110 to B140)

Note: In software version 1.2 and earlier, H250 to H253 are "offline parameters", i.e. they cannot be changed in the "R" state.
Binector display 1 B110
Function: The binector selected in the parameter is output in display parameter d026.
H250 d026 B_Display 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to be output in display parameter FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=4E2 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [8.5]

Binector display 2 B120

Function: The binector selected in the parameter is output in display parameter d027.
H251 d027 B_Display as for H250 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4E3 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [8.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

Binector display 3 B130

Function: The binector selected in the parameter is output in display parameter d028.
H252 d028 B_Display as for H250 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4E4 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [8.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

Binector display 4 B140

Function: The binector selected in the parameter is output in display parameter d029.
H253 d029 B_Display as for H250 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4E5 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [8.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-21

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)

Triggering of fault messages (F1590 to F1620)

Function: When the binector selected in the parameter assumes the log. "1" state, it triggers the specified fault message in the basic
unit. The drive is automatically shut down (function as for "OFF1 = electrical OFF") and the fault bit (bit 3) in basic unit status
word is set. The drive cannot restart after a fault message has been triggered unless
1. the fault has been eliminated (binector word=0)
2. the fault has been acknowledged and
3. a 0 → 1 edge transition of the OFF1 command from the basic unit has been detected.
H260 F120 B_FaultTrig (F1590) 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector which triggers fault message in log. "1" state FS=0 1/UHAB

0= 0 (no fault message)

1= 1 (continuous fault message)
2= 0 (no fault message)
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=4EC Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [8.7]

H261 F121 B_FaultTrig as for H260 (F1600) 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4ED Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [8.7] FS=0 1/UHAB

H262 F122 B_FaultTrig as for H260 (F1610) 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4EE Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [8.7] FS=0 1/UHAB

H263 F123 B_FaultTrig as for H260 (F1620) 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4EF Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [8.7] FS=0 1/UHAB

Triggering of alarm messages (B10 to B40)

Function: When the binector selected in the parameter assumes the log. "1" state, it triggers the specified alarm in the basic unit.
The drive is not shut down automatically, but an alarm message (e.g. "A100") is output on the basic unit and the alarm bit (bit
7) in basic unit status word is set. The alarm is reset automatically if the parameterized binector assumes the log. "0" state
again.
H264 A100 B_AlarmTrig (B10) 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector which triggers an alarm in log. "1" state FS=0 1/UHAB

0= 0 (no alarm message)

1= 1 (continuous alarm message)
2= 0 (no alarm message)
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=4F0 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [9.2]

H265 A101 B_AlarmTrig as for H264 (B20) 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4F1 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [9.2] FS=0 1/UHAB

H266 A102 B_AlarmTrig as for H264 (B30) 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4F2 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [9.2] FS=0 1/UHAB

H267 A103 B_AlarmTrig as for H264 (B40) 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=4F3 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [9.2] FS=0 1/UHAB

4-22 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)

Process data exchange with the basic unit (F170, F1660, F180, F1670, B150)
See also Chapter 3.8
(F180 is the display of actual values from the basic unit - see display parameters)
Status bits from basic unit (status words 1 and 2) F170
Control bits to basic unit (control words 1 and 2) F1660
H270 BU C_CntrWord1 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be applied to control word 1 to the basic unit FS=2 1/UHAB
(word 1 in CB / TB dual port RAM)

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Bit-serial input via H272
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=4F6 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [11.3]

H271 BU C_CntrWord2 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be applied to control word 2 to the basic unit FS=2 1/UHAB
(word 1 in CB / TB dual port RAM)

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Bit-serial input via H272
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=4F7 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [12.3]

H272 BU B_CntrWords 0 to 200 Ind: 32 1/UHABR
* Selection of binectors for bit-serial input of control words 1 and 2 to FS=0 1/UHAB
basic unit (effective only when H270 / H271 = 2)

i01: Selection of binector for bit 0 of control word 1

i02: Selection of binector for bit 1 of control word 1
...
i16: Selection of binector for bit 15 of control word 1

i17: Selection of binector for bit 16 of control word 2

i18: Selection of binector for bit 17 of control word 2
...
i32: Selection of binector for bit 31 of control word 2

Settings:
0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=4F8 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [11.3.12.3]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-23

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
Setpoints to basic unit F1670
Function: The connectors to be used as setpoints are selected in H275 (setpoints 1 to 8) and output in display parameter d032
(setpoints 1 to 7). Setpoint 8 is a P-gain adaptation factor for the speed controller. The characteristic can be set by means of
H276 and H279. Setpoint 8 is output in display parameter d033.
H275 BU C_Setpoints 0 to 180 Ind: 8 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector which must be injected as the appropriate setpoint FS=0 1/UHAB

i01: Select setpoint 1 (CB / TB word 2)

i02: Select setpoint 2 (CB / TB word 3)
i03: Select setpoint 3 (CB / TB word 5)
...
i08: Select setpoint 8 (CB / TB word 10)

Settings:
0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=4FB Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [10.4]

H276 BU PGainAdapt_x1 0.00 to 200.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
P-gain adaptation characteristic for speed controller, threshold 1 [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=4FC Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.:
[10.4]
H277 BU PGainAdapt_x2 0.00 to 200.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
P-gain adaptation characteristic for speed controller, threshold 2 [%] FS=100.00 1/UHABR
PNU=4FD Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.:
[10.5]
H278 BU PGainAdapt_y1 0.00 to 19.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
P-gain adaptation characteristic for speed controller FS=1.00 1/UHABR
Minimum value of y (P-gain factor) when x ≤ x1
PNU=4FE Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01; Block diag.: [10.4]
H279 BU PGainAdapt_y2 0.00 to 19.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
P-gain adaptation characteristic for speed controller FS=1.00 1/UHABR
Maximum value of y (P-gain factor) when x ≥ x2
PNU=4FF Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01; Block diag.: [10.4]

Dynamic reading and writing of basic unit parameters

B150
Notes: Only the HIGH word is evaluated in double-word parameters
Parameters in the basic unit are altered only in the RAM, but not in the EEPROM (refresh time approx. 250 ms)
The dynamic parameter transfer function can be deactivated by setting H282 = 0
H282 BU Param. No 0 to 999 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of number of parameter in basic unit to be read or written FS=0 1/UHAB
PNU=502 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [15.3]
H283 BU Param. Index 0 to 116 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of index of parameter selected in H282 FS=0 1/UHAB
PNU=503 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [15.4]

4-24 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H284 BU C_Param.Write 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector value to be written to parameter selected in H282 FS=0 1/UHAB
and H283
Switchover between read and write

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Read selected parameter
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=504 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [15.2]

Data exchange via the USS interface (F160, F1770) See also Chapter 3.5
(F160 is the display of the data received via the USS interface - see display parameters)

Parameters for the USS interface

H290 Switch On USS 0 to 1 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* FS=0 1/UHAB
0 = USS interface OFF USS OFF
1 = USS interface ON USS ON

PNU=50A Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [16.1]

H291 USS MonitTime_s (message monitoring time) 0.000 to 65.000 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* [s] FS=0.000 1/UHAB
0.000 = No time monitoring of messages
In the event of failure of the USS interface, the
drive continues to operate with the old setpoints
and control commands

0.001 ... 65.000 = Time which may elapse between the receipt of two
error-free messages addressed to the unit before
the time monitor responds.

When the time monitor responds, binector B197 is set to the log. "1" state.
A log. "1" pulse, which is 1s long, is triggered on binector B198.

Triggering of fault messages:

The circuit suggestion on sheet 16 of the block diagram shows the
monitoring function connected such that it activates fault F117 in the basic
unit. With a setting of H297=197 (= factory setting), binector B197 - and
thus continuous log. "1" in the event of a fault - is applied to the fault
trigger in the basic unit (F117).

With a setting of H297=198, binector B198 is connected to the fault trigger

in the basic unit (F117). When the monitor responds, therefore, the fault-
trigger signal is set to "1" for only 1 s. This setting ensures that the basic
unit can continue operation in "manual mode" after appropriate
acknowledgement of the fault even if the fault message remains active
continuously.

Note:
The message monitoring function is active
- from receipt of the first error-free message after connection of the
electronics power
- from receipt of the first error-free message after the message monitor
has responded (owing to timeout)

PNU=50B Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.001s; Block diag.: [16.1]

H292 USS SlaveAddress 0 to 31 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Address via which the board can be addressed in USS bus mode. FS=0 1/UHAB
PNU=50C Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [16.1]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-25

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H293 USS Baud Rate 1 to 13 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* FS=6 1/UHAB
1 = 300 baud
2 = 600 baud
3 = 1200 baud
4 = 2400 baud
5 = 4800 baud
6 = 9600 baud
7 = 19200 baud
8 = 38400 baud
9 = 57600 baud
10 = 76800 baud
11 = 93750 baud
12 = 115200 baud
13 = 187500 baud

PNU=50D Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [16.1]

H294 USS ProcDataDisp 0 to 10 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* FS=2 1/UHAB
0= No process data are expected or transmitted in the 0 Proc.Dat.
USS protocol 1 Proc.Dat.
1 to 10 = Number of process data words in USS protocol ...
(receive and transmit data words are equal in length) 10 ProcDat.

PNU=50E Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [16.1]

H295 USS ParamDatDisp 0 to 127 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Number of words (16 bits) of PKW section in message net data block. FS=127 1/UHAB

0 = No PKW share in message

3. 4 = PKW share is 3 (PKE, ind, PWE), 4 words long
127 = Variable PKW length for transmission of parameter
description and texts.

PNU=50F Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [16.1]

Transmit data F1770

H296 USS C_TransmData 0 to 180 Ind: 10 1/UHABR
* Selection of connectors to be transferred as transmit data via the USS FS=0 1/UHAB
interface to the USS master

i01: Selection for word 1

i02: Selection for word 2
...
i10: Selection for word 10

Settings:
0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=510 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [16.5]

4-26 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H297 F117 B_FaultTrig 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector which triggers the fault message in log. "1" state FS=197 1/UHAB

0= 0 (no fault message)

1= 1 (continuous fault message)
2= 0 (no fault message)
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

See also description for parameter H291 (fault-message triggering)

PNU=511 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [16.5]

Data exchange via the peer-to-peer connection (F150, F1760) See also Chapter 3.6
(F150 = Display of data received via the peer-to-peer connection - see display parameters)
Parameters for COM BOARD
H300 Switch On Peer 0 to 2 Ind: None 1/UHABR
FS=0 1/UHABR
0 = Peer OFF Peer OFF
1 = Peer ON Peer ON
2 = For factory test purposes Factory

PNU=514 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [17.1]

H301 Peer MonitTime_s (message monitoring time) 0.000 to 65.000 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* [s] FS=0.000 1/UHAB
0.000 = No time monitoring of messages

0.001 ... 65.000 = Time which may elapse between the receipt of two
error-free messages addressed to the unit before
the time monitor responds.

When the time monitor responds, binector B199 is set to the log. "1" state.
A log. "1" pulse, which is 1s longer, is triggered on binector B200.

Triggering of fault messages:

The circuit suggestion on sheet 17 of the block diagram shows the
monitoring function connected such that it activates fault F118 in the basic
unit. With a setting of H305 = 199 (= factory setting), binector B199 - and
thus continuous log. "1" in the event of a fault - is applied to the fault
trigger in the basic unit (F118).
With a setting of H305=200, binector B200 is connected to the fault trigger
in the basic unit (F118). When the monitor responds, therefore, the fault-
trigger signal is set to "1" for only 1 s. This setting ensures that the basic
unit can continue operation in "manual mode" after appropriate
acknowledgement of the fault even if the fault message remains active
continuously.

Note:
The message monitoring function is active
- from receipt of the first error-free message after connection of the
electronics power
- from receipt of the first error-free message after the message monitor
has responded (owing to timeout)

PNU=515 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.001s; Block diag.: [17.1]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-27

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H302 Peer Baud Rate 1 to 13 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* FS=13 1/UHAB
1 = 300 baud
2 = 600 baud
3 = 1200 baud
4 = 2400 baud
5 = 4800 baud
6 = 9600 baud
7 = 19200 baud
8 = 38400 baud
9 = 57600 baud
10 = 76800 baud
11 = 93750 baud
12 = 115200 baud
13 = 187500 baud

PNU=516 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [17.1]

H303 Peer MessLength 1 to 5 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of message length FS=1 1/UHAB
PNU=517 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [17.1] (1/UHABR)

Transmit data F1760

H304 Peer C_TransmData 0 to 180 Ind: 5 1/UHABR
* Selection of connectors to be transferred as transmit data via the peer-to- FS=0 1/UHAB
peer connection

i01: Selection for word 1

i02: Selection for word 2
...
i05: Selection for word 5

Settings:
0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=518 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [17.5]

H305 F118 B_FaultTrig 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* Selection of binector which triggers the fault message in log. "1" state FS=199 1/UHAB

0= 0 (no fault message)

1= 1 (continuous fault message)
2= 0 (no fault message)
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

See also description for parameter H301 (fault-message triggering)

PNU=519 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [17.5]

4-28 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)

Process data exchange with the COM BOARD (CBx or SCBx) (F190, F1680)
See also Chapter 3.7
(F190 = Display of data received via the COM BOARD - see display parameters)
Parameters for COM BOARD
Other settings: COM BOARD configuration in P696 to P705
Slave address P918
H310 CB/SCB MonTime_s (message monitoring time) 0.000 to 65.000 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* [s] FS=0.000 1/UHAB
0.000 = No time monitoring of messages
0.001 ... 65.000 = Time which may elapse between the receipt of two
error-free messages addressed to the unit before
the time monitor responds.

When the time monitor responds, binector B195 is set to the log. "1" state.
A log. "1" pulse, which is 1s longer, is triggered on binector B196.

Triggering of fault messages:

The circuit suggestion on sheet 18 of the block diagram shows the
monitoring function connected such that it activates fault F116 in the basic
unit. With a setting of H312=195 (= factory setting), binector B195 - and
thus continuous log. "1" in the event of a fault - is applied to the fault
trigger in the basic unit (F116).
With a setting of H312=196, binector B196 is connected to the fault trigger
in the basic unit (F116). When the monitor responds, therefore, the fault-
trigger signal is set to "1" for only 1 s. This setting ensures that the basic
unit can continue operation in "manual mode" after appropriate
acknowledgement of the fault even if the fault message remains active
continuously.

Note:
The message monitoring function is active
- from receipt of the first error-free message after connection of the
electronics power
- from receipt of the first error-free message after the message monitor
has responded (owing to timeout)

PNU=51E Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.001s; Block diag.: [18.1]

Transmit data F1680

H311 CB/SCB C_TrnsDat 0 to 180 Ind: 10 1/UHABR
* Selection of connectors to be transferred as transmit data via the COM FS=0 1/UHAB
BOARD

i01: Selection for word 1

i02: Selection for word 2
...
i10: Selection for word 10

Settings:
0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=51F Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [18.5]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-29

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H312 F116 B_FaultTrig 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector which triggers the fault message in log. "1" state FS=195 1/UHAB

0= 0 (no fault message)

1= 1 (continuous fault message)
2= 0 (no fault message)
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

See also description for parameter H310 (fault-message triggering)

PNU=520 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [18.5]

Connector/binector converters (F410 to F430)

H320 Con>Bin C_Select 0 to 180 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* Selection of connectors to be converted to binectors FS=0 1/UHAB

i01: 1st connector

is applied to B064 (bit 0) to B079 (bit15)
i02: 2nd connector
is applied to B080 (bit 0) to B095 (bit15)
i03: 3rd connector
is applied to B096 (bit 0) to B111 (bit15)

Settings:
0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=528 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [19.1]

Binector/connector converters (F1630 to F1650)

Binector/connector converter 1 F1630
Function: The binectors selected via the control word (indices 1 to 16) are applied to connector K072
H324 Bin>Con1 B-Selec 0 to 200 Ind: 16 1/UHABR
* Selection of binectors to be converted to a connector FS=0 1/UHAB

i01: 1st binector

is applied to the connector as bit 0
i02: 2nd binector
is applied to the connector as bit 1
...
i16: 16th binector
is applied to the connector as bit 15

Settings:
0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=52C Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [20.1]

Binector/connector converter 2 F1640

Function: The binectors selected via the control word (indices 1 to 16) are applied to connector K073
H325 Bin>Con2 B-Selec as for H324 0 to 200 Ind: 16 1/UHABR
* PNU=52D Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [20.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

4-30 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
Binector/connector converter 3 F1650
Function: The binectors selected via the control word (indices 1 to 16) are applied to connector K074
H326 Bin>Con3 B-Selec as for H324 0 to 200 Ind: 16 1/UHABR
* PNU=52E Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [20.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

Technology controller (F1240) See also Chapter 3.12

Actual value
Note: Four different datasets for parameters H331 to H333 can be selected by means of the parameter set switchover function
H330 TeCntr C_ActVal 0 to 180 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
* Selection of connectors to be injected as additive actual values FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100%
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=532 Hex; Type=02; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [21.1]

H331 TeCntr ActFilt_s 0.00 to 600.00 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Setting of filter time for technology controller actual value [s] FS=0.00 1/UHABR

PNU=533 Hex; Type=02; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [21.2]

H332 TeCntr R-Time_s 0.000 to 30.000 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
* Setting of rate time for technology controller actual value (D component) [s] FS=0.000 1/UHAB
0.000 = D component inactive

PNU=534 Hex; Type=02; Normalization: 1==0.001s; Block diag.: [21.4]

H333 TeCntr R-T*1000 0 to 1 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Selection of rate time factor FS=0 1/UHABR

0 Parameter H332 is multiplied by a factor of 1 Value∗1

1 Parameter H332 is multiplied by a factor of 1000 Value∗1000

PNU=535 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [21.4]

Setpoint
Note: Four different datasets for parameters H335 to H337 can be selected by means of the parameter set switchover function
H334 TeCntr C_Setpnt 0 to 180 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
* Selection of connectors to be injected as additive setpoints FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100%
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=536 Hex; Type=02; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [21.1]

H335 TeCntr C SuppSet -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
* Setting of supplementary setpoint for technology controller to be applied [%] FS=0.00 1/UHAB
via a binector

PNU=537 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [21.1]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-31

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H336 TeCntr B_SuppSet 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to control application of supplementary setpoint FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0 (supplementary setpoint not applied)

1= Fixed value 1 (supplementary setpoint continuously applied)
2= Fixed value 0 (supplementary setpoint not applied)
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=538 Hex; Type=02; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [21.1]

H337 TeCntr SetFilt_s 0.00 to 600.00 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Setting of filter time for technology controller setpoint [s] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=539 Hex; Type=02; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [21.2]

Control parameters
Note: Four different datasets for parameters H338 and H340 to H345 can be selected by means of the parameter set switchover function
H338 TeCntr PGain 0.10 to 200.00 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Setting of P-gain of technology controller FS=3.00 1/UHABR
PNU=53A Hex; Type=02; Normalization: 1==0.01; Block diag.: [21.5]
H339 TeCntr C_PGnAdpt 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be applied as the input quantity (P-gain factor) FS=0 1/UHAB
for the purpose of P-gain adaptation

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=53B Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [21.1]

H340 TeCntr PGadpt_x1 0.00 to 200.00 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
P-gain adaptation characteristic for technology controller - threshold 1 [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=53C Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [21.2]
H341 TeCntr PGadpt_x2 0.00 to 200.00 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
P-gain adaptation characteristic for technology controller - threshold 2 [%] FS=100.00 1/UHABR
PNU=53D Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [21.2]
H342 TeCntr PGadpt_y1 0.10 to 30.00 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
P-gain adaptation characteristic for technology controller FS=1.00 1/UHABR
Minimum value of y (P-gain factor) when x ≤ x1
PNU=53E Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01; Block diag.: [21.1]
H343 TeCntr PGadpt_y2 0.10 to 30.00 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
P-gain adaptation characteristic for technology controller FS=1.00 1/UHABR
Maximum value of y (P-gain factor) when x ≥ x2
PNU=53F Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01; Block diag.: [21.1]
H344 TeCntr ResetTime 0 to 60.000 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Setting of reset time for technology controller [s] FS=3.000 1/UHABR
The integral component of the technology controller can be deactivated
with H351xxx0
PNU=540 Hex; Type=02; Normalization: 1==0.001s; Block diag.: [21.6]
H345 TeCntr R-T∗1000 0 to 1 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Selection of factor for reset time FS=0 1/UHABR

0 Parameter H344 is multiplied by a factor of 1 Value ∗1

1 Parameter H344 is multiplied by a factor of 1000 Value ∗1000

PNU=541 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [21.6]

4-32 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
Droop
Function: A parameterizable feedback (acts on summation point of setpoint and actual value) is switched in parallel to the I and P
components of the technology controller. This feedback can be enabled and disabled via control word H346 (can also be
disabled by H347 = 0).
Note: Four different datasets for parameters H347 to H349 can be selected by means of the parameter set switchover function
H346 TeCntr B_Droop 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to control injection of droop FS=0 1/UHAB
0= Fixed value 0 (droop not effective)
1= Fixed value 1 (droop continuously effective)
2= Fixed value 0 (droop not effective)
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=542 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [21.4]

H347 TeCntr Droop_% 0.0 to 60.0 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Setting of droop for technology controller [%] FS=0.0 1/UHABR

A 10% droop setting results in a 10% decrease in the setpoint with 100%
at the controller output ("softening" of control)
PNU=543 Hex; Type=02; Normalization: 1==0.1 %; Block diag.: [21.5]
H348 TeCntr Droop L+ 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Positive limit for technology controller droop [%] FS=100.00 1/UHABR
PNU=544 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [21.5]
H349 TeCntr Droop L- -199.99 to 0.00 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Negative limit for technology controller droop [%] FS=-100.00 1/UHABR
PNU=545 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [21.5]

Control bits
Note: Four different datasets for parameter H351 can be selected by means of the parameter set switchover function
H350 TeCntr B_Enable 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector which is to control enabling of the technology FS=0 1/UHAB
controller
0= Fixed value 0 (controller not enabled)
1= Fixed value 1 (controller enabled)
2= Fixed value 0 (controller not enabled)
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=546 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [21.4]

H351 TeCntr CntrTyp 0000 to 1111 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
* Control word for technology controller FS=0011 1/UHAB

xxx0 = Set controller I component to zero (i.e. pure P-action

controller)
xxx1 = I component of controller active

xx0x = Set controller P component to zero (i.e. pure I-action

controller)
xx1x = P component of controller active

x0xx = PI controller (D component effective only in actual value

channel)
x1xx = PID controller (D component effective for control deviation)

0xxx = Actual value is injected according to sign

1xxx = Actual value is injected in inverted form

PNU=547 Hex; Type=L2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [21.6]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-33

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
Set I component
Function: When the state of the binector selected in H353 switches from log. "0" to log. "1", the I component of the technology controller
is set to the value of the connector selected in H352. This function allows, for example, controller enabling and setting of the I
component to be controlled by the same signal (binector).

H352 TeCntr C_I-CSett 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* Selection of connector to be injected as the setting value for the controller FS=0 1/UHAB
I component

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=548 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [21.4]

H353 TeCntr B_I-CSett 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to control setting of I component FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0 (I component is not set)

1= Fixed value 1 (I component is set)
2= Fixed value 0 (I component is not set)
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=549 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [21.4]

Output, limitation
Note: Four different datasets for parameter H355, H357 and H359 can be selected by means of the parameter set switchover
function
H354 TeCntr C_Outp L+ 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Number of connector which is taken to the variable positive limit for the FS=1 1/UHAB
technology controller after multiplication with parameter H355

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 100 %
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

Note: If the selected connector contains a negative value, the value at the
output of this limitation stage will be a negative maximum value.

PNU=54A Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [21.7]

H355 TeCntr Output L+ 0.0 to 199.9 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Positive limit for the technology controller output [%] FS=100.0 1/UHABR

PNU=54B Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.1 %; Block diag.: [21.7]

4-34 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H356 TeCntr C_Outp L- 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Number of connector which is taken to the variable negative limit for the FS=86 1/UHAB
technology controller output after multiplication with parameter H357

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value -100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

Note: If the selected connector contains a positive value, the value at the
output of this limitation stage will be a positive minimum value.
Note: Connector K086 contains the positive limitation value with inverted
sign produced by H354 and H355. It is therefore possible to set the
negative limitation symmetrically to the positive limitation by setting
H356=86 and H357=100.0.

PNU=54C Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [21.7]

H357 TeCntr Output L- 0.0 to 199.9 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Negative limit for the output of the technology controller [%] FS=100.0 1/UHABR
PNU=54D Hex; Type=02; Normalization: 1==0.1 %; Block diag.: [21.7]
H358 TeCntr C_OutpScl 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Number of connector which weights the output of the technology controller FS=1 1/UHAB
after multiplication with parameter H359

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 100 %
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=54E Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [21.8]

H359 TeCntr OutptScal -100.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Weighting factor for the technology controller output [%] FS=100.0 1/UHABR
PNU=54F Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.1 %; Block diag.: [21.8]

Comfort ramp-function generator (F1010) See also Chapter 3.13

Input
H360 CORFG C_Input 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be injected as the input quantity for the ramp- FS=0 1/UHAB
function generator

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=550 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [22.1]

H361 CORFG B_Stop 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to control "Stop ramp-function generator" FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1 (ramp-function generator stopped)
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=551 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [22.1]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-35

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H362 CORFG B_Disable 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector which is control the "Disable" function (application of FS=1 1/UHAB
0 at ramp-generator input and switchover to RFG setting 1)

0= Fixed value 0 (no disabling)

1= Fixed value 1 (disable)
2= Fixed value 0 (no disabling)
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=552 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [22.1]

Set ramp-function generator

Function: When the binector selected in H365 switches to the log. "1" state, the ramp-function generator output is set to the value of the
connector selected in H364..
H364 CORFG C_SetVal. 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be injected as the ramp-function generator FS=0 1/UHAB
setting value

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=554 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [22.1]

H365 CORFG B_Set 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector which is to control "Set ramp-function generator" FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1 (set ramp-function generator)
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=555 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [22.1]

4-36 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
Starting integrator
The starting integrator can operate in two different modes:
1. "Starting integrator operation ON" = 0:
The comfort ramp-function generator operates as a "normal" generator. The 3 generator settings are specified only via the binectors
selected in H370 and H371.

2. "Starting integrator operation ON" = 1:

In this mode, only generator settings 1 and 3 are active. A status controller determines which of the two settings is active. Ramp-
function generator setting 1 (H372 - H375) is initially active after a "Ramp-function generator enable" command. As soon as the
generator reaches the required setpoint for the first time, setting 3 (H381 to H384) is automatically activated.
Note: If the "Starting integrator operation ON" signal is switched to "1" when the generator is enabled, then generator setting 3 is
activated immediately.
Application example::
A drive group of a production line must be accelerated from standstill up to the current line velocity via a ramp. The drive group
concerned must then follow the line velocity without any delay, i.e. the ramp-function generator must bypass itself after it has ramped
the drive up to the correct speed (H381, H382 = 0).

H366 CORFG B_StartInt 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* Selection of which binector is to control "Starting integrator operation FS=0 1/UHAB
ON"
0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=556 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [22.1]

Output dy/dt
H367 CORFG dydt Tdif 0.01 to 300.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Setting of dt for the output of dy/dt at connector, i.e. the change in the [s] FS=0.01 1/UHABR
output quantity (K096) within the time set in H367 is output at K095
Example: - The ramp-function generator is ramping up with a ramp time of
H381=5s, i.e. a ramp-up operation of y=0% to y=100%
takes 5s.
- A time difference dt of 2 s is set in H367.
- ⇒ A dy/dt of 40% appears at connector K093 because
the dy within the set dt of 2s equals (2s/5s)*100%.
PNU=557 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [22.5]

Control bits
H368 CORFG B_Enable 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector which is to control "Enable ramp-function FS=0 1/UHAB
generator"

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1 (ramp generator enabled)
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=558 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [22.1]

H369 CORFG 1=Tracking 0 to 1 Ind: None 1/UHABR
FS=0 1/UHABR
0 = No ramp-function generator tracking
1 = Ramp-function generator tracking active

PNU=559 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [22.4]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-37

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H370 CORFG B_Sttng_2 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector which is to control switchover to "Ramp-function FS=0 1/UHAB
generator setting 2".
In the log. "1" state, ramp-function generator parameter set 2 (H377 -
H380) is selected. This function has priority over the "Starting integrator"
function (H366).

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1 (setting 2 active)
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=55A Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [22.1]

H371 CORFG B_Sttng_3 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector which is to control switchover to "Ramp-function FS=0 1/UHAB
generator setting 3".
In the log. "1" state, ramp-function generator parameter set 3 (H381 -
H384) is selected. This function has priority over the "Starting integrator"
function (H366).

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1 (setting 3 active)
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=55B Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [22.1]

Ramp-function generator parameter set 1

H372 CORFG RU-Time_1 (ramp-up time) 0.00 to 650.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=55C Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [22.2] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H373 CORFG RD-Time_1 (ramp-down time) 0.00 to 650.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=55D Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [22.3] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H374 CORFG LT-Round_1 (lower transition rounding) 0.00 to 10.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=55E Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [22.4] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H375 CORFG UT-Round_1 (upper transition rounding) 0.00 to 10.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=55F Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [22.5] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H376 CORFG C_TRreduc 0 to 180 Ind: 2 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector which must be injected as the reduction signal for FS=1 1/UHAB
the generator ramping times

i01 acts on the ramp-up and ramp-down times (H372, H373)

i02 acts on lower and upper transition rounding (H374, H375)

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 100 %
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=560 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [22.1]

Ramp-function generator parameter set 2

H377 CORFG RU-Time_2 (ramp-up time) 0.00 to 650.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=561 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [22.3] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H378 CORFG RD-Time_2 (ramp-down time) 0.00 to 650.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=562 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [22.3] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H379 CORFG LT-Round_2 (lower transition rounding) 0.00 to 10.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=563 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [22.5] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHABR

4-38 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H380 CORFG UT-Round_2 (upper transition rounding) 0.00 to 10.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=564 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [22.5] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHABR

Ramp-function generator parameter set 3

H381 CORFG RU-Time_3 (ramp-up time) 0.00 to 650.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=565 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [22.3] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H382 CORFG RD-Time_3 (ramp-down time) 0.00 to 650.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=566 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [22.3] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H383 CORFG LT-Round_3 (lower transition rounding) 0.00 to 10.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=567 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [22.5] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H384 CORFG UT-Round_3 (upper transition rounding) 0.00 to 10.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=568 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [22.5] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHABR

Limitation in ramp-function generator, output

Note: The limitation value set in H385 is available at connector K101. By setting H386 = 101, this value can be applied as a positive
limitation value in the ramp-function generator. The positive limitation value selected in H386 is available with inverted sign at
connector K102. By setting H387 = 102, this value can be applied as a negative limitation value in the ramp-function generator
(symmetrically to the positive limitation).

H385 CORFG IntLimit (fixed limitation value) 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=569 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [22.7] [%] FS=100.00 1/UHABR
H386 CORFG C_Int L+ 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector which must be injected as the positive limitation FS=101 1/UHAB
value in the ramp-function generator

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=56A Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [22.8]

H387 CORFG C_Int L- 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector which must be injected as the negative limitation FS=102 1/UHAB
value in the ramp-function generator

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value -100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=56B Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [22.8]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-39

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
Limitation after ramp-function generator output (setpoint limitation)
Note: The limitation values for both the positive and the negative setpoint limit can have a positive or negative sign. It is therefore
possible, for example, to set the negative setpoint limit to a positive value or the positive setpoint limit to a negative value.
Example: H391 = -10.00 / H392 = 2 (=200.00%) / H393 = -100.00 / H394 = 2 (=-200.00%) results in a limitation of the output
value to values between -100.00 and -10.00 %
H390 LimtRFG C_Input 0 to 180 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector which must be injected as the input for the FS=2 1/UHAB
limitation after the ramp-function generator output (setpoint limitation)

i01:
0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Ramp-function generator output
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

i02 - i04:
0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=56E Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [22.6]

H391 LimtRFG LimitL+ -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Positive limitation after the ramp-function generator (positive setpoint [%] FS=100.00 1/UHABR
limit)

Note: If this parameter is set to a negative value, a negative maximum

value will appear at the limitation stage output.
Effective limitation = minimum of H391 and the value selected in H392.

PNU=56F Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [22.7]

H392 LimtRFG C_LmtL+ 0 to 180 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector which must be applied to the variable positive FS=2 1/UHAB
limitation after the ramp-function generator (setpoint limitation).

Note: If the selected connector has a negative value, a negative minimum

value will appear at the limitation stage output.

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 200 %
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=570 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [22.6]

H393 LimtRFG LimitL- -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Negative limitation after the ramp-function generator (negative setpoint [%] FS=-100.00 1/UHABR
limit)

Note: If this parameter is set to a positive value, a positive minimum value

will appear at the limitation stage output.
Effective limitation = maximum of H393 and the value selected in H394.

PNU=571 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [22.7]

4-40 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H394 LimtRFG C_LmtL- 0 to 180 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector which must be applied to the variable negative FS=2 1/UHAB
limitation after the ramp-function generator (setpoint limitation).

Note: If the selected connector has a positive value, a positive minimum

value will appear at the limitation stage output.

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value −100 %
2= Value as set in parameter H392 ∗ (−1)
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=572 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [22.6]

Motorized potentiometer (F670) See also Chapter 3.14

Note: Four different datasets for parameters H400, H401, H402, H403, H404, H410, H411, 412, 413. and H414 can be selected by
means of the parameter set switchover function
H400 MOP Op-Mode 0001 to 1112 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
* Selection of operating mode for the motorized potentiometer FS=0101 1/UHAB

xxx1 Motorized potentiometer mode:

The ramp-function generator is operated by means of
Raise/Lower commands. The automatic-mode setpoint is
ignored.
xxx2 Ramp-function generator mode:
The ramp-function generator follows the automatic-mode
setpoint. The Raise/Lower commands are ignored.

xx0x No storage of output value: Output is set to 0 if status word 1

bit 2 = 0 (not "Run" mode) and when supply voltage is
switched on.
xx10 Non-volatile storage of output value: The output value remains
stored in all operational states and during disconnection or
failure of the power supply. On supply recovery, the last value
stored is output again.

x0xx The motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator is

bypassed in automatic mode (H402 and H403 = 0, i.e. the
ramp-function generator output follows the automatic-mode
setpoint instantaneously).
x1xx Motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator is effective
in manual and automatic modes.

0xxx Operating range of motorized potentiometer via

RAISE/LOWER = 0 to 100% (control of clockwise/counter-
clockwise switchover selected in H407)
1xxx Operating range of motorized potentiometer via
RAISE/LOWER = -100% to +100% (clockwise/counter-
clockwise switchover is inactive)

PNU=578 Hex; Type= L2; Normalization: 1==1 Hex; Block diag.: [23.4]
H401 MOP AutoSetpoint 0 to 180 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector which must be applied to the ramp-function FS=0 1/UHAB
generator as the automatic-mode setpoint

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=579 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [23.1]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-41

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H402 MOP RampUpTime_s 0.01 to 300.00 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Ramp-up time for the motorized potentiometer [s] FS=10.00 1/UHABR
Note: Set time acts in [s] when H404=0 or in [min] when H404=1
PNU=57A Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [23.5]
H403 MOP RampDown_s 0.01 to 300.00 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Ramp-down time for the motorized potentiometer [s] FS=10.00 1/UHABR
Note: Set time acts in [s] when H404=0 or in [min] when H404=1
PNU=57B Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [23.6]
H404 MOP TUp/Down∗60 0 to 1 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
* Selection of extension factor for the motorized potentiometer FS=0 1/UHAB

0 Parameters H402, H403, H412 are multiplied by a factor of 1 Value ∗1

1 Parameters H402, H403, H412 are multiplied by a factor of 60, Value ∗60
i.e. the values set there act in [min] instead of in [s]

PNU=57C Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [23.8]

H405 MOP B_RaiseComm 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to control "RAISE setpoint". FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1 (RAISE)
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=57D Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [23.1]

H406 MOP B_LowerComm 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to control "LOWER setpoint". FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1 (LOWER)
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=57E Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [23.2]

H407 MOP B_CW/CCW 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to control "Clockwise/Counter-clockwise FS=0 1/UHAB
switchover".

0= Fixed value 0 (clockwise)

1= Fixed value 1 (counter-clockwise)
2= Fixed value 0 (clockwise)
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=57F Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [23.3]

H408 MOP B_Man/Auto 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to control "Manual/Automatic mode switchover". FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0 (manual)

1= Fixed value 1 (automatic)
2= Fixed value 0 (manual)
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=580 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [23.4]

4-42 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H409 MOP B_Set 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to control "Set motorized potentiometer". FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1 (set motorized potentiometer)
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=581 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [23.5]

H410 MOP C_SettingVal 0 to 180 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector which must be injected as the motorized FS=0 1/UHAB
potentiometer setting value

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=582 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [23.5]

H411 MOP WghtFactor -100 to +100 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Setting of weighting factor for motorized potentiometer [%] FS=100 1/UHABR
PNU=583 Hex; Type= I2; Normalization: 1==1 %; Block diag.: [23.7]
H412 MOP dydt TimeDif 0.01 to 300.00 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Setting of dt for the output of dy/dt at connector, i.e. the change in the [s] FS=10.00 1/UHABR
output quantity (K158) within the time set in H412 and multiplied by the
time factor in H404 (set time acts in [s] when H404 =0 or in [min] when
H404 =1) is output at K160
Example: - The ramp-function generator is ramping up with a ramp time of
H402=5s, i.e. a ramp-up operation of y=0% to y=100%
takes 5s.
- A time difference dt of 2 s is set in H412.
- ⇒ A dy/dt of 40% appears at connector K160 because
the dy within the set dt of 2s equals (2s/5s)*100%.

PNU=584 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [23.7]

H413 MOP Limit + (starting with software version 1.1) -100.00 to +100.00 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Positive limit for the motorized potentiometer [%] FS=100,00 1/UHABR
PNU=585 Hex; Typ=I2; Normalization: 1==0,01 %; Block diag.: [23.6]
H414 MOP Limit - (starting with software version 1.1) -100.00 to +100.00 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Negative limit for the motorized potentiometer [%] FS=-100,00 1/UHABR
PNU=586 Hex; Typ=I2; Normalization: 1==0,01 %; Block diag.: [23.6]

Wobble generator (F1020) See also Chapter 3.15

Control
H418 Wobb C_UnmodSetp 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be injected as the "Unmodulated setpoint (IN)" FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=58A Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [24.1]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-43

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H419 Wobb B_SyncInput 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to be injected as the "Synchronizing signal from FS=0 1/UHAB
master"

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=58B Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [24.1]

H420 Wobb B_Enable 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to be injected as the wobbler enabling signal FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

"Wobbling" always starts on a positive zero crossing and always ends on

the following crossing.
PNU=58C Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [24.6]

Definition of wobbler signal

Note: The following parameters are included in the switchover parameter set and have four different datasets each which can be
selected by means of the parameter set switchover function
H421 Wobb Amplitude (wobbler amplitude) 0 to +20.00 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
PNU=58D Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 % of IN (IN: see [% of IN] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H418)
Block diag.: [24.2]
H422 Wobb Frequency (wobbler frequency) 0.1 to 120.0 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
PNU=58E Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==0.1 faults / min [faults / min] FS=60.0 1/UHABR
Block diag.: [24.2]
H423 Wobb Phase-Shift (phase shift) 0 to 360 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
When H423 = 360, the synchronizing signal from the master is ignored [°el] FS=360 1/UHABR
(decoupled wobbling)
PNU=58F Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1 °el; Block diag.: [24.3]
H424 Wobb PJump neg (negative P jump) 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
PNU=590 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 % of IN (IN: see [% of H421] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H418)
Block diag.: [24.4]
H425 Wobb PJump pos (positive P jump) 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
PNU=591 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 % von IN (IN: see [% of H421] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H418)
Block diag.: [24.5]
H426 Wobb Pls/PausRat (pulse/pause ratio) 0 to 100 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
Proportion of rising edge in % of period of wobbler signal, i.e. in % of [% of TW] FS=50 1/UHABR
1 / H222

Example: H422 = 10.0 Hz / H426 = 40 %

• The wobbler signal period is 1 / 10.0 Hz = 100 ms
• The rising edge (from lowest to highest point) is
40 % of 100 ms = 40 ms long
PNU=592 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1 % of TW (TW = 1 / H422)
Block diag.: [24.6]

4-44 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)

Adders (F590, F680, F950, F1030, F1370)

Adder 1 F590
Function: The contents of the connectors selected in H430, H431 and H432 are added. The total is limited to the value range -200.00 to
199.99 % and applied to connector K105

H430 ADD1 C_Input 1 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* Selection of 1st connector of which contents are to be added FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=596 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.1]

H431 ADD1 C_Input 2 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of 2nd connector of which contents are to be added FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=597 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.1]

H432 ADD1 C_Input 3 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of 3rd connector of which contents are to be added FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=598 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.1]

Adder 2 F680
Function: The contents of the connectors selected in H433, H434 and H435 are added. The total is limited to the value range -200.00 to
199.99 % and applied to connector K106

H433 ADD2 C_Input 1 as for H430 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=599 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.3] FS=0 1/UHAB
H434 ADD2 C_Input 2 as for H431 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=59A Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.3] FS=0 1/UHAB
H435 ADD2 C_Input 3 as for H432 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=59B Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.3] FS=0 1/UHAB

Adder 3 F950
Function: The contents of the connectors selected in H436, H437 and H438 are added. The total is limited to the value range -200.00 to
199.99 % and applied to connector K107

H436 ADD3 C_Input 1 as for H430 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=59C Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.4] FS=0 1/UHAB
H437 ADD3 C_Input 2 as for H431 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=59D Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

H438 ADD3 C_Input 3 as for H432 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=59E Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-45

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
Adder 4 F1030
Function: The contents of the connectors selected in H439, H440 and H441 are added. The total is limited to the value range -200.00 to
199.99 % and applied to connector K108

H439 ADD4 C_Input 1 as for H430 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=59F Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

H440 ADD4 C_Input 2 as for H431 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=5A0 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

H441 ADD4 C_Input 3 as for H432 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=5A1 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

Adder 5 F1370
Function: The contents of the connectors selected in H442, H443 and H444 are added. The total is limited to the value range -200.00 to
199.99 % and applied to connector K109

H442 ADD5 C_Input 1 as for H430 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=5A2 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.7] FS=0 1/UHAB
H443 ADD5 C_Input 2 as for H431 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5A3 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.7] FS=0 1/UHAB
H444 ADD5 C_Input 3 as for H432 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5A4 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.7] FS=0 1/UHAB

Subtracters (F720, F1070, F1310)

Subtracter 1 F720
Function: The contents of the connector selected in H446 are subtracted from the contents of the connector selected in H445. The
difference is limited to the value range -200.00 to 199.99 % and applied to connector K110.

H445 SUB1 C_Input 1 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* Selection of 1st connector for subtraction FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5A5 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.1]

H446 SUB1 C_Input 2 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be subtracted from SUB1 C_Input 1 FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5A6 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.1]

Subtracter 2 F1070
Function: The contents of the connector selected in H448 are subtracted from the contents of the connector selected in H447. The
difference is limited to the value range -200.00 to 199.99 % and applied to connector K111.

H447 SUB2 C_Input 1 as for H445 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=5A7 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.3] FS=0 1/UHAB
H448 SUB2 C_Input 2 as for H446 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5A8 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.3] FS=0 1/UHAB

4-46 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
Subtracter 3 F1310
Function: The contents of the connector selected in H450 are subtracted from the contents of the connector selected in H449. The
difference is limited to the value range -200.00 to 199.99 % and applied to connector K112.

H449 SUB3 C_Input 1 as for H445 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=5A9 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

H450 SUB3 C_Input 2 as for H446 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=5AA Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

Sign inverters (F580, F840, F1550, F920)

Sign inverter 1 F580
Function: The contents of the connector selected in H451 are negated (two's complement). The result is applied to
connector K113.
H451 SignInv1 C_Input 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector for the sign inverter FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5AB Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.1]

Sign inverter 2 F840

Function: The contents of the connector selected in H452 are negated (two's complement). The result is applied to
connector K114
H452 SignInv2 C_Input as for H451 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5AC Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.3] FS=0 1/UHAB

Sign inverter 3 F1550

Function: The contents of the connector selected in H453 are negated (two's complement). The result is applied to
connector K115
H453 SignInv3 C_Input as for H451 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5AD Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

Switchable sign inverter F920

Function: The contents of the connector selected in H454 are applied to connector K116 either in an unaltered state or negated (two's
complement) depending on the binector selected in H455.
H454 SignInvSw C_Inp 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be processed for the switchable sign inverter FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5AE Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.6]

H455 SignInvSw B_y=-x 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector for the switchable sign inverter which controls sign FS=0 1/UHAB
reversal

0= Fixed value 0 (not inverted)

1= Fixed value 1 (inverted)
2= Fixed value 0 (not inverted)
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=5AF Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [25.6]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-47

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)

Dividers (F730, F960, F1380)

Divider 1 F730
Function: The contents of the connector (x1) selected in H456 are divided by the contents of the connector (x2) selected in H457. The
quotient (y) is limited to the value range -200.00 to 199.99 % and applied to connector K117.

When divided by 0 (x2 = 0):

x1∗100% when x1 > 0: y = +199.99 %
Formula: y =
x2 when x1 = 0: y = 0.00 %
when x1 < 0: y = -200.00 %
H456 DIV1 (x1/x2)C_x1 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of 1st connector (x1) for the divider FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5B0 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.1]

H457 DIV1 (x1/x2)C_x2 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of 2nd connector (x2) for the divider FS=1 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5B1 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.1]

Divider 2 F960
Function: The contents of the connector (x1) selected in H458 are divided by the contents of the connector (x2) selected in H459. The
quotient (y) is limited to the value range -200.00 to 199.99 % and applied to connector K118.

When divided by 0 (x2 = 0):

x1∗100% when x1 > 0: y = +199.99 %
Formula: y =
x2 when x1 = 0: y = 0.00 %
when x1 < 0: y = -200.00 %
H458 DIV2 (x1/x2)C_x1 as for H456 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5B2 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

H459 DIV2 (x1/x2)C_x2 as for H457 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=5B3 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.1] FS=1 1/UHAB

Divider 3 F1380
Function: The contents of the connector (x1) selected in H460 are divided by the contents of the connector (x2) selected in H461. The
quotient (y) is limited to the value range -200.00 to 199.99 % and applied to connector K119.

When divided by 0 (x2 = 0):

x1∗100% when x1 > 0: y = +199.99 %
Formula: y =
x2 when x1 = 0: y = 0.00 %
when x1 < 0: y = -200.00 %
H460 DIV3 (x1/x2)C_x1 as for H456 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5B4 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

H461 DIV3 (x1/x2)C_x2 as for H457 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=5B5 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.1] FS=1 1/UHAB

4-48 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)

Multipliers (F650, F750, F1080, F1460)

Multiplier 1 F650
Function: The contents of the connector (x1) selected in H462 are multiplied by the contents of the connector (x2) selected in H463. The
product (y) is limited to the value range -200.00 to 199.99 % and applied to connector K120.

x1∗ x2
Formula: y =
100%
H462 MUL1 C_x1 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of 1st connector (x1) for the multiplier FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5B6 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.3]

H463 MUL1 C_x2 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of 2nd connector (x2) for the multiplier FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5B7 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.3]

Multiplier 2 F750
Function: The contents of the connector (x1) selected in H464 are multiplied by the contents of the connector (x2) selected in H465. The
product (y) is limited to the value range -200.00 to 199.99 % and applied to connector K121.

x1∗ x2
Formula: y =
100%
H464 MUL2 C_x1 as for H462 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5B8 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

H465 MUL2 C_x2 as for H463 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=5B9 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

Multiplier 3 F1080
Function: The contents of the connector (x1) selected in H466 are multiplied by the contents of the connector (x2) selected in H467. The
product (y) is limited to the value range -200.00 to 199.99 % and applied to connector K122.

x1∗ x2
Formula: y =
100%
H466 MUL3 C_x1 as for H462 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5BA Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

H467 MUL3 C_x2 as for H463 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=5BB Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

Multiplier 4 F1460
Function: The contents of the connector (x1) selected in H468 are multiplied by the contents of the connector (x2) selected in H469. The
product (y) is limited to the value range -200.00 to 199.99 % and applied to connector K123.

x1∗ x2
Formula: y =
100%
H468 MUL4 C_x1 as for H462 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5BC Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.7] FS=0 1/UHAB

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-49

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H469 MUL4 C_x2 as for H463 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5BD Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.7] FS=0 1/UHAB

High-resolution multipliers/dividers (F740, F910, F1150)

High-resolution multiplier/divider 1 F740
Function: The contents of the connector (x1) selected in H470 are multiplied by the contents of the connector (x2) selected in H471. The
product (x4) is divided by the contents of the connector (x3) selected in H472. The quotient (y) is limited to the value range -
200.00 to 199.99 % and applied to connector K124. The contents of connector K124 are output in display parameter d070.

When divided by 0 (x3 = 0):

x4 x1∗ x2 when x4 > 0: y = +199.99 %
Formulae: x4(32bit ) = x1∗ x2 . y = =
x3 x3 when x4 = 0: y = 0.00 %
when x4 < 0: y = -200.00 %
H470 MULDIV1 C_x1 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of the 1st connector (x1) for the high-resolution multiplier/divider FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5BE Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.3]

H471 MULDIV1 C_x2 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of the 2nd connector (x2) for the high-resolution FS=0 1/UHAB
multiplier/divider

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5BF Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.3]

H472 MULDIV1 C_x3 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of the 3rd connector (x3) for the high-resolution multiplier/divider FS=1 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5C0 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.3]

High-resolution multiplier/divider 2 F910

Function: The contents of the connector (x1) selected in H474 are multiplied by the contents of the connector (x2) selected in H475.
The product (x4) is divided by the contents of the connector (x3) selected in H476. The quotient (y) is limited to the value
range -200.00 to 199.99 % and applied to connector K125. The contents of connector K125 are output in display parameter
d071.

When divided by 0 (x3 = 0):

x4 x1∗ x2 when x4 > 0: y = +199.99 %
Formulae: x4(32bit ) = x1∗ x2 . y = =
x3 x3 when x4 = 0: y = 0.00 %
when x4 < 0: y = -200.00 %
H474 MULDIV2 C_x1 as for H470 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5C2 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

H475 MULDIV2 C_x2 as for H471 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=5C3 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

4-50 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H476 MULDIV2 C_x3 as for H472 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5C4 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.6] FS=1 1/UHAB

High-resolution multiplier/divider 3 F1150

Function: The contents of the connector (x1) selected in H478 are multiplied by the contents of the connector (x2) selected in H479.
The product (x4) is divided by the contents of the connector (x3) selected in H480. The quotient (y) is limited to the value
range -200.00 to 199.99 % and applied to connector K126. The contents of connector K126 are output in display parameter
d072.

When divided by 0 (x3 = 0):

x4 x1∗ x2 when x4 > 0: y = +199.99 %
Formulae: x4(32bit ) = x1∗ x2 . y = =
x3 x3 when x4 = 0: y = 0.00 %
when x4 < 0: y = -200.00 %
H478 MULDIV3 C_x1 as for H470 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5C6 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.3] FS=0 1/UHAB

H479 MULDIV3 C_x2 as for H471 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=5C7 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.3] FS=0 1/UHAB

H480 MULDIV3 C_x3 as for H472 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=5C8 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [26.3] FS=1 1/UHAB

Absolute-value generators with filter (F440, F1320, F1530, F1580)

Absolute-value generator with filter 1 F440
Function: The contents of the connector selected in H482 are injected according to the mode selected in H483 and filtered according to
H484. The output signal is applied to K127.
H482 AbsFilt1 C_Input 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be applied as the input quantity to the absolute- FS=0 1/UHAB
value generator with filter

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5CA Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.1]

H483 AbsFilt1 Mode 0 to 3 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of mode for injecting signals to absolute-value generator with FS=0 1/UHAB
filter
0= Signal injection according to sign y= Signal
1= Injection of signal absolute value y= |Signal|
2= Signed signal injection, inverted y= -Signal
3= Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted y=-|Signal|

PNU=5CB Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.2]

H484 AbsFilt1 Timems 0 to 10000 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Filter time for absolute-value generator with filter [ms] FS=0 1/UHABR
PNU=5CC Hex; Type=O2. Normalization: 1==1 ms; Block diag.: [27.3]

Absolute-value generator with filter 2 F1320

Function: The contents of the connector selected in H485 are injected according to the mode selected in H486 and filtered according to
H487. The output signal is applied to K128.
H485 AbsFilt2 C_Input as for H482 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5CD Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

H486 AbsFilt2 Mode as for H483 0 to 3 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=5CE Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.2] FS=0 1/UHAB

H487 AbsFilt2 Timems as for H484 0 to 10000 Ind: None 1/UHABR

PNU=5CF Hex; Type=O2. Normalization: 1==1 ms; Block diag.: [27.3] [ms] FS=0 1/UHABR

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-51

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
Absolute-value generator with filter 3 F1530
Function: The contents of the connector selected in H488 are injected according to the mode selected in H489 and filtered according to
H490. The output signal is applied to K129.
H488 AbsFilt3 C_Input as for H482 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5D0 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

H489 AbsFilt3 Mode as for H483 0 to 3 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=5D1 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.2] FS=0 1/UHAB

H490 AbsFilt3 Timems as for H484 0 to 10000 Ind: None 1/UHABR

PNU=5D2 Hex; Type=O2. Normalization: 1==1 ms; Block diag.: [27.3] [ms] FS=0 1/UHABR

Absolute-value generator with filter 4 F1580

Function: The contents of the connector selected in H491 are injected according to the mode selected in H492 and filtered according to
H493. The output signal is applied to K130.
H491 AbsFilt4 C_Input as for H482 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5D3 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

H492 AbsFilt4 Mode as for H483 0 to 3 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=5D4 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.2] FS=0 1/UHAB

H493 AbsFilt4 Timems as for H484 0 to 10000 Ind: None 1/UHABR

PNU=5D5 Hex; Type=O2. Normalization: 1==1 ms; Block diag.: [27.3] [ms] FS=0 1/UHABR

Limiters (F1190, F1470)

Limiter 1 F1190
Function: The contents of the input quantity (x) selected in H494 are limited to the values selected in H495 (L+) and H497 (L-). The
output signal (y) is applied to K173. Violation of the limit values is signalled via B119 and B120.
H494 Limitr1 C_Input 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector which is to be applied as the input quantity (x) to FS=0 1/UHAB
the limiter

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5D6 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.1]

H495 Limitr1 C_LmtL+ 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be applied to the limiter as the positive limitation FS=171 1/UHAB
value (L+)

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

Note: Parameter H496 is connected to connector K171. By setting

H495=171, this value can be injected as a positive limitation
value.
PNU=5D7 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.2]
H496 Limitr1 FixLm L+ -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Limitation value for the limiter [%] FS=100.00 1/UHABR
PNU=5D8 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [27.1]

4-52 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H497 Limitr1 C_LmtL- 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be applied to the limiter as the negative FS=172 1/UHAB
limitation value (L-)

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

Note: The positive limitation value selected in H495 is applied with

inverted sign to connector K172. By setting H497 = 172, it is
possible to inject this value as a negative limitation.

PNU=5D9 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.2]

Limiter 2
Function: The contents of the input quantity (x) selected in H498 are limited to the values selected in H499 (L+) and H501 (L-). The
output signal (y) is applied to K176. Violation of the limit values is signalled via B121 and B122.

H498 Limitr2 C_Input as for H494 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=5DA Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

H499 Limitr2 C_LmtL+ as for H495 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* Note: Parameter H500 is connected to connector K174. By setting FS=174 1/UHAB
H499=174, this value can be injected as a positive limitation
value.
PNU=5DB Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.5]
H500 Limitr2 FixLm L+ as for H496 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=5DC Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [27.5] [%] FS=100.00 1/UHABR
H501 Limitr2 C_LmtL- as for H497 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Note: The positive limitation value selected in H499 is applied with FS=175 1/UHAB
inverted sign to connector K175. By setting H501 = 175, it is
possible to inject this value as a negative limitation.

PNU=5DD Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.5]

Limit-value monitors with filter (F830, F1540)

Limit-value monitor with filter 1 F830
H502 LmtVlMon1 C_InpA 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be applied as input quantity (A) to the limit-value FS=0 1/UHAB
monitor with filter

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5DE Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.4]

H503 LmtMon1FiltTm_ms 0 to 10000 Ind: None 1/UHABR
[ms] FS=0 1/UHABR
Filter time for input quantity (A) of limit-value monitor with filter
PNU=5DF Hex; Type=O2. Normalization: 1==1 ms; Block diag.: [27.5]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-53

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H504 LmtVlMon1 C_InpB 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be injected as operating threshold (B) to limit- FS=132 1/UHAB
value monitor with filter 1
0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

Note: Parameter H505 is connected to connector K132. By setting

H504=132, this value can be injected as the operating threshold.

PNU=5E0 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.5]

H505 LmtVlMon1 FixThr -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Adjustable operating threshold for limit-value monitor with filter 1 [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=5E1 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [27.4]
H506 LmtVlMon1 Hyster 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
Hysteresis for limit-value monitor with filter [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
PNU=5E2 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [27.6]
H507 LmtVlMon1 CompMd 0 to 2 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of response mode for limit-value monitor with filter 1 FS=0 1/UHAB

0 = A < B supplies log. ”1” at B123 |A| < B

1 = A < B supplies log. ”1” at B123 A<B
2 = A = B supplies log. ”1” at B123 A=B

PNU=5E3 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.8]

Limit-value monitor with filter 2 F1540

H508 LmtVlMon2 C_InpA as for H502 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5E4 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.4] FS=0 1/UHAB
H509 LmtMon2FiltTm_ms as for H503 0 to 10000 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=5E5 Hex; Type=O2. Normalization: 1==1 ms; Block diag.: [27.5] [ms] FS=0 1/UHABR
H510 LmtVlMon2 C_InpB as for H504 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Note: Parameter H511 is connected to connector K134. By setting FS=134 1/UHAB
H510=134, this value can be injected as the operating threshold.
PNU=5E6 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.5]
H511 LmtVlMon2 FixThr as for H505 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=5E7 Hex; Type=I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [27.4] [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H512 LmtVlMon2 Hyster as for H506 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=5E8 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [27.6] [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H513 LmtVlMon2 CompMd 0 to 2 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of response mode for limit-value monitor with filter 2 FS=0 1/UHAB

0 = A < B supplies log. ”1” at B124 |A| < B

1 = A < B supplies log. ”1” at B124 A<B
2 = A = B supplies log. ”1” at B124 A=B

PNU=5E9 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [27.8]

4-54 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)

Maximum/minimum selection (F1390, F1400)

Maximum selection F1390

Function: Der highest of the input values selected with H514 (x1), H515 (x2) and H516 (x3) is applied to connector K135.

H514 MAXIMUM C_Inp.1 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* Selection of connector to be applied as input quantity (x1) to the maximum FS=0 1/UHAB
selection

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5EA Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.1]

H515 MAXIMUM C_Inp.2 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be applied as input quantity (x2) to the maximum FS=0 1/UHAB
selection

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5EB Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.1]

H516 MAXIMUM C_Inp.3 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be applied as input quantity (x3) to the maximum FS=0 1/UHAB
selection

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5EC Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.1]

Minimum selection F1400

Function: The lowest of the input values selected in H517 (x1), H518 (x2) and H519 (x3) is applied to connector K136

H517 MINIMUM C_Inp.1 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* Selection of connector to be applied as input quantity (x1) to the minimum FS=0 1/UHAB
selection

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5ED Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.1]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-55

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H518 MINIMUM C_Inp.2 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be applied as input quantity (x2) to the minimum FS=0 1/UHAB
selection

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5EE Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.1]

H519 MINIMUM C_Inp.3 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be applied as input quantity (x3) to the minimum FS=0 1/UHAB
selection

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5EF Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.1]

Tracking/storage elements (F450, F460)

Tracking/storage element 1 F450
Function: Tracking/storage element 1 is a store for the contents of the connector (x) selected in H520. The output (y) is applied to K137.

The transfer of the input quantity is controlled by the functions RESET, TRACK and STORE:

RESET: When the binector selected in H521 assumes the "1" state, the output is set to 0.00 % (y=0)
TRACK: When the binector selected in H522 assumes the "1" state, the output is set to the input value and is made to follow it
continuously (y=x). If the TRACK signal switches from 1 to 0, then the last value applied to output y is "frozen".
STORE: When the binector selected in H523 switches from the "0" to the "1" state, then the output is fixed at the input value present at
the instant of transition (y=x). This value then remains stored.

Priority: 1. RESET. 2. TRACK. 3. STORE

H520 Trck/Str1 C_Inp. 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be injected as the input quantity (x) FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5F0 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.4]

H521 Trck/St1 B_RESET 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to control the RESET function FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=5F1 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.4]

4-56 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H522 Trck/St1 B_TRACK 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to control the TRACK function FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=5F2 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.4]

H523 Trck/St1 B_STORE 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to control the STORE function FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=5F3 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.4]

H524 Trck/St1 PwrMode 0 to 1 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Control word for the Power On Mode for the tracking/storage element FS=0 1/UHAB

0= No non-volatile storage: Zero at output on power supply Volatile

recovery

1= Non-volatile storage: In the event of supply disconnection or Non-volat.

failure, the instantaneous output value is stored and output
again on supply recovery.

PNU=5F4 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.5]

Tracking/storage element 2 F460

Function: Tracking/storage element 2 is a store for the contents of the connector (x) selected in H525. The output (y) is applied to K138.

The transfer of the input quantity is controlled by the functions RESET, TRACK and STORE:

RESET: When the binector selected in H526 assumes the "1" state, the output is set to 0.00 % (y=0)

TRACK: When the binector selected in H527 assumes the "1" state, the output is set to the input value and is made to follow it
continuously (y=x). If the TRACK signal switches from 1 to 0, then the last value applied to output y is "frozen".

STORE: When the binector selected in H528 switches from the "0" to the "1" state, then the output is fixed at the input value present at
the instant of transition (y=x). This value then remains stored.

Priority: 1. RESET. 2. TRACK. 3. STORE

H525 Trck/Str2 C_Inp. as for H520 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5F5 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.6] FS=0 1/UHAB
H526 Trck/St2 B_RESET as for H521 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5F6 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.6] FS=0 1/UHAB
H527 Trck/St2 B_TRACK as for H522 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5F7 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.6] FS=0 1/UHAB
H528 Trck/St2 B_STORE as for H523 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5F8 Hex; Type=02; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.6] FS=0 1/UHAB
H529 Trck/St2 PwrMode as for H524 0 to 1 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5F9 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.8] FS=0 1/UHAB

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-57

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)

Analog signal memories (F470, F480)

Analog signal memory 1 F470
Function: Analog signal memory 1 is a storage element for the contents of the connector (x) selected in H530.
The output (y) is applied to K139.
As long as a log. "1" signal is applied to the SET input, output quantity y continuously follows input quantity x.
If the signal at the SET input changes from log. "1" to log. "0", the instantaneous value of x is stored and output continuously
at y.
The output (y) is set to 0 on POWER ON.

H530 AnaStor1 C_Inp. 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* Selection of connector to be injected as the input quantity (x) FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5FA Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.4]

H531 AnaStor1 B_SET 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to control the SET function FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=5FB Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.4]

Analog signal memory 2 F480

Function: Analog signal memory 2 is a storage element for the contents of the connector (x) selected in H532.
The output (y) is applied to K140.
As long as a log. "1" signal is applied to the SET input, output quantity y continuously follows input quantity x.
If the signal at the SET input changes from log. "1" to log. "0", the instantaneous value of x is stored and output continuously
at y.
The output (y) is set to 0 on POWER ON.

H532 AnaStor2 C_Inp. as for H530 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=5FC Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.6] FS=0 1/UHAB
H533 AnaStor2 B_SET as for H531 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=5FD Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [28.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

Analog signal switches

(F490, F550, F640, F780, F810, F860, F1060, F1130, F1160, F1220)
Analog signal switch 1 F490
Function: Depending on the state of the binector selected in H534, the connector selected in H535 (with binector state = 0) or in H536
(with binector state = 1) is applied to the input of connector K141

H534 AnSwitch1 B_0/1 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* Selection of binector to control switchover operation FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=5FE Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.2]

4-58 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H535 AnSwitch1 C_Inp0 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be injected as the input quantity with binector FS=0 1/UHAB
state = 0

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=5FF Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.2]

H536 AnSwitch1 C_Inp1 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector to be injected as the input quantity with binector FS=0 1/UHAB
state = 1

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=600 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.2]

Analog signal switch 2 F550

Function: Depending on the state of the binector selected in H537, the connector selected in H538 (with binector state = 0) or in H539
(with binector state = 1) is applied to the input of connector K142

H537 AnSwitch2 B_0/1 as for H534 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=601 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.2] FS=0 1/UHAB
H538 AnSwitch2 C_Inp0 as for H535 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=602 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.2] FS=0 1/UHAB
H539 AnSwitch2 K_Inp1 as for H536 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=603 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.2] FS=0 1/UHAB

Analog signal switch 3 F640

Function: Depending on the state of the binector selected in H540, the connector selected in H541 (with binector state = 0) or in H542
(with binector state = 1) is applied to the input of connector K143

H540 AnSwitch3 B_0/1 as for H534 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=604 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.2] FS=0 1/UHAB

H541 AnSwitch3 C_Inp0 as for H535 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=605 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.2] FS=0 1/UHAB

H542 AnSwitch3 C_Inp1 as for H536 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=606 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.2] FS=0 1/UHAB

Analog signal switch 4 F780

Function: Depending on the state of the binector selected in H543, the connector selected in H544 (with binector state = 0) or in H542
(with binector state = 1) is applied to the input of connector K144

H543 AnSwitch4 B_0/1 as for H534 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=607 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.2] FS=0 1/UHAB

H544 AnSwitch4 C_Inp0 as for H535 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=608 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.2] FS=0 1/UHAB

H545 AnSwitch4 C_Inp1 as for H536 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=609 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.2] FS=0 1/UHAB

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-59

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
Analog signal switch 5 F810
Function: Depending on the state of the binector selected in H546, the connector selected in H547 (with binector state = 0) or in H548
(with binector state = 1) is applied to the input of connector K145

H546 AnSwitch5 B_0/1 as for H534 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=60A Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

H547 AnSwitch5 C_Inp0 as for H535 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=60B Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

H548 AnSwitch5 C_Inp1 as for H536 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=60C Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

Analog signal switch 6 F860

Function: Depending on the state of the binector selected in H549, the connector selected in H550 (with binector state = 0) or in H551
(with binector state = 1) is applied to the input of connector K146

H549 AnSwitch6 B_0/1 as for H534 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=60D Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

H550 AnSwitch6 C_Inp0 as for H535 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=60E Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

H551 AnSwitch6 C_Inp1 as for H536 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=60F Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

Analog signal switch 7 F1060

Function: Depending on the state of the binector selected in H552, the connector selected in H553 (with binector state = 0) or in H554
(with binector state = 1) is applied to the input of connector K146

H552 AnSwitch7 B_0/1 as for H534 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=610 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

H553 AnSwitch7 C_Inp0 as for H535 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=611 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

H554 AnSwitch7 C_Inp1 as for H536 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=612 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

Analog signal switch 8 F1130

Function: Depending on the state of the binector selected in H555, the connector selected in H556 (with binector state = 0) or in H557
(with binector state = 1) is applied to the input of connector K148

H555 AnSwitch8 B_0/1 as for H534 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=613 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.4] FS=0 1/UHAB
H556 AnSwitch8 C_Inp0 as for H535 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=614 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.4] FS=0 1/UHAB
H557 AnSwitch8 C_Inp1 as for H536 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=615 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

Analog signal switch 9 F1160

Function: Depending on the state of the binector selected in H558, the connector selected in H559 (with binector state = 0) or in H560
(with binector state = 1) is applied to the input of connector K149

H558 AnSwitch9 B_0/1 as for H534 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=616 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.6] FS=0 1/UHAB
H559 AnSwitch9 C_Inp0 as for H535 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=617 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.6] FS=0 1/UHAB
H560 AnSwitch9 C_Inp1 as for H536 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=618 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

4-60 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
Analog signal switch 10 F1220
Function: Depending on the state of the binector selected in H561, the connector selected in H562 (with binector state = 0) or in H563
(with binector state = 1) is applied to the input of connector K150

H561 AnSwitch10 B_0/1 as for H534 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=619 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.6] FS=0 1/UHAB
H562 AnSwitch10C_Inp0 as for H535 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=61A Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.6] FS=0 1/UHAB
H563 AnSwitch10C_Inp1 as for H536 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=61B Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [29.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

Simple ramp-function generator (F900)

Notes: The output (y) is set to 0 when "Set ramp-generator output to zero" is selected and POWER ON
The output (y) is "frozen" at the current value when "Stop ramp-function generator" is selected
The ramp-up and ramp-down times are set to zero when "Bypass ramp-function generator" is selected
The output is applied to the input of connector K151.

Starting integrator:
The simple ramp-function generator contains a flip-flop. The output of this flip-flop is set to log. "0" (ramp-generator initial start)
after "POWER ON" or after the generator has been enabled. When the generator output reaches the value of the input quantity
(y=x) for the first time, the flip-flop output switches to log. "1" and remains in this state until the generator is next enabled. This
output is linked to the input of binector B194. By setting H575=194, it is possible to connect this binector to the "Bypass ramp-
function generator" function and thus to implement a starting integrator.

H570 SmpRFG C_Inp 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* Selection of connector to be injected as the input quantity (x) for the FS=0 1/UHAB
ramp-function generator

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=622 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [30.1]

H571 SmpRFG RU-Time_s (ramp-up time) 0.00 to 300.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=623 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [30.3] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H572 SmpRFG RD-Time_s (ramp-down time) 0.00 to 300.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=624 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [30.3] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H573 SmpRFG B_Enable 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to control "Enable ramp-function generator" FS=1 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0 (set generator output to zero)

1= Fixed value 1 (enable ramp-function generator)
2= Fixed value 0 (set generator output to zero)
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=625 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [30.1]

H574 SmpRFG B_Stop 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to control "Stop ramp-function generator" FS=0 1/UHAB

0 = Fixed value 0
1 = Fixed value 1 (ramp-generator stopped)
2 = Fixed value 0
3 = Binector B003
4 = Binector B004
etc.
PNU=626 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [30.1]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-61

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H575 SmpRFG B_Bypass 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to control "Bypass ramp-function generator" FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1 (ramp-generator bypassed)
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=627 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [30.1]

Dead zone (F570)

Function: The part of the input quantity (x) selected in H576 which has an absolute value in excess of the threshold for the dead zone
(H577) is applied to the output (y). The output is applied to connector K152.
H576 DeadZ C_Input 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector which must be injected as the input quantity (x) FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=628 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [30.1]

H577 Dead Zone 0.00 to 100.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=629 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [30.2] [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR

Characteristic blocks (F760, F930, F1330)

Characteristic block 1 F760
Function: The shape of the characteristic can be defined in 10 points:
x values: H581.01 to .10
associated y values: H582.01 to .10

When x= -200.00% to x = value acc. to H581.01: y = value acc. to H582.01

When x = value acc. to H581.10 to x = 200.00%: y = value acc. to H582.10

The output (y) is applied to connector K153.

Note: The "distance" between any two adjacent x or y values must not be more than 199.99 % or else the desired characteristic
shape will not be obtained.
H580 Charact1 C_Inp. 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of connector which must be injected as the input quantity (x) FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=62C Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [30.6]

H581 Charact1 xValues (x values) -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 10 1/UHABR
[%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
i01: 1st curve point
i02: 2nd curve point
...
i10: 10th curve point

PNU=62D Hex; Type= I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [30.7]

4-62 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H582 Charact1 yValues (y values) -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 10 1/UHABR
[%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
i01: 1st curve point
i02: 2nd curve point
...
i10: 10th curve point

PNU=62E Hex; Type= I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [30.7]

Characteristic block 2 F930

Function: The shape of the characteristic can be defined in 10 points:
x values: H584.01 to .10
associated y values: H585.01 to .10

When x= -200.00% to x = value acc. to H584.01: y = value acc. to H585.01

When x = value acc. to H584.10 to x = 200.00%: y = value acc. to H585.10

The output (y) is applied to connector K154.

Note: The "distance" between any two adjacent x or y values must not be more than 199.99 % or else the desired characteristic
shape will not be obtained.

H583 Charact2 C_Inp. as for H580 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=62F Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [30.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

H584 Charact2 xValues as for H581 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 10 1/UHABR

PNU=630 Hex; Type= I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [30.7] [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H585 Charact2 yValues as for H582 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 10 1/UHABR
PNU=631 Hex; Type= I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [30.7] [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR

Characteristic block 3 F1330

Function: The shape of the characteristic can be defined in 10 points:
x values: H587.01 to .10
associated y values: H588.01 to .10

When x= -200.00% to x = value acc. to H587.01: y = value acc. to H588.01

When x = value acc. to H587.10 to x = 200.00%: y = value acc. to H588.10

The output (y) is applied to connector K155.

Note: The "distance" between any two adjacent x or y values must not be more than 199.99 % or else the desired characteristic
shape will not be obtained.

H586 Charact3 C_Inp. as for H580 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=632 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [30.6] FS=0 1/UHAB
H587 Charact3 xValues as for H581 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 10 1/UHABR
PNU=633 Hex; Type= I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [30.7] [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H588 Charact3 yValues as for H582 -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 10 1/UHABR
PNU=634 Hex; Type= I2; Normalization: 1==0.01 %; Block diag.: [30.7] [%] FS=0.00 1/UHABR

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-63

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)

Logic functions
AND gate with 3 inputs (1) (output = B125) F500
H590 AND1 B_Inp 1-3 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector which must be applied to the appropriate input of the FS=1 1/UHAB
AND gate

i01: Selection for AND gate, input 1

i02: Selection for AND gate, input 2
i03: Selection for AND gate, input 3

Settings:
0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=636 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.1]

AND gate with 3 inputs (2) (output = B126) F600

H591 AND2 B_Inp 1-3 as for H590 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=637 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.1] FS=1 1/UHAB

AND gate with 3 inputs (3) (output = B127) F690

H592 AND3 B_Inp 1-3 as for H590 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=638 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.1] FS=1 1/UHAB

AND gate with 3 inputs (4) (output = B128) F770

H593 AND4 B_Inp 1-3 as for H590 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=639 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.1] FS=1 1/UHAB

AND gate with 3 inputs (5) (output = B129) F850

H594 AND5 B_Inp 1-3 as for H590 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=63A Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.1] FS=1 1/UHAB

AND gate with 3 inputs (6) (output = B130) F870

H595 AND6 B_Inp 1-3 as for H590 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=63B Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.1] FS=1 1/UHAB

AND gate with 3 inputs (7) (output = B131) F980

H596 AND7 B_Inp 1-3 as for H590 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=63C Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.1] FS=1 1/UHAB

AND gate with 3 inputs (8) (output = B132) F1050

H597 AND8 B_Inp 1-3 as for H590 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=63D Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.1] FS=1 1/UHAB

AND gate with 3 inputs (9) (output = B133) F1100

H598 AND9 B_Inp 1-3 as for H590 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=63E Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.3] FS=1 1/UHAB

AND gate with 3 inputs (10) (output = B134) F1180

H599 AND10 B_Inp 1-3 as for H590 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=63F Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.3] FS=1 1/UHAB

4-64 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
AND gate with 3 inputs (11) (output = B135) F1210
H600 AND11 B_Inp 1-3 as for H590 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=640 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.3] FS=1 1/UHAB

AND gate with 3 inputs (12) (output = B136) F1420

H601 AND12 B_Inp 1-3 as for H590 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=641 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.3] FS=1 1/UHAB

AND gate with 3 inputs (13) (output = B137) F1490

H602 AND13 B_Inp 1-3 as for H590 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=642 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.3] FS=1 1/UHAB

AND gate with 3 inputs (14) (output = B138) F1510

H603 AND14 B_Inp 1-3 as for H590 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=643 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.3] FS=1 1/UHAB

AND gate with 3 inputs (15) (output = B139) F1550

H604 AND15 B_Inp 1-3 as for H590 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=644 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.3] FS=1 1/UHAB

AND gate with 3 inputs (16) (output = B140) F1570

H605 AND16 B_Inp 1-3 as for H590 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=645 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.3] FS=1 1/UHAB

OR gate with 3 inputs (1) (output = B141) F510

H606 OR1 B_Inp 1-3 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* FS=0 1/UHAB
Selection of binector which must be applied to the appropriate input of the
OR gate

i01: Selection for OR gate, input 1

i02: Selection for OR gate, input 2
i03: Selection for OR gate, input 3

Settings:
0 = Fixed value 0
1 = Fixed value 1
2 = Fixed value 0
3 = Binector B003
4 = Binector B004
etc.

PNU=646 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.6]

OR gate with 3 inputs (2) (output = B142) F610

H607 OR2 B_Inp 1-3 as for H606 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=647 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

OR gate with 3 inputs (3) (output = B143) F790

H608 OR3 B_Inp 1-3 as for H606 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=648 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

OR gate with 3 inputs (4) (output = B144) F990

H609 OR4 B_Inp 1-3 as for H606 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=649 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-65

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
OR gate with 3 inputs (5) (output = B145) F1260
H610 OR5 B_Inp 1-3 as for H606 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=64A Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

OR gate with 3 inputs (6) (output = B146) F1340

H611 OR6 B_Inp 1-3 as for H606 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=64B Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

OR gate with 3 inputs (7) (output = B147) F1360

H612 OR7 B_Inp 1-3 as for H606 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=64C Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

OR gate with 3 inputs (8) (output = B148) F1500

H613 OR8 B_Inp 1-3 as for H606 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=64D Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [32.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

Inverter 1 (output = B149) F660

H614 INV1 B_Inp 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector which must be inverted FS=0 1/UHAB

0 = Fixed value 0
1 = Fixed value 1
2 = Fixed value 0
3 = Binector B003
4 = Binector B004
etc.

PNU=64E Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [33.1]

Inverter 2 (output = B150) F700

H615 INV2 B_Inp as for H614 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=64F Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [33.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

Inverter 3 (output = B151) F710

H616 INV3 B_Inp as for H614 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=650 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [33.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

Inverter 4 (output = B152) F890

H617 INV4 B_Inp as for H614 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=651 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [33.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

Inverter 5 (output = B153) F970

H618 INV5 B_Inp as for H614 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=652 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [33.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

Inverter 6 (output = B154) F1090

H619 INV6 B_Inp as for H614 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=653 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [33.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

Inverter 7 (output = B155) F1520

H620 INV7 B_Inp as for H614 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=654 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [33.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

Inverter 8 (output = B156) F1560

H621 INV8 B_Inp as for H614 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=655 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [33.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

4-66 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)

EXCLUSIVE-OR gate with 2 inputs (1) (output = B157) F520

H622 EXOR1 B_Inp 1-2 0 to 200 Ind: 2 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector which must be applied to the appropriate input of the FS=0 1/UHAB
EXCLUSIVE-OR gate

i01: Selection for EXCLUSIVE-OR gate, input 1

i02: Selection for EXCLUSIVE-OR gate, input 2

Settings:
0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.
PNU=656 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [33.4]

EXCLUSIVE-OR gate with 2 inputs (2) (output = B158) F620

H623 EXOR2 B_Inp 1-2 as for H622 0 to 200 Ind: 2 1/UHABR
* PNU=657 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [33.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

EXCLUSIVE-OR gate with 2 inputs (3) (output = B159) F1410

H624 EXOR3 B_Inp 1-2 as for H622 0 to 200 Ind: 2 1/UHABR
* PNU=658 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [33.4] FS=0 1/UHAB

NAND gate with 3 inputs (1) (output = B160) F540

H625 NAND1 B_Inp 1-3 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector which must be applied to the appropriate input of the FS=1 1/UHAB
NAND gate

i01: Selection for NAND gate, input 1

i02: Selection for NAND gate, input 2
i03: Selection for NAND gate, input 3

Settings:
0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.
PNU=659 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [33.7]

NAND gate with 3 inputs (2) (output = B161) F800

H626 NAND2 B_Inp 1-3 as for H625 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=65A Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [33.7] FS=1 1/UHAB

NAND gate with 3 inputs (3) (output = B162) F1040

H627 NAND3 B_Inp 1-3 as for H625 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=65B Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [33.7] FS=1 1/UHAB

NAND gate with 3 inputs (4) (output = B163) F1250

H628 NAND4 B_Inp 1-3 as for H625 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=65C Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [33.7] FS=1 1/UHAB

NAND gate with 3 inputs (5) (output = B164) F1350

H629 NAND5 B_Inp 1-3 as for H625 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=65D Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [33.7] FS=1 1/UHAB

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-67

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
NAND gate with 3 inputs (6) (output = B165) F1480
H630 NAND6 B_Inp 1-3 as for H625 0 to 200 Ind: 3 1/UHABR
* PNU=65E Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [33.7] FS=1 1/UHAB

RS flipflops (F880, F940, F1120, F1270, F1300, F1430, F1440)

RS flipflop 1 F880
Function: RS flipflop with SET (Q=1) and RESET (Q=0) (priority: 1. RESET. 2. SET). RESET state is assumed after POWER ON.
Outputs: Q = B166. Q̄ = B167
H631 RS-FlFl1 B_SET 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector which must be applied to the SET input of the RS FS=0 1/UHAB
flipflop

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=65F Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.1]

H632 RS-FlFl1 B_RESET 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector which must be applied to the RESET input of the RS FS=0 1/UHAB
flipflop

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=660 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.1]

RS flipflop 2 F940
Function: RS flipflop with SET (Q=1) and RESET (Q=0) (priority: 1. RESET. 2. SET). RESET state is assumed after POWER ON.
Outputs: Q = B168. Q̄ = B169
H633 RS-FlFl2 B_SET as for H631 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=661 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.1] FS=0 1/UHAB
H634 RS-FlFl2 B_RESET as for H632 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=662 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

RS flipflop 3 F1120
Function: RS flipflop with SET (Q=1) and RESET (Q=0) (priority: 1. RESET. 2. SET). RESET state is assumed after POWER ON.
Outputs: Q = B170. Q̄ = B171
H635 RS-FlFl3 B_SET as for H631 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=663 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.1] FS=0 1/UHAB
H636 RS-FlFl3 B_RESET as for H632 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=664 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

RS flipflop 4 F1270
Function: RS flipflop with SET (Q=1) and RESET (Q=0) (priority: 1. RESET. 2. SET). RESET state is assumed after POWER ON.
Outputs: Q = B172. Q̄ = B173
H637 RS-FlFl4 B_SET as for H631 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=665 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.3] FS=0 1/UHAB
H638 RS-FlFl4 B_RESET as for H632 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=666 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.3] FS=0 1/UHAB

4-68 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
RS flipflop 5 F1300
Function: RS flipflop with SET (Q=1) and RESET (Q=0) (priority: 1. RESET. 2. SET). RESET state is assumed after POWER ON.
Outputs: Q = B174. Q̄ = B175
H639 RS-FlFl5 B_SET as for H631 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=667 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.3] FS=0 1/UHAB
H640 RS-FlFl5 B_RESET as for H632 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=668 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.3] FS=0 1/UHAB

RS flipflop 6 F1430
Function: RS flipflop with SET (Q=1) and RESET (Q=0) (priority: 1. RESET. 2. SET). RESET state is assumed after POWER ON.
Outputs: Q = B176. Q̄ = B177
H641 RS-FlFl6 B_SET as for H631 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=669 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.3] FS=0 1/UHAB
H642 RS-FlFl6 B_RESET as for H632 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=66A Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.3] FS=0 1/UHAB

RS flipflop 7 F1440
Function: RS flipflop with SET (Q=1) and RESET (Q=0) (priority: 1. RESET. 2. SET). RESET state is assumed after POWER ON.
Outputs: Q = B178. Q̄ = B179
H643 RS-FlFl7 B_SET as for H631 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=66B Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.5] FS=0 1/UHAB
H644 RS-FlFl7 B_RESET as for H632 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=66C Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

D flipflops (F820, F1280)

D flipflop 1 F820

Function: D flipflop with RESET (Q=0), SET (Q=D) and STORE (Q=D on transition from 0 to 1) (priority: 1. RESET. 2. SET. 3. STORE).
RESET state is assumed after POWER ON.
Outputs: Q = B180. Q̄ = B181

H645 D-FlFl1 B_DINP 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* Selection of binector to be applied to input D FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=66D Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.7]

H646 D-FlFl1 B_RESET 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to control the RESET function FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=66E Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.7]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-69

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H647 D-FlFl1 B_SET 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to control the SET function FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=66F Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.7]

H648 D-FlFl1 B_STORE 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to control the STORE function FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=670 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.7]

D flipflop 2 F1280
Function: D flipflop with RESET (Q=0). SET (Q=D) and STORE (Q=D on transition from 0 to 1) (priority: 1. RESET. 2. SET. 3.
STORE).
RESET state is assumed after POWER ON.
Outputs: Q = B182. Q̄ = B183
H649 D-FlFl2 B_DINP as for H645 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=671 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.7] FS=0 1/UHAB
H650 D-FlFl2 B_RESET as for H646 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=672 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.7] FS=0 1/UHAB
H651 D-FlFl2 B_SET as for H647 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=673 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.7] FS=0 1/UHAB
H652 D-FlFl2 B_STORE as for H648 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=674 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [34.7] FS=0 1/UHAB

Timers (F530, F1110, F1170, F1200, F1290)

Timer 1 (output = B184) F530
H660 Timer1 B_Input 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to be applied to the input FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=67C Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.1]

H661 Timer1 Time_s (time) 0.00 to 600.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR
PNU=67D Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [35.2] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHABR

4-70 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H662 Timer1 Mode 0 to 7 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of mode for timer FS=0 1/UHAB

0 = ON delay ONdly Q
1 = ON delay, output signal inverted ONdly /Q
2 = OFF delay OFFdly Q
3 = OFF delay, output signal inverted OFFdly /Q
4 = ON/OFF delay ON/OFFdly Q
5 = ON/OFF delay, output signal inverted ON/OFFdl /Q
6 = Pulse generator with positive edge triggering Monofl Q
7 = Pulse generator with positive edge triggering, output signal Monofl /Q
inverted

PNU=67E Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.2]

Timer 2 (output = B185) F1110

H663 Timer2 B_Input as for H660 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=67F Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.3] FS=0 1/UHAB

H664 Timer2 Time_s (time) 0.000 to 60.000 Ind: None 1/UHABR

PNU=680 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.001 s; Block diag.: [35.4] [s] FS=0.000 1/UHABR
H665 Timer2 Mode as for H662 0 to 7 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=681 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

Timer 3 (output = B186) F1170

H666 Timer3 B_Input as for H660 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=682 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

H667 Timer3 Time_s (time) 0.00 to 600.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR

PNU=683 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [35.7] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H668 Timer3 Mode as for H662 0 to 7 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=684 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.7] FS=0 1/UHAB

Timer 4 (output = B187) F1200

H669 Timer4 B_Input as for H660 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=685 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.1] FS=0 1/UHAB

H670 Timer4 Time_s (time) 0.00 to 600.00 Ind: None 1/UHABR

PNU=686 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01 s; Block diag.: [35.2] [s] FS=0.00 1/UHABR
H671 Timer4 Mode as for H662 0 to 7 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=687 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.2] FS=0 1/UHAB

Timer 5 (output = B188) F1290

H672 Timer5 B_Input as for H660 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=688 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.3] FS=0 1/UHAB

H673 Timer5 Time_s (time) 0.000 to 60.000 Ind: None 1/UHABR

PNU=689 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.001 s; Block diag.: [35.4] [s] FS=0.000 1/UHABR
H674 Timer5 Mode as for H662 0 to 7 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=68A Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-71

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)

Binary signal switches (F560, F630, F1000, F1140)

Binary signal switch 1 F560

Function: Depending on the state of the (switching) binector selected in H675, the binector selected in H676 (with binector state = 0) or
in H677 (with binector state = 1) is applied to the output (binector B189)

H675 BiSwit1 B_0/1 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* Selection of binector to control the switchover operation (switching FS=0 1/UHAB
binector).

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=68B Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.1]

H676 BiSwit1 B_Inp0 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to be injected as the input quantity when switching FS=0 1/UHAB
binector = 0

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=68C Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.1]

H677 BiSwit1 B_Inp1 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to be injected as the input quantity when switching FS=0 1/UHAB
binector = 1

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=68D Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.1]

Binary signal switch 2 F630

Function: Depending on the state of the (switching) binector selected in H678, the binector selected in H679 (with binector state = 0) or
in H680 (with binector state = 1) is applied to the output (binector B190)

H678 BiSwit2 B_0/1 as for H675 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=68E Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.3] FS=0 1/UHAB
H679 BiSwit2 B_Inp0 as for H676 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=68F Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.3] FS=0 1/UHAB
H680 BiSwit2 B_Inp1 as for H677 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=690 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.3] FS=0 1/UHAB

Binary signal switch 3 F1000

Function: Depending on the state of the (switching) binector selected in H681, the binector selected in H682 (with binector state = 0) or
in H683 (with binector state = 1) is applied to the output (binector B191)

H681 BiSwit3 B_0/1 as for H675 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=691 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.5] FS=0 1/UHAB
H682 BiSwit3 B_Inp0 as for H676 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=692 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.5] FS=0 1/UHAB
H683 BiSwit3 B_Inp1 as for H677 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* PNU=693 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.5] FS=0 1/UHAB

4-72 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)

Binary signal switch 4 F1140

Function: Depending on the state of the (switching) binector selected in H684, the binector selected in H685 (with binector state = 0) or
in H686 (with binector state = 1) is applied to the output (binector B192)

H684 BiSwit4 B_0/1 as for H675 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=694 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

H685 BiSwit4 B_Inp0 as for H676 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=695 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

H686 BiSwit4 B_Inp1 as for H677 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* PNU=696 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [35.6] FS=0 1/UHAB

Velocity/speed calculators (B50, F1230)

Speed/velocity calculator B50
D∗ π ∗ n _ rated n _ act
Function: v _ act = ∗
i 100%

v_act Actual velocity (→ K156)

D Diameter (H693)
n_rated Rated speed (H694)
i Gear ratio (H692)
n_act Actual speed (H690)

H690 n>v_Calc C_nact 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* Selection of connector which must be injected as the actual speed FS=0 1/UHAB
(n_act)

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=69A Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [31.2]

Velocity/speed calculator F1230

v _ set∗ i
Function: n _ set = ∗100%
D∗ π ∗ n_ rated

n_set Setpoint speed (→ K157)

D Diameter (H693)
n_rated Rated speed (H694)
i Gear ratio (H692)
v_set Setpoint velocity (H691)

H691 n>v_Calc C_vset 0 to 180 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* Selection of connector which must be injected as the setpoint velocity FS=0 1/UHAB
(v_set)

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 100 %
2= Fixed value 0
3= Connector K003
4= Connector K004
etc.

PNU=69B Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [31.2]

Note: Parameters H692 to H694 are included in the switchover parameter set; they each have four different datasets which can be
selected by means of the parameter set switchover function
H692 v-n_Calc i g-rat (gear ratio) 1.00 to 300.00 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
PNU=69C Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.01; Block diag.: [31.4] FS=1.00 1/UHABR

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-73

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H693 n>v_Calc Diam (diameter) 10.0 to 3200.0 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
PNU=69D Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==0.1 mm; Block diag.: [31.5] [mm] FS=216.0 1/UHABR
H694 n>v_Calc n-rated (rated speed) 600 to 4000 Ind: 4 1/UHABR
[rev/min] FS=1450 1/UHABR
If asynchronous motors are used, the synchronous speed ns should
normally be entered here
120 * line frequency _ in_ [Hz]
ns =
no. of poles
Example: ns = 1500 [rev/min] for 50 Hz line frequency and 4-pole
machine
-1
PNU=69E Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 min ; Block diag.: [31.5]

Parameter set switchover (F200)

Function: The index for the switchover parameter set is selected with parameters H700 and H701:

x2 x1  Index x1 ... State of binector selected in H700

0 0  .01 x2 ... State of binector selected in H701
0 1  .02
1 0  .03
1 1  .04

H700 ParamSwtch B_x1 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR

* Selection of binector to be injected as x1 FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=6A4 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [36.1]

H701 ParamSwtch B_x2 0 to 200 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Selection of binector to be injected as x2 FS=0 1/UHAB

0= Fixed value 0
1= Fixed value 1
2= Fixed value 0
3= Binector B003
4= Binector B004
etc.

PNU=6A5 Hex; Type= O2; Normalization: 1==1; Block diag.: [36.1]

4-74 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H703 Copy Parameter 011 to 144 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* This parameter allows parameter set 1, 2, 3 or 4 to be copied to FS=012 1/UHAB
parameter set 1, 2, 3 or 4.
Parameter Hxxx i01 is the setting value for parameter set 1
Parameter Hxxx i02 is the setting value for parameter set 2
Parameter Hxxx i03 is the setting value for parameter set 3
Parameter Hxxx i04 is the setting value for parameter set 4

0xy Do nothing, automatic reset value at the end of a copy

operation

1xy The contents of parameter set x (x = 1. 2. 3 or 4) are copied

to parameter set y (y = 1. 2. 3 or 4) (parameter set x remains
unchanged, the original contents of parameter set y are
overwritten).
x and y are the parameter set numbers (1. 2. 3 or 4) of the
source and destination parameter sets respectively.

A copy operation is started by switching H703 into "parameter" mode

when H703 = 1xy has been set and the converter is not in the "RUN"
operational state.
To indicate that a copy operation is in progress, the numbers of the Hxxx
parameters currently being processed are output sequentially as hex
numbers on the parameter display as the "parameter value" during the
copy operation. On completion of the copy operation, H703 is
automatically reset to H703 = 0xy.

PNU=6A7Hex; Type=L2; Normalization: 1==1Hex; Block diag.: [36.8]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-75

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)

Switchover of task processing sequence

Function: The function blocks F200 to 1650 are processed within the computing cycle in the sequence determined by parameters H751
and H752:

⇓ 1. Function block with task number according to H751 Index.001

⇓ ...
⇓ 116. Function block with task number according to H751 Index.116
⇓ 117. Function block with task number according to H752 Index.001
⇓ ...
⇓ 146. Function block with task number according to H752 Index.030

In the factory setting (standard sequence), the task numbers are arranged in ascending order (F200, F210, ...).

Change in processing sequence:

If a new task number is entered (i.e. shifted from another location) in a certain index of H751 or H752, then the new task
processing sequence is defined such that the function block previously entered in this index will be processed after the new
block to be entered. To close the gap left in the old location of the function block to be shifted, the following task numbers are
shifted up one place.

Note: If a non-existent task number is entered in parameter H751 or H752, the number entered is rounded down to the next lower
legal number.

Example: Assuming that the standard sequence setting is currently valid, the processing sequence must be altered such that function
block F260 (fixed setpoint of parameter H215) will be processed immediately after F210 (fixed setpoint of parameter H210):
Task number 260 must be entered in the index in which the task number which has been processed after F210 until now (i.e.
H751.003=dzt. 200) is currently entered. The task numbers 220 to 250 are automatically shifted up by one index in parameter
H751.

Function- Processing- Function- Processing-

block F... sequence block F... sequence

280 H751.Index 009 280 H751.Index 009

270 H751.Index 008 270 H751.Index 008
260 H751.Index 007 250 H751.Index 007
250 H751.Index 006 240 H751.Index 006
240 H751.Index 005 230 H751.Index 005
230 H751.Index 004 220 H751.Index 004
220 H751.Index 003 260 H751.Index 003
210 H751.Index 002 210 H751.Index 002
200 H751.Index 001 200 H751.Index 001

Example: Assuming that the standard sequence setting is currently valid, the processing sequence must be altered such that function
block F210 (fixed setpoint H210) will be processed after F240 (fixed setpoint parameter H213): Task number 210 must be
entered in the index in which the task number which has been processed after F240 (i.e. H751.006 = dzt. 250) is currently
entered. The task numbers in the indices above it are shifted up by one index; the task numbers above the gap which has
been created are then automatically shifted one index down.

Function- Processing- Function- Processing- Function- Processing-

block F... sequence block F... sequence block F... sequence
280
280 H751.Index 009 270 H751.Index 009 280 H751.Index 009
270 H751.Index 008 260 H751.Index 008 270 H751.Index 008
260 H751.Index 007 250 H751.Index 007 260 H751.Index 007
250 H751.Index 006 210 H751.Index 006 250 H751.Index 006
240 H751.Index 005 240 H751.Index 005 210 H751.Index 005
230 H751.Index 004 230 H751.Index 004 240 H751.Index 004
220 H751.Index 003 220 H751.Index 003 230 H751.Index 003
210 H751.Index 002 H751.Index 002 220 H751.Index 002
200 H751.Index 001 200 H751.Index 001 200 H751.Index 001

Note: If you wish to insert a function block last in the processing sequence, you need to do so in two steps:
1. Enter the task number of the function block to be shifted in H752.index 030
After you have pressed the P (shift) key, this number will be inserted in the last but one position
(→ in H752. Index 029)
2. Shift task number entered in H752.index 030 to H752.index 029
After you press the P (shift) key, this task number will be shifted to the last but one place and the task number from
H752.Index 029 to the last place (→ in H752. Index 030)

4-76 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H750 FB Sequence 0 to 1 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Select implementation of standard processing sequence or optimum FS=0 1/UHAB
sequence:
0 Return Return
1 Implement standard processing sequence: Standard
Task numbers (F200 to F1650) are entered in ascending order
in parameters H751 and H752. The parameter is then
automatically reset to 0.
2 Implement optimum sequence: (starting with software version Optimum
1.1)
Task numbers (F200 to F1650) are entered in the order which
results in the shortest possible dead times in parameters H751
and H752. The parameter is then automatically reset to 0.
During the optimization run the numbers of the tasks appear
one after the other on the parameter display while they are
being processed as "Parameter value" (activity display).

PNU=6D6 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1

H751 FB Sequence_1 200 to 1650 Ind: 116 1/UHABR
* Processing sequence for the foreground tasks F200 to F1650 WE: 1/UHAB
Standard
i001: Select task no. for 1st position in processing sequence sequence
i002: Select task no. for 2nd position in processing sequence
...
i116: Select task no. for 116th position in processing sequence

PNU=6D7 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1

H752 FB Sequence_2 200 to 1650 Ind: 30 1/UHABR
* Processing sequence for the foreground tasks F200 to F1650 WE: 1/UHAB
Standard
i001: Select task no. for 117th position in processing sequence sequence
i002: Select task no. for 118th position in processing sequence
...
i030: Select task no. for 146th position in processing sequence

PNU=6D8 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1

System parameters
H917 Spontaneous messages (starting with software version 1.1) 0 to 7 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* It is possible to select the interfaces via which active parameters will be FS=0 1/UHAB
output after their settings have been altered:

0 None none
1 Output via DPRAM interface (to basic unit) to bas.unit
2 Output via USS interface to TB USS
4 Output via COM-BOARD to CB/SCB

Setting information:
The sum of the parameter values which are assigned to the desired output
interfaces for spontaneous messages is entered in the parameter.
PNU=77D Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-77

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
d951 FaultTextList Ind: 32 1/UHABR
List of fault texts. Every fault text is stored under the index corresponding
to its fault number.

i001 (F116): Fault H312

i002 (F117): Fault H297
i003 (F118): Fault H305
i004 (F119): COM Connint
i005 (F120): Fault H260
i006 (F121): Fault H261
i007 (F122): Fault H262
i008 (F123): Fault H263
i009 (F124): F124
i010 (F125): F125
i011 (F126): F126
i012 (F127): F127
i013 (F128): F128
i014 (F129): F129
i015 (F130): F130
i016 (F131): F131
i017 (F132): F132
i018 (F133): F133
i019 (F134): F134
i020 (F135):: F135
i021 (F136): F136
i022 (F137): F137
i023 (F138): F138
i024 (F139): F139
i025 (F140): F140
i026 (F141): F141
i027 (F142): DataSavErr
i028 (F143): ADCAdjErr
i029 (F144): EEPROM def.
i030 (F145): ParamError
i031 (F146): Watchdog
i032 (F147): Intern.Err

PNU=79F Hex; Type= O2 ; Normalization: 1==1

d959 Alarm A97-112 Ind: None 1/UHABR
When one of the alarms A97 to A112 occurs, the bar indicated in the
diagram below lights up on the 7-segment display

A112 A111 A110 A109 A108 A107 A106 A105

A104 A103 A102 A101 A100 A99 A98 A97

PNU=7A7 Hex; Type=V2; Normalization: 1==1

d960 Alarm A113-128 Ind: None 1/UHABR
When one of the alarms A113 to A128 occurs, the bar indicated in the
diagram below lights up on the 7-segment display

A128 A127 A126 A125 A124 A123 A122 A121

A120 A119 A118 A117 A116 A115 A114 A113

PNU=7A8 Hex; Type=V2; Normalization: 1==1

4-78 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Parameter List

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
H970 FactorySett H Pr 0 to 1 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* Parameter reset to factory setting for H parameters (see Chapter 3.9) FS=1 1/UHAB

0: Parameter reset: All parameters of the technology board (H FactSetting

parameters) are reset to their original values (factory settings).
The parameter is then automatically reset to "1".
1: No parameter reset Return

While the parameters are being reset to their factory settings, the numbers
1xxx of the Hxxx parameters currently being reset are output sequentially
on the parameter display as the "parameter value" to indicate that the
operation is in progress.
PNU=7B2Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1
H971 EEPROM Transfer (store H parameters in EEPROM) 0 to 1 Ind: None 1/UHABR
* This function is edge-triggered, i.e. only when parameter H971 changes FS=0 1/UHAB
state from 0 to 1 are the values of the technology parameters (H
parameters) transferred from the RAM to the non-volatile storage
(EEPROM) (if H971 stays in the "1" state, no further store operation is
executed).
While the parameters are being transferred from the RAM to the
EEPROM, the numbers 1xxx of the Hxxx parameters currently being
transferred are output sequentially on the parameter display as the
"parameter value" to indicate that the operation is in progress. On
completion of transfer, H971 is automatically reset to "0".
The power supply to the electronics can be switched off as soon as
H971=0 is displayed.

Note: This function is relevant only for parameter changes via a

serial interface (e.g. via SIMOVIS). When parameter setting
changes are made via the PMU, the parameters are always
stored in a non-volatile memory.
PNU=7B3 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1

List of existing parameters (d and H parameters) on the technology board

Function: Every parameter (array) has 116 elements in word size (16 bits). Each element contains a parameter number. The elements of
a parameter are filled contiguously with ascending parameter numbers. If more than 115 parameter numbers need to be
stored, the parameter number with which the number list is continued is stored in element 116. For example, parameter
number d981 is stored in the 116th element of D980. The parameter numbers are stored in the representation used normally
on the serial interfaces, i.e. with an offset of 1000 (decimal), e.g. H514 is displayed as "1514".

d980 ExistT100-Param. (existing TECH BOARD parameter 1) 1000 to 1999 Ind: 116 1/UHABR
PNU=7BC Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 (=H/d000 to H/d999)
d981 ExistT100-Param. (existing TECH BOARD parameter 2) 1000 to 1999 Ind: 116 1/UHABR
PNU=7BD Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 (=H/d000 to H/d999)
d982 ExistT100-Param. (existing TECH BOARD parameter 3) 1000 to 1999 Ind: 116 1/UHABR
PNU=7BE Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 (=H/d000 to H/d999)
d983 ExistT100-Param. (existing TECH BOARD parameter 4) 1000 to 1999 Ind: 116 1/UHABR
PNU=7BF Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 (=H/d000 to H/d999)
d984 ExistT100-Param. (existing TECH BOARD parameter 5) 1000 to 1999 Ind: 116 1/UHABR
PNU=7C0 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 (=H/d000 to H/d999)
d985 ExistT100-Param. (existing TECH BOARD parameter 6) 1000 to 1999 Ind: 116 1/UHABR
PNU=7C1 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 (=H/d000 to H/d999)
d986 ExistT100-Param. (existing TECH BOARD parameter 7) 1000 to 1999 Ind: 116 1/UHABR
PNU=7C2 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 (=H/d000 to H/d999)
d987 ExistT100-Param. (existing TECH BOARD parameter 8) 1000 to 1999 Ind: 116 1/UHABR
PNU=7C3 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 (=H/d000 to H/d999)
d988 ExistT100-Param. (existing TECH BOARD parameter 9) 1000 to 1999 Ind: 116 1/UHABR
PNU=7C4 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 (=H/d000 to H/d999)

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 4-79

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Parameter List 02.99

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range No. of Read

[unit] indices Write
* : Ack. Description Selection text Factory (Access /
par. setting State)
Modified parameters on the technology board (H parameters)
Function: Every parameter (array) has 116 elements in word size (16 bits). Each element contains a parameter number. The elements of
a parameter are filled contiguously and in ascending order with the numbers of parameters which have been modified as
compared to the factory setting. If more than 115 parameter numbers need to be stored, the parameter number with which the
number list is continued is stored in element 116. For example, parameter number d991 is stored in the 116th element of
D990.
The number of the last modified parameter is followed by a "0" end label under the next index of d990.
The parameter numbers are stored in the representation used normally on the serial interfaces, i.e. with an offset of 1000
(decimal), e.g. H514 is displayed as "1514".
d990 ModifT100-Param. (modified TECH BOARD parameter 1) 1000 to 1999 Ind: 116 1/UHABR
PNU=7C6 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 (=H/d000 to H/d999)
d991 ModifT100-Param. (modified TECH BOARD parameter 2) 1000 to 1999 Ind: 116 1/UHABR
PNU=7C7 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 (=H/d000 to H/d999)
d992 ModifT100-Param. (modified TECH BOARD parameter 3) 1000 to 1999 Ind: 116 1/UHABR
PNU=7C8 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 (=H/d000 to H/d999)
d993 ModifT100-Param. (modified TECH BOARD parameter 4) 1000 to 1999 Ind: 116 1/UHABR
PNU=7C9 Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 (=H/d000 to H/d999)
d994 ModifT100-Param. (modified TECH BOARD parameter 5) 1000 to 1999 Ind: 116 1/UHABR
PNU=7CA Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 (=H/d000 to H/d999)
d995 ModifT100-Param. (modified TECH BOARD parameter 6) 1000 to 1999 Ind: 116 1/UHABR
PNU=7CB Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 (=H/d000 to H/d999)
d996 ModifT100-Param. (modified TECH BOARD parameter 7) 1000 to 1999 Ind: 116 1/UHABR
PNU=7CC Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 (=H/d000 to H/d999)
d997 ModifT100-Param. (modified TECH BOARD parameter 8) 1000 to 1999 Ind: 116 1/UHABR
PNU=7CD Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 (=H/d000 to H/d999)
d998 ModifT100-Param. (modified TECH BOARD parameter 9) 1000 to 1999 Ind: 116 1/UHABR
PNU=7CE Hex; Type=O2; Normalization: 1==1 (=H/d000 to H/d999)

4-80 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Connectors and Binectors

5 List of Connectors and Binectors

5.1 Connector list

The following number notation applies to all connectors:
According to the internal software notation, 100% corresponds to the number 4000 hex = 16384 dec. The value
range is -200.00% ... +199.99% corresponding to 8000 hex ... 7FFF hex. The connectors are transferred in this
internal software notation via the serial interfaces.

Connector Name, Description Selection Text Normalization Block

Diag.

Fixed values
K000 Fixed value 0 FixValue 0 [8.7]
K001 Fixed value 100 % FixValue100 16384==100% [8.7]
K002 Fixed value 0 or special function specified in each case Block-spec.

Analog inputs
K003 Analog input, terminal 50 (Term. 50, 51) AE50 value 16384==100% [2.8]
K004 Analog input, terminal 52 (Term. 52, 53) AE52 value 16384==100% [2.8]
K005 Analog input, terminal 54 (Term. 54, 55) AE54 value 16384==100% [3.8]
K006 Analog input, terminal 56 (Term. 56, 57) AE56 value 16384==100% [3.8]
K007 Analog input, terminal 58 (Term. 58, 59) AE58 value 16384==100% [3.8]

Analog outputs
K008 Analog output, terminal 61 (Term. 61, 62) AA61 value 16384==100% [4.4]
K009 Analog output, terminal 63 (Term. 63, 64) AA63 value 16384==100% [4.4]

Binary inputs
8
K010 Binary input, terminal 77 (2 ) BE77 signal 16384==100% [5.7]
9
K011 Binary input, terminal 78 (2 ) BE78 signal 16384==100% [5.7]
10
K012 Binary input, terminal 79 (2 ) BE79 signal 16384==100% [5.7]
11
K013 Binary input, terminal 80 (2 ) BE80 signal 16384==100% [5.7]
12
K014 Binary input, terminal 81 (2 ) BE81 signal 16384==100% [6.7]
13
K015 Binary input, terminal 82 (2 ) BE82 signal 16384==100% [6.7]
14
K016 Binary input, terminal 83 (2 ) BE83 signal 16384==100% [6.7]
15
K017 Binary input, terminal 84 (2 ) BE84 signal 16384==100% [6.7]
8 15
K018 Binary inputs, terminals 77 to 84 (2 to 2 ) BE bits 1==1 [5.5]
Bit 8 = Status terminal 77
Bit 9 = Status terminal 78
Bit 10 = Status terminal 79
Bit 11 = Status terminal 80
Bit 12 = Status terminal 81
Bit 13 = Status terminal 82
Bit 14 = Status terminal 83
Bit 15 = Status terminal 84

Binary outputs
11 15
K019 Binary outputs, terminals 87 to 91 (2 to 2 ) BA bits 1==1 [7.5]
Bit 11 = Status terminal 87
Bit 12 = Status terminal 88
Bit 13 = Status terminal 89
Bit 14 = Status terminal 90
Bit 15 = Status terminal 91

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 5-1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Connectors and Binectors 02.99

Connector Name, Description Selection Text Normalization Block

Diag.

Fixed setpoints
K020 Fixed setpoint 1 (H210) H210 Fsetp1 16384==100% [8.1]
K021 Fixed setpoint 2 (H211) H211 Fsetp2 16384==100% [8.1]
K022 Fixed setpoint 3 (H212) H212 Fsetp3 16384==100% [8.1]
K023 Fixed setpoint 4 (H213) H213 Fsetp4 16384==100% [8.1]
K024 Fixed setpoint 5 (H214) H214 Fsetp5 16384==100% [8.1]
K025 Fixed setpoint 6 (H215) H215 Fsetp6 16384==100% [8.1]
K026 Fixed setpoint 7 (H216) H216 Fsetp7 16384==100% [8.1]
K027 Fixed setpoint 8 (H217) H217 Fsetp8 16384==100% [8.1]
K028 Fixed setpoint 9 (H218) H218 Fsetp9 16384==100% [8.1]
K029 Fixed setpoint 10 (H219) H219 Fset10 16384==100% [8.1]
K030 Fixed setpoint 11 (H220) H220 Fset11 16384==100% [8.1]
K031 Fixed setpoint 12 (H221) H221 Fset12 16384==100% [8.1]
K032 Fixed setpoint 13 (H222) H222 Fset13 16384==100% [8.1]
K033 Fixed setpoint 14 (H223) H223 Fset14 16384==100% [8.1]

Process data exchange with basic unit

K034 Status word 1 (from basic unit) STW1 frm BU 1==1 [13.2]
K035 Status word 2 (from basic unit) STW2 frm BU 1==1 [14.2]
K036 Control word 1 (to basic unit) CTW1 to BU 1==1 [11.4]
K037 Control word 2 (to basic unit) CTW2 to BU 1==1 [12.4]
K038 Actual value 1 (from basic unit) ActV1 frmBU 1==1 [10.3]
K039 Actual value 2 (from basic unit) ActV2 frmBU 1==1 [10.3]
K040 Actual value 3 (from basic unit) ActV3 frmBU 1==1 [10.3]
K041 Actual value 4 (from basic unit) ActV4 frmBU 1==1 [10.3]
K042 Actual value 5 (from basic unit) ActV5 frmBU 1==1 [10.3]
K043 Actual value 6 (from basic unit) ActV6 frmBU 1==1 [10.3]
K044 Actual value 7 (from basic unit) ActV7 frmBU 1==1 [10.3]
K045 Actual value 8 (from basic unit) ActV8 frmBU 1==1 [10.3]
K046 Actual value 1 (from basic unit) * 4 ActV1*4 fBU 1==1 [10.3]
K047 Actual value 2 (from basic unit) * 4 ActV2*4 fBU 1==1 [10.3]
K048 Actual value 3 (from basic unit) * 4 ActV3*4 fBU 1==1 [10.3]
K049 Actual value 4 (from basic unit) * 4 ActV4*4 fBU 1==1 [10.3]
K050 Actual value 5 (from basic unit) * 4 ActV5*4 fBU 1==1 [10.3]
K051 Actual value 6 (from basic unit) * 4 ActV6*4 fBU 1==1 [10.3]
K052 Actual value 7 (from basic unit) * 4 ActV7*4 fBU 1==1 [10.3]
K053 Actual value 8 (from basic unit) * 4 ActV8*4 fBU 1==1 [10.3]
K054 Dyn. read/write function: Parameter value read from basic unit Param frBU 1==1 [15.2]

K055 Fixed value 0 FixValue 0

K056 Fixed value 0 FixValue 0

Receive data, peer-to-peer connection

K057 Word 1 PeerRecv. 1 1==1 [17.4]
K058 Word 2 PeerRecv. 2 1==1 [17.4]
K059 Word 3 PeerRecv. 3 1==1 [17.4]
K060 Word 4 PeerRecv. 4 1==1 [17.4]
K061 Word 5 PeerRecv. 5 1==1 [17.4]

5-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Connectors and Binectors

Connector Name, Description Selection Text Normalization Block

Diag.

Receive data, COM BOARD

K062 Word 1 CB Recv. 1 1==1 [18.3]
K063 Word 2 CB Recv. 2 1==1 [18.3]
K064 Word 3 CB Recv. 3 1==1 [18.3]
K065 Word 4 CB Recv. 4 1==1 [18.3]
K066 Word 5 CB Recv. 5 1==1 [18.3]
K067 Word 6 CB Recv. 6 1==1 [18.3]
K068 Word 7 CB Recv. 7 1==1 [18.3]
K069 Word 8 CB Recv. 8 1==1 [18.3]
K070 Word 9 CB Recv. 9 1==1 [18.3]
K071 Word 10 CB Recv. 10 1==1 [18.3]

Binector/connector converters 1 - 3
K072 Output, binector/connector converter 1 (bit field) Bin>con1Out 1==1 [20.4]
K073 Output, binector/connector converter 2 (bit field) Bin>con2Out 1==1 [20.8]
K074 Output, binector/connector converter 3 (bit field) Bin>con3Out 1==1 [20.4]

Technology controller
K075 Technology controller actual value, with sign TeCtr Act 16384==100% [21.2]
K076 Technology controller actual value, absolute TeCtr |Act| 16384==100% [21.3]
K077 D component TeCtr D 16384==100% [21.5]
K078 Technology controller setpoint TeCtr Set 16384==100% [21.2]
K079 Technology controller setpoint, filtered TeCtr SetF 16384==100% [21.3]
K080 Setpoint/actual value diference TeCtr Dif 16384==100% [21.7]
K081 Setpoint/actual value diference after droop TeCtr DrDif 16384==100% [21.7]
K082 P component TeCtr P 16384==100% [21.7]
K083 I component TeCtr I 16384==100% [21.7]
K084 Positive limit for technology controller output TeCtr +Lmt 16384==100% [21.8]
K085 Negative limit for technology controller output TeCtr -Lmt 16384==100% [21.8]
K086 (positive limit for technology controller output) * (-1) TeCtr-(+Lm) 16384==100% [21.8]
K087 Technology controller output TeCtr Out 16384==100% [21.8]
K088 Technology controller output after multiplication with weighting TeCtrWgtOut 16384==100% [21.8]
factor

Comfort ramp-function generator

K089 Input variable CORFG Inp 16384==100% [22.2]
K090 Effective ramp-function generator input variable CORFG EfInp 16384==100% [22.3]
K091 Effective ramp-up time CORFG RUT 1==0.01 s [22.4]
K092 Effective ramp-down time CORFG RDT 1==0.01 s [22.4]
K093 Effective lower transition rounding CORFG LTR 1==0.01 s [22.5]
K094 Effective upper transition rounding CORFG UTR 1==0.01 s [22.5]
K095 dy/dt (ramp generator output rise in time set in H367) CORFG dydt 16384==100% [22.5]
K096 Ramp-function generator output CORFG Outp 16384==100% [22.5]
K097 Input variable for limitation after ramp-function generator (setpoint CORFG Setlm 16384==100% [22.8]
limitation)
K098 Lowest positive setpoint limit CORFG +Set 16384==100% [22.8]
K099 Lowest negative setpoint limit CORFG -Set 16384==100% [22.8]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 5-3

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Connectors and Binectors 02.99

Connector Name, Description Selection Text Normalization Block

Diag.

K100 Setpoint (after setpoint limitation) CORFG Setp 16384==100% [22.8]

K101 Fixed limitation value for positive limitation in ramp generator CORFG +Lm 16384==100% [22.7]
K102 (positive limitation in ramp-function generator) * (-1) CORFG -Lm 16384==100% [22.7]

Wobble generator
K103 Wobbler signal Wobblersign 16384==100% [24.7]
K104 Modulated setpoint Mod. setp. 16384==100% [24.7]

Adders
K105 Output, adder 1 ADD1 Outp 16384==100% [25.2]
K106 Output, adder 2 ADD2 Outp 16384==100% [25.3]
K107 Output, adder 3 ADD3 Outp 16384==100% [25.5]
K108 Output, adder 4 ADD4 Outp 16384==100% [25.7]
K109 Output, adder 5 ADD5 Outp 16384==100% [25.8]

Subtracters
K110 Output, subtracter 1 SUB1 Outp 16384==100% [25.2]
K111 Output, subtracter 2 SUB2 Outp 16384==100% [25.4]
K112 Output, subtracter 3 SUB3 Outp 16384==100% [25.5]

Sign inverters
K113 Output, sign inverter 1 SignInv1Out 16384==100% [25.2]
K114 Output, sign inverter 2 SignInv2Out 16384==100% [25.4]
K115 Output, sign inverter 3 SignInv3Out 16384==100% [25.5]
K116 Output, switchable sign inverter SignInv4Out 16384==100% [25.8]

Dividers
K117 Output, divider 1 DIV1 Outp 16384==100% [26.2]
K118 Output, divider 2 DIV2 Outp 16384==100% [26.2]
K119 Output, divider 3 DIV3 Outp 16384==100% [26.2]

Multipliers
K120 Output, multiplier 1 MUL1 Outp 16384==100% [26.4]
K121 Output, multiplier 2 MUL2 Outp 16384==100% [26.5]
K122 Output, multiplier 3 MUL3 Outp 16384==100% [26.7]
K123 Output, multiplier 4 MUL4 Outp 16384==100% [26.8]

High-resolution multipliers/dividers
K124 Output, high-resolution multiplier/divider 1 MULDIV1Outp 16384==100% [26.5]
K125 Output, high-resolution multiplier/divider 2 MULDIV2Outp 16384==100% [26.8]
K126 Output, high-resolution multiplier/divider 3 MULDIV3Outp 16384==100% [26.5]

Absolute-value generators with filter

K127 Output, absolute-value generator with filter 1 AbsFilt1Out 16384==100% [27.3]
K128 Output, absolute-value generator with filter 2 AbsFilt2Out 16384==100% [27.3]
K129 Output, absolute-value generator with filter 3 AbsFilt3Out 16384==100% [27.3]
K130 Output, absolute-value generator with filter 4 AbsFilt4Out 16384==100% [27.3]

5-4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Connectors and Binectors

Connector Name, Description Selection Text Normalization Block

Diag.

Limit-value monitors with filter

K131 Limit-value monitor with filter 1: Input variable A filtered LMon1 AInp 16384==100% [27.5]
K132 Limit-value monitor with filter 1: Fixed operating threshold LMon1 Thrs 16384==100% [27.4]
K133 Limit-value monitor with filter 2: Input variable A filtered LMon2 AInp 16384==100% [27.5]
K134 Limit-value monitor with filter 2: Fixed operating threshold LMon2 Thrs 16384==100% [27.4]

Maximum/minimum selection
K135 Output, maximum selection MAX Outp 16384==100% [28.2]
K136 Output, minimum selection MIN Outp 16384==100% [28.2]

Tracking/storage elements
K137 Output, tracking/storage element 1 TrkStrg1out 16384==100% [28.5]
K138 Output, tracking/storage element 2 TrkStrg2out 16384==100% [28.8]

Analog signal memories

K139 Output, analog signal memory 1 AnaStrg1out 16384==100% [28.5]
K140 Output, analog signal memory 2 AnaStrg2out 16384==100% [28.8]

Analog signal switches

K141 Output, analog signal switch 1 AnSwtch1Out 16384==100% [29.3]
K142 Output, analog signal switch 2 AnSwtch2Out 16384==100% [29.3]
K143 Output, analog signal switch 3 AnSwtch3Out 16384==100% [29.3]
K144 Output, analog signal switch 4 AnSwtch4Out 16384==100% [29.3]
K145 Output, analog signal switch 5 AnSwtch5Out 16384==100% [29.5]
K146 Output, analog signal switch 6 AnSwtch6Out 16384==100% [29.5]
K147 Output, analog signal switch 7 AnSwtch7Out 16384==100% [29.5]
K148 Output, analog signal switch 8 AnSwtch8Out 16384==100% [29.5]
K149 Output, analog signal switch 9 AnSwtch9Out 16384==100% [29.7]
K150 Output, analog signal switch 10 AnSwtch10Ot 16384==100% [29.7]

Simple ramp-function generator

K151 Output, simple ramp-function generator S-RFG outp 16384==100% [30.5]

Dead zone
K152 Output, dead zone DdZone Outp 16384==100% [30.3]

Characteristic blocks
K153 Output, characteristic block 1 ChrBlk1Outp 16384==100% [30.8]
K154 Output, characteristic block 2 ChrBlk2Outp 16384==100% [30.8]
K155 Output, characteristic block 3 ChrBlk3Outp 16384==100% [30.8]

Velocity/speed calculators
K156 Output, speed/velocity calculator (actual velocity) n -> v outp 1==1 mm/s [31.7]
K157 Output, speed/velocity calculator (setpoint speed) v -> n outp 16384==100% [31.7]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 5-5

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Connectors and Binectors 02.99

Connector Name, Description Selection Text Normalization Block

Diag.

Motorized potentiometer (see also K180)

K158 Output of motorized potentiometer MOP outp 16384==100% [23.8]
K159 Weighted output of motorized potentiometer MOPWghtOutp 16384==100% [23.8]
K160 dy/dt (rise in ramp generator output in time set in H412 and MOP dy/dt 16384==100% [23.8]
H404)

Receive data via USS interface

K161 Word 1 USS Recv. 1 1==1 [16.4]
K162 Word 2 USS Recv. 2 1==1 [16.4]
K163 Word 3 USS Recv. 3 1==1 [16.4]
K164 Word 4 USS Recv. 4 1==1 [16.4]
K165 Word 5 USS Recv. 5 1==1 [16.4]
K166 Word 6 USS Recv. 6 1==1 [16.4]
K167 Word 7 USS Recv. 7 1==1 [16.4]
K168 Word 8 USS Recv. 8 1==1 [16.4]
K169 Word 9 USS Recv. 9 1==1 [16.4]
K170 Word 10 USS Recv.10 1==1 [16.4]

Limiters
K171 Limiter 1: Fixed limitation value Lmtr1 Limit 16384==100% [27.1]
K172 Limiter 1: (positive limitation value) * (-1) Lmtr1 -lmt 16384==100% [27.1]
K173 Limiter 1: Output Lmtr1 Outp 16384==100% [27.4]
K174 Limiter 2: Fixed limitation value Lmtr2 Limit 16384==100% [27.5]
K175 Limiter 2: (positive limitation value) * (-1) Lmtr2 -lmt 16384==100% [27.5]
K176 Limiter 2: Output Lmtr2 Outp 16384==100% [27.7]

Fixed setpoint (starting with software version 1.1)

K177 Fixed setpoint 15 (H224) H224 Fset15 16384==100% [8.3]

(starting with software version 1.1)

K178 not used
K179 not used

Motorized potentiometer (starting with software version 1.1)

K180 Input of the ramp-function generator in motorized potentiometer MOP input 16384==100% [23.5]
(setpoint)

5-6 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Connectors and Binectors

5.2 Binector list

Binector Name, Description Selection Text Block

diag.

Fixed values
B000 Fixed value 0 FixedValue0 [8.7]
B001 Fixed value 1 FixedValue1 [8.7]
B002 Fixed value 0 FixedValue0

Analog inputs
B003 Analog input, terminal 50: 1 = wire break (i ≤ 2 mA) AE50 Interr [2.8]
B004 Analog input, terminal 52: 1 = wire break (i ≤ 2 mA) AE52 Interr [2.8]
B005 Analog input, terminal 54: 1 = wire break (i ≤ 2 mA) AE54 Interr [3.8]
B006 Analog input, terminal 56: 1 = wire break (i ≤ 2 mA) AE56 Interr [3.8]
B007 Analog input, terminal 58: 1 = wire break (i ≤ 2 mA) AE58 Interr [3.8]

Binary inputs
B008 Status, terminal 77 BE77 value [5.7]
B009 Status, terminal 77, inverted BE77 invert [5.4]
B010 Status, terminal 78 BE78 value [5.7]
B011 Status, terminal 78, inverted BE78 invert [5.4]
B012 Status, terminal 79 BE79 value [5.7]
B013 Status, terminal 79, inverted BE79 invert [5.4]
B014 Status, terminal 80 BE80 value [5.7]
B015 Status, terminal 80, inverted BE80 invert [5.4]
B016 Status, terminal 81 BE81 value [6.7]
B017 Status, terminal 81, inverted BE81 invert [6.4]
B018 Status, terminal 82 BE82 value [6.7]
B019 Status, terminal 82, inverted BE82 invert [6.4]
B020 Status, terminal 83 BE83 value [6.7]
B021 Status, terminal 83, inverted BE83 invert [6.4]
B022 Status, terminal 84 BE84 value [6.7]
B023 Status, terminal 84, inverted BE84 invert [6.4]

Fixed control bits

B024 Control bit 1 (H230) H230 CtrBit [8.3]
B025 Control bit 2 (H231) H231 CtrBit [8.3]
B026 Control bit 3 (H232) H232 CtrBit [8.3]
B027 Control bit 4 (H233) H233 CtrBit [8.3]
B028 Control bit 5 (H234) H234 CtrBit [8.3]
B029 Control bit 6 (H235) H235 CtrBit [8.3]

Voltage monitor, electronics power supply

B030 Power ON (100 ms pulse when voltage is connected) Power ON [9.8]
B031 Power OFF (10 ms pulse when voltage is disconnected) Power OFF [9.8]

Process data exchange with basic unit

B032 Status word 1 (from basic unit), bit 0 STW1.0 fBU [13.8]
B033 Status word 1 (from basic unit), bit 1 STW1.1 fBU [13.8]
B034 Status word 1 (from basic unit), bit 2 STW1.2 fBU [13.8]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 5-7

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Connectors and Binectors 02.99

Binector Name, Description Selection Text Block

diag.

B035 Status word 1 (from basic unit), bit 3 STW1.3 fBU [13.8]
B036 Status word 1 (from basic unit), bit 4 STW1.4 fBU [13.8]
B037 Status word 1 (from basic unit), bit 5 STW1.5 fBU [13.8]
B038 Status word 1 (from basic unit), bit 6 STW1.6 fBU [13.8]
B039 Status word 1 (from basic unit), bit 7 STW1.7 fBU [13.8]
B040 Status word 1 (from basic unit), bit 8 STW1.8 fBU [13.8]
B041 Status word 1 (from basic unit), bit 9 STW1.9 fBU [13.8]
B042 Status word 1 (from basic unit), bit 10 STW1.10 fBU [13.8]
B043 Status word 1 (from basic unit), bit 11 STW1.11 fBU [13.8]
B044 Status word 1 (from basic unit), bit 12 STW1.12 fBU [13.8]
B045 Status word 1 (from basic unit), bit 13 STW1.13 fBU [13.8]
B046 Status word 1 (from basic unit), bit 14 STW1.14 fBU [13.8]
B047 Status word 1 (from basic unit), bit 15 STW1.15 fBU [13.8]
B048 Status word 2 (from basic unit), bit 16 STW2.16 fBU [14.8]
B049 Status word 2 (from basic unit), bit 17 STW2.17 fBU [14.8]
B050 Status word 2 (from basic unit), bit 18 STW2.18 fBU [14.8]
B051 Status word 2 (from basic unit), bit 19 STW2.19 fBU [14.8]
B052 Status word 2 (from basic unit), bit 20 STW2.20 fBU [14.8]
B053 Status word 2 (from basic unit), bit 21 STW2.21 fBU [14.8]
B054 Status word 2 (from basic unit), bit 22 STW2.22 fBU [14.8]
B055 Status word 2 (from basic unit), bit 23 STW2.23 fBU [14.8]
B056 Status word 2 (from basic unit), bit 24 STW2.24 fBU [14.8]
B057 Status word 2 (from basic unit), bit 25 STW2.25 fBU [14.8]
B058 Status word 2 (from basic unit), bit 26 STW2.26 fBU [14.8]
B059 Status word 2 (from basic unit), bit 27 STW2.27 fBU [14.8]
B060 Status word 2 (from basic unit), bit 28 STW2.28 fBU [14.8]
B061 Status word 2 (from basic unit), bit 29 STW2.29 fBU [14.8]
B062 Status word 2 (from basic unit), bit 30 STW2.30 fBU [14.8]
B063 Status word 2 (from basic unit), bit 31 STW2.31 fBU [14.8]

Connector/binector converter 1
B064 Bit field 1 (1st converted connector), bit 0 Bit fld 1.0 [19.8]
B065 Bit field 1 (1st converted connector), bit 1 Bit fld 1.1 [19.8]
B066 Bit field 1 (1st converted connector), bit 2 Bit fld 1.2 [19.7]
B067 Bit field 1 (1st converted connector), bit 3 Bit fld 1.3 [19.7]
B068 Bit field 1 (1st converted connector), bit 4 Bit fld 1.4 [19.7]
B069 Bit field 1 (1st converted connector), bit 5 Bit fld 1.5 [19.7]
B070 Bit field 1 (1st converted connector), bit 6 Bit fld 1.6 [19.7]
B071 Bit field 1 (1st converted connector), bit 7 Bit fld 1.7 [19.7]
B072 Bit field 1 (1st converted connector), bit 8 Bit fld 1.8 [19.7]
B073 Bit field 1 (1st converted connector), bit 9 Bit fld 1.9 [19.6]
B074 Bit field 1 (1st converted connector), bit 10 Bit fld1.10 [19.6]
B075 Bit field 1 (1st converted connector), bit 11 Bit fld1.11 [19.6]
B076 Bit field 1 (1st converted connector), bit 12 Bit fld1.12 [19.6]
B077 Bit field 1 (1st converted connector), bit 13 Bit fld1.13 [19.6]
B078 Bit field 1 (1st converted connector), bit 14 Bit fld1.14 [19.6]
B079 Bit field 1 (1st converted connector), bit 15 Bit fld1.15 [19.5]

5-8 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Connectors and Binectors

Binector Name, Description Selection Text Block

diag.

Connector/binector converter 2
B080 Bit field 2 (2nd converted connector), bit 0 Bit fld 2.0 [19.8]
B081 Bit field 2 (2nd converted connector), bit 1 Bit fld 2.1 [19.8]
B082 Bit field 2 (2nd converted connector), bit 2 Bit fld 2.2 [19.7]
B083 Bit field 2 (2nd converted connector), bit 3 Bit fld 2.3 [19.7]
B084 Bit field 2 (2nd converted connector), bit 4 Bit fld 2.4 [19.7]
B085 Bit field 2 (2nd converted connector), bit 5 Bit fld 2.5 [19.7]
B086 Bit field 2 (2nd converted connector), bit 6 Bit fld 2.6 [19.7]
B087 Bit field 2 (2nd converted connector), bit 7 Bit fld 2.7 [19.7]
B088 Bit field 2 (2nd converted connector), bit 8 Bit fld 2.8 [19.7]
B089 Bit field 2 (2nd converted connector), bit 9 Bit fld 2.9 [19.6]
B090 Bit field 2 (2nd converted connector), bit 10 Bit fld2.10 [19.6]
B091 Bit field 2 (2nd converted connector), bit 11 Bit fld2.11 [19.6]
B092 Bit field 2 (2nd converted connector), bit 12 Bit fld2.12 [19.6]
B093 Bit field 2 (2nd converted connector), bit 13 Bit fld2.13 [19.6]
B094 Bit field 2 (2nd converted connector), bit 14 Bit fld2.14 [19.6]
B095 Bit field 2 (2nd converted connector), bit 15 Bit fld2.15 [19.5]

Connector/binector converter 3
B096 Bit field 3 (3rd converted connector), bit 0 Bit fld 3.0 [19.4]
B097 Bit field 3 (3rd converted connector), bit 1 Bit fld 3.1 [19.4]
B098 Bit field 3 (3rd converted connector), bit 2 Bit fld 3.2 [19.3]
B099 Bit field 3 (3rd converted connector), bit 3 Bit fld 3.3 [19.3]
B100 Bit field 3 (3rd converted connector), bit 4 Bit fld 3.4 [19.3]
B101 Bit field 3 (3rd converted connector), bit 5 Bit fld 3.5 [19.3]
B102 Bit field 3 (3rd converted connector), bit 6 Bit fld 3.6 [19.3]
B103 Bit field 3 (3rd converted connector), bit 7 Bit fld 3.7 [19.3]
B104 Bit field 3 (3rd converted connector), bit 8 Bit fld 3.8 [19.2]
B105 Bit field 3 (3rd converted connector), bit 9 Bit fld 3.9 [19.2]
B106 Bit field 3 (3rd converted connector), bit 10 Bit fld3.10 [19.2]
B107 Bit field 3 (3rd converted connector), bit 11 Bit fld3.11 [19.2]
B108 Bit field 3 (3rd converted connector), bit 12 Bit fld3.12 [19.2]
B109 Bit field 3 (3rd converted connector), bit 13 Bit fld3.13 [19.2]
B110 Bit field 3 (3rd converted connector), bit 14 Bit fld3.14 [19.2]
B111 Bit field 3 (3rd converted connector), bit 15 Bit fld3.15 [19.1]

Technology controller
B112 Technology controller at output limitation TeCtrOutpLm [21.8]

Comfort ramp-function generator

B113 Ramp-function generator output = Ramp-function generator input (y = x) CORFG y=x [22.5]
B114 Ramp-function generator output = 0 (y = 0) CORFG y=0 [22.5]
B115 Limitation after ramp-function generator (setpoint limitation) has responded CORFG y=lmt [22.8]

Motorized potentiometer
B116 Ramp-up complete (y = x or limit reached) MOP y=x [23.8]
B117 Motorized potentiometer output = 0 (y = 0) MOP y=0 [23.8]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 5-9

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Connectors and Binectors 02.99

Binector Name, Description Selection Text Block

diag.

Wobble generator
B118 Synchronizing signal to slave WobbSyncout [24.7]

Limiters
B119 Limiter 1 - positive limitation has responded Lmt1 +Lm! [27.3]
B120 Limiter 1 - negative limitation has responded Lmt1 -Lm! [27.3]
B121 Limiter 2 - positive limitation has responded Lmt2 +Lm! [27.7]
B122 Limiter 2 - negative limitation has responded Lmt2 -Lm! [27.7]

Limit-value monitor with filter

B123 Limit-value monitor with filter 1 Lmonit out1 [27.8]
B124 Limit-value monitor with filter 2 Lmonit out2 [27.8]

Logic functions
B125 Output, AND gate with 3 inputs 1 AND1 Outp [32.2]
B126 Output, AND gate with 3 inputs 2 AND2 Outp [32.2]
B127 Output, AND gate with 3 inputs 3 AND3 Outp [32.2]
B128 Output, AND gate with 3 inputs 4 AND4 Outp [32.2]
B129 Output, AND gate with 3 inputs 5 AND5 Outp [32.2]
B130 Output, AND gate with 3 inputs 6 AND6 Outp [32.2]
B131 Output, AND gate with 3 inputs 7 AND7 Outp [32.2]
B132 Output, AND gate with 3 inputs 8 AND8 Outp [32.2]
B133 Output, AND gate with 3 inputs 9 AND9 Outp [32.5]
B134 Output, AND gate with 3 inputs 10 AND10 Outp [32.5]
B135 Output, AND gate with 3 inputs 11 AND11 Outp [32.5]
B136 Output, AND gate with 3 inputs 12 AND12 Outp [32.5]
B137 Output, AND gate with 3 inputs 13 AND13 Outp [32.5]
B138 Output, AND gate with 3 inputs 14 AND14 Outp [32.5]
B139 Output, AND gate with 3 inputs 15 AND15 Outp [32.5]
B140 Output, AND gate with 3 inputs 16 AND16 Outp [32.5]
B141 Output, OR gate with 3 inputs 1 OR1 Outp [32.7]
B142 Output, OR gate with 3 inputs 2 OR2 Outp [32.7]
B143 Output, OR gate with 3 inputs 3 OR3 Outp [32.7]
B144 Output, OR gate with 3 inputs 4 OR4 Outp [32.7]
B145 Output, OR gate with 3 inputs 5 OR5 Outp [32.7]
B146 Output, OR gate with 3 inputs 6 OR6 Outp [32.7]
B147 Output, OR gate with 3 inputs 7 OR7 Outp [32.7]
B148 Output, OR gate with 3 inputs 8 OR8 Outp [32.7]
B149 Output, inverter 1 INV1 Outp [33.2]
B150 Output, inverter 2 INV2 Outp [33.2]
B151 Output, inverter 3 INV3 Outp [33.2]
B152 Output, inverter 4 INV4 Outp [33.2]
B153 Output, inverter 5 INV5 Outp [33.2]
B154 Output, inverter 6 INV6 Outp [33.2]
B155 Output, inverter 7 INV7 Outp [33.2]
B156 Output, inverter 8 INV8 Outp [33.2]
B157 Output, EXCLUSIVE-OR gate with 2 inputs 1 EXOR1 Outp [33.5]
B158 Output, EXCLUSIVE- OR gate with 2 inputs 2 EXOR2 Outp [33.5]

5-10 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Connectors and Binectors

Binector Name, Description Selection Text Block

diag.

B159 Output, EXCLUSIVE- OR gate with 2 inputs 3 EXOR3 Outp [33.5]

B160 Output, NAND gate with 3 inputs 1 NAND1 Outp [33.8]
B161 Output, NAND gate with 3 inputs 2 NAND2 Outp [33.8]
B162 Output, NAND gate with 3 inputs 3 NAND3 Outp [33.8]
B163 Output, NAND gate with 3 inputs 4 NAND4 Outp [33.8]
B164 Output, NAND gate with 3 inputs 5 NAND5 Outp [33.8]
B165 Output, NAND gate with 3 inputs 6 NAND6 Outp [33.8]

RS flipflops
B166 RS flipflop 1 output Q RS flflp1 Q [34.2]
B167 RS flipflop 1 output Q̄ RS flflp1/Q [34.2]
B168 RS flipflop 2 output Q RS flflp2 Q [34.2]
B169 RS flipflop 2 output Q̄ RS flflp2/Q [34.2]
B170 RS flipflop 3 output Q RS flflp3 Q [34.2]
B171 RS flipflop 3 output Q̄ RS flflp3/Q [34.2]
B172 RS flipflop 4 output Q RS flflp4 Q [34.4]
B173 RS flipflop 4 output Q̄ RS flflp4/Q [34.4]
B174 RS flipflop 5 output Q RS flflp5 Q [34.4]
B175 RS flipflop 5 output Q̄ RS flflp5/Q [34.4]
B176 RS flipflop 6 output Q RS flflp6 Q [34.4]
B177 RS flipflop 6 output Q̄ RS flflp6/Q [34.4]
B178 RS flipflop 7 output Q RS flflp7 Q [34.6]
B179 RS flipflop 7 output Q̄ RS flflp7/Q [34.6]

D flipflops
B180 D flipflop 1 output Q D flflp1 Q [34.8]
B181 D flipflop 1 output Q̄ D flflp1 /Q [34.8]
B182 D flipflop 2 output Q D flflp2 Q [34.8]
B183 D flipflop 2 output Q̄ D flflp2 /Q [34.8]

Timers
B184 Output, timer 1 Timer1 Out [35.3]
B185 Output, timer 2 Timer2 Out [35.5]
B186 Output, timer 3 Timer3 Out [35.8]
B187 Output, timer 4 Timer4 Out [35.3]
B188 Output, timer 5 Timer5 Out [35.5]

Binary signal switches

B189 Output, binary signal switch 1 BiSwitc1Out [35.2]
B190 Output, binary signal switch 2 BiSwitc2Out [35.4]
B191 Output, binary signal switch 3 BiSwitc3Out [35.6]
B192 Output, binary signal switch 4 BiSwitc4Out [35.8]

Simple ramp-function generator

B193 Ramp-function generator output = Ramp-function generator input (y = x) SiRFG y=x [30.4]
B194 0 = Ramp-function generator initial run-up SiRFG Init [30.4]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 5-11

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Connectors and Binectors 02.99

Binector Name, Description Selection Text Block

diag.

Message monitoring
B195 COM BOARD: Message monitoring timeout - continuous signal COM Interr [18.4]
B196 COM BOARD: Message monitoring timeout - 1s pulse COM Intpuls [18.4]
B197 USS: Message monitoring timeout - continous signal USS Interr [16.4]
B198 USS: Message monitoring timeout - 1s pulse USS Intpuls [16.4]
B199 Peer-to-Peer: Message monitoring timeout - continous signal PeerInterr [17.4]
B200 Peer-to-Peer: Message monitoring timeout - - 1s pulse PeerIntpuls [17.4]

5-12 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Start-up and Parameterization

6 Start-up and Parameterization

1. Inserting the supplied memory module (EPROM)

When handling the EPROM, please observe the guidelines for handling components which can be damaged by
electrostatic discharge (see pages 0-5).

Insert the EPROM in the base provided on the T100. It is essential to ensure that the notch on the EPROM is
aligned with the marking on the board (see diagram). Check to ensure that all terminal pins of the EPROM are
inserted correctly in the socket.

Caution: Connecting the power to the board when the EPROM is inserted incorrectly will destroy the module!

X137 X135
6SE7098-0XX84-0BB0
1
V98113-A 1800-A1-10
X1 X2 MS100 for T100

D1 EPROM

X6 X7

X3 X4 X5 X8 X9 X10 X11

R136
green red yellow
R135
X130 X131 X132 X133 X134 X136
H1 H2 H3

2. Checking the hardware requirements

Check the information given in Chapter 1.4 to ensure that all hardware requirements are met for operating the
T100.

3. Installing the technology board in the electronics box

See Chapter 2.2 of hardware operating instructions.

Note: The technology board must be inserted in board location 2 (RIGHT-HAND SIDE of electronics box) of
the electronics box.

After connection of the supply voltage, the red LED on the T100 technology board flashes (= fault-free cyclic
operation).

4. Starting up the basic converter unit

It is advisable to start up the basic converter unit separately according to its operating instructions (operation, for
example, via the PMU) before you start up the T100.

5. Selecting the technology board

(Board need only be selected explicitly on old series MASTERDRIVES FC / VC / SC (1995 - 1997); on new
series converters, all supplementary boards are registered by an automatic hardware detection function.)

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 6-1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Start-up and Parameterization 02.99

The T100 is selected by choosing "Hardware configuration" of the basic converter unit. The T100 can be
selected in the "Switch-on inhibit", "Ready to switch on" and "Fault" states.

Selection sequence:

⇓ P052 = 4 Select hardware configuration function

⇓ P051 = 3 Select "Expert mode" access level

⇓ P090 = 2 Select TECH BOARD T100 in location 2

⇓ Other parameters depending on option board in location 3 (see appropriate operating instructions or
parameter list of basic unit).
E.g.
P091 = 1 Select CB in location 3
P091 = 3 Select SCB in location 3
P091 = 0 If no COM BOARD is installed

Note: If you wish to install a communications board in a configuration which already

includes a T100, you must deselect the T100 first (P090=0) and then log in the T100
and the communications board simultaneously.

⇓ P052 = 0 Select return function

⇓ P key The operational display (r000) is output while parameters and internal quantites are re-
assigned.
The T100 technology board is initialized.
If fault message F080 / F081 appears, refer to Chapter "Faults and alarms" in the
operating instructions of the basic converter unit.
When the board is fully initialized, the yellow LED on the T100 flashes (3Hz).
If a communications board is selected, the green LED must also flash (see Chapter 1.2).

⇓ The operational display "Switch-on inhibit" (008) or "Ready to switch on" (009) appears.

6. Learning to work with T100 parameters

You need to be familiar with the parameterization procedures for the T100. It is essential to follow the instructions
in Chapter 4.1 if you want to work with the operator panel (PMU or OP1) or Chapter 9 if you want to use the
SIMOVIS service program.

By way of a trial run, read parameters d002 and H101 out of the T100 (see list of parameters in Chapter 4).

7. Setting technology board parameters (H parameters) to their factory settings (defaults)

IMPORTANT !
- Before you begin starting up the T100, you must set the H parameters to their original factory settings
according to Chapter 3.9 and parameter H970. The MS100 cannot be guaranteed to operate correctly
if you fail to set the H parameters to their factory values.
- Check that any SLB (SIMOLINK) interface or CBx boards (communications interfaces) have been
mounted in the correct board locations as specified in Chapter 1.4.

Now use SIMOVIS to upread the technology parameters in their factory settings if you intend to create
"comparison files" of modified parameters later on.

6-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
02.99 Start-up and Parameterization

8. Setting the parameters of the technology board

Operational sequence:

⇓ H051 = 1 Select "Standard mode" access level

⇓ Set parameters according to plant configuration

Please refer to the configuration example described in Chapter 10 as a guide.

⇓ Test functions

⇓ Archive the parameter setting (e.g. with d990 or SIMOVIS)

⇓ H051 = 0 Set "Read only" status for d and H parameters (access disabled for unauthorized
users)

9. Common questions and answers

Question 1: The MASTER DRIVES basic unit does not accept any setpoints or control commands from the
T100. What could be the cause?

Answer: - Check whether bit 10 in control word 1 to the basic unit is set to "1" ("Control requested"; e.g.
via H272.11=1 and H270=2; see block diagram, sheet [11] ),
- Check whether you have switched over the data sets in the basic unit by mistake (check, for
example, r012, r013, r410, P590 etc. on the SIMOVERT VC / MC).

Question 2: Why is the comfort ramp-function generator not working properly?

Answer: Check whether the following enable conditions are satisfied:

- Ramp-function generator enabled = 1 (e.g. H368 = 1)
- Ramp-function generator disabled = 0 (e.g. H362 = 0)

Question 3: The wobble generator does not work. What could be the cause?

Answer: The wobble generator only works if:

- the wobble amplitude is set to H421 > 0
- the wobble enable command has been issued (e.g. with H420 = 1)
- an unmodulated setpoint with a value other than zero is applied, e.g. via H418=1

Question 4: Signals are not being processed on the T100 in keeping with the parameter settings. What could
be the cause?

Answer: Check whether you have activated parameter set switchover on the T100 by mistake (see block
diagram, sheet [36] and d080).

Question 5: I can’t accelerate or decelerate the motorized potentiometer. What should I do?

Answer: If you want to operate the motorized potentiometer "offline" (i.e. without the motor), you must set
the "tens" digit of H400 to "1" (e.g. H400 = 0111).
The motorized potentiometer may malfunction if the H parameters have not been set to their
factory values as described in Chapter 6, paragraph 7.

Question 6: The T100 will not accept any setpoints or control commands from the CB (communications
board, e.g. PROFIBUS). What should I do?

Answer: You should use word 1 of the CB as the control word and set it to at least "1"; see note <2> on
block diagram, sheet [18].

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 6-3

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Start-up and Parameterization 02.99

6-4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
02.99 Software Replacement, Replacement of T100 Board

7 Procedure for Replacing Software or T100 Board

• To remove or install the T100 technology board, please follow the instructions given in Chapter 5 of the
hardware operating instructions.

• Before installing new software, make a note of how the H parameters are set or create a "Download file"
using SIMOVIS.

• Replace EPROM or T100.

In the case of any fault message, switch to parameterization mode by actuating the P and Raise keys. Set the
parameters to factory setting in H970, following the instructions given in Chapter 3.9 and parameter H970.
Acknowledge any fault message by pressing the P key.

• Enter the H parameter settings from the old T100 or from the old software version (set parameters using the
"Download" function of the "Download file" created above by means of SIMOVIS or set manually to the
project-specific H parameter values noted above). Please refer to paragraph 5 ff. in Chapter 6 for further
details.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 7-1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Software Replacement, Replacement of T100 Board 02.99

7-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Faults and Alarms

8 Faults and Alarms

8.1 Fault messages

General information about malfunctions

The T100 generates fault messages F116 to F147 (see block diagram [8] and the table below). The mechanisms
for further handling, storage of diagnostic data and acknowledgement of a technology fault are the same as for
malfunctions in the basic unit.

The following information is available for every malfunction (see Instruction Manual for basic unit):

Parameters r947 Fault number

d951 Fault text list
P952 Number of malfunctions
r748 Duration of malfunction

If a fault message is not acknowledged before the electronics power supply is disconnected, then it will be output
again when the supply voltage is next switched on. The unit will not operate unless this message is
acknowledged. (Exception: F008 and automatic restart is selected, refer to P366)

Diagnostic LEDs

Some types of hardware fault can be diagnosed with the aid of the three LEDs on the T100, see Chapter 1.2.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 8-1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Faults and Alarms 02.99

Fault messages
Fault Description Possible causes
No. Remedial measures
F116 Fault H312 - Check H312 (see sheet 18 of block diagram)
See parameter H312 - Check selected binector
F117 Fault H297 - Check H297 (see sheet 16 of block diagram)
See parameter H297 - Check selected binector
F118 Fault H305 - Check H305 (see sheet 17 of block diagram)
See parameter H305 - Check selected binector
F119 COM ConnInt
Connection between T100 and COM BOARD interrupted
F120 Fault H260 - Check H260 (see sheet 8 of block diagram)
See parameter H260 - Check selected binector
F121 Fault H261 - Check H261 (see sheet 8 of block diagram)
See parameter H261 - Check selected binector
F122 Fault H262 - Check H262 (see sheet 8 of block diagram)
See parameter H262 - Check selected binector
F123 Fault H263 - Check H263 (see sheet 8 of block diagram)
See parameter H263 - Check selected binector
F142 DataSavErr - Check electronics supply voltage
The converter power supply unit is repeatedly signalling (e.g. auxiliary power supply via X9 of converter)
"Electronics undervoltage"
F143 ADC AdjErr - Replace T100 board
The factory-set correction values for adjustment of the analog
inputs and outputs are incorrect
F144 EEPROM def. - Hardware defect
Software monitoring of correct functioning of EEPROM - Severe EMC disturbances
module (non-volatile storage of type X28C64, 8192 bytes) - Measures:
Replace T100 board
Check EMC precautions.
F145 ParamError - Software has been replaced
Error in handling parameter(s) - Excessive EMC interference (e.g. owing to lack of snubber
Software monitoring of permissible value range of parameters circuits for contactors, unscreened cables, loose screen
connections, ...)
- Measures:
Acknowledge fault
Check EMC precautions
Set parameters to factory settings (Chapter 3.9)
Start up unit again
F146 Watchdog - T100 board defective
Watchdog timer has initiated a RESET - Excessive EMC interference (e.g. owing to lack of snubber
A hardware counter integrated in the microprocessor circuitry for contactors, unscreened cables, loose screen
monitors correct execution of the program. connections)
F147 Intern.Err - T100 board defective
Illegal microprocessor state - Excessive EMC interference (e.g. owing to lack of snubber
A hardware monitor integrated in the microprocessor circuitry for contactors, unscreened cables, loose screen
monitors the microprocessor for illegal operational states connections)

8-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Faults and Alarms

8.2 Alarm messages

An alarm message is output periodically in the form of "A" (Alarm) and a three-digit number in the operational
display on the PMU screen. An alarm cannot be acknowledged, but is reset automatically when the cause of the
problem has been eliminated. Several alarms can be active at the same time. They are then displayed
successively.
When the converter is being operated with the OP1 operator panel, the alarm is output on the bottom line of the
operational display. The red LED flashes simultaneously (see operating instructions for OP1).

The T100 generates alarm messages A097 to A104 (see block diagram, sheet [9] and the table below). The
mechanisms for handling and signalling a technology alarm are the same as for alarm messages in the basic unit
(see Instruction Manual for basic unit, especially r959).

Alarm messages
Alarm Parameter Description Remedial measures
No. No.

Bit Nr.
A097 d959 Alarm A097
 A spontaneous message cannot be issued to the
From basic unit, as the previous spontaneous message
0 has not yet been picked up by the basic unit.
SW1.1
A098 d959 Alarm A098
 A spontaneous message cannot be issued to the
From COM BOARD, as the previous spontaneous
1 message has not yet been picked up by the COM
SW1.1
BOARD.
A099 d959 Alarm A099
 A spontaneous message cannot be issued to the
From USS interface, as the previous spontaneous
2 message has not yet been acknowledged by the
SW1.1
USS master.
A100 d959 Alarm A100 - Check H264 (see sheet 9 of block diagram)
 - Check selected binector
3 See parameter H264

A101 d959 Alarm A101 - Check H265 (see sheet 9 of block diagram)
 - Check selected binector
4 See parameter H265

A102 d959 Alarm A102 - Check H266 (see sheet 9 of block diagram)
 - Check selected binector
5 See parameter H266

A103 d959 Alarm A103 - Check H267 (see sheet 9 of block diagram)
 - Check selected binector
6 See parameter H267

A104 d959 Alarm A104 - Check H370 and H371

 - Check selected binector
Comfort ramp-function generator parameter sets 2
7
and 3 are selected simultaneously

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 8-3

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Faults and Alarms 02.99

8-4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 SIMOVIS

9 SIMOVIS
9.1 SIMOVIS for MASTERDRIVES MC / VC (new series from 1997 / 98) and
for SIMOREG 6RA70

All versions of SIMOVIS for these devices support all types of technology board (including the T100) and share a
common user interface with the SIMOVIS for the basic converters. There is thus no need to install separate
SIMOVIS programs for the technology boards.
This board and version "neutrality" is afforded by the fact that SIMOVIS can read all existing technology
parameters, plus their descriptions and identifiers, out of the technology board in a "teach-in" process. A
technology parameter database and a parameter definition file for UPREAD / DOWNLOAD operations are set up
during the teach-in run.
Please refer to the relevant SIMOVIS Operating Instructions for further information about SIMOVIS functions for
specific technology boards.
You can select your chosen display language for abbreviated technology parameter names in parameter H050.

9.2 SIMOVIS for old series MASTERDRIVES FC / VC / MC (from 1995) with

integrated technology board support (available from mid-1996)

All the service functions for the technology boards in the SIMOVIS of the basic unit are available as of the
following versions of the SIMOVIS service programs for the basic units:
- SIMOVIS Version V1.2b for SIMOVERT FC
- SIMOVIS Version V1.2b for SIMOVERT VC
- SIMOVIS Version V1.1b for SIMOVERT SC
- SIMOVIS Version V1.2 for the SIMOVERT infeed/regenerative feedback unit.
These SIMOVIS versions support all technology boards (including the T100) and share a common user interface
with the SIMOVIS of the basic units. There is thus no need to install separate SIMOVIS programs for the
technology boards.

All the existing technology parameters, their descriptions and their identifiers can if desired be "learned" with the
teach-in function in the "Bus Configuration" screen form and the USS protocol. This ensures type and version
neutrality. The parameter database is updated and a parameter definition file is created for upread and download
operations.
The next 10 available technology parameters, starting with a selectable parameter number, can be displayed on
a separate screen. You can observe them or alter their settings there. You can also call up a "Free Parameters"
screen, on which you can view and modify up to 8 freely selectable r and H parameters.

You can find further information in the ANLEITNG.WRI (Windows Write format) and ANLEITNG.TXT (ASCII
format) files on the SIMOVIS installation disk for the basic unit.

As of software version 1.1 of the MS100, you can select the language for the abbreviated parameter names that
appear on the screen in parameter H050.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 9-1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
SIMOVIS 02.99

DANGER !!!
The machine must always be stationary when the technology boards are downloaded!

There is always a risk that irregular, transient signals will be sent to the binary and analog output terminals of
the technology board or to the SIMOVERT basic unit during a download operation, causing the drive to start
up. You should therefore always set the drive to a safe operating condition before you begin downloading,
e.g. by carrying out the following steps:

- Disconnect the power supply to the converter or the motor

- Disconnect the control voltage
- Apply the brake manually, disengage the motor, etc.

9.3 Special SIMOVIS for T100 (supplied up until 1996)

The special SIMOVIS for MS100 software version 1.0 can also be used for higher software versions. The new
functions (parameters) that have been added since software version 1.0 will not be available, however.
In versions 1.1 to 1.3, this applies to parameters H050, H224, H413, H414, H750 and H917.

9-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Configuring Example

10 Configuring Example
Sheet 1 gives a realistic example of how the T100 can be configured.

The example is applicable to new series MASTERDRIVES VC / MC (from 1997 / 98). The same example applies
analogously to old series SIMOREG 6RA70 and MASTERDRIVES (from 1995), although some of the basic unit
parameter settings are different.

The example drive is part of a multi-motor network used in the processing of strip materials. The drive is
operating as a slave within a setpoint cascade which is fully digitized on the basis of peer-to-peer connections.

An automation system - which is linked via the PROFIBUS DP with the drives - is included in the configuration for
the purpose of "recipe inputs" (speed relations) and for higher-level control, operator control inputs and
visualization. The drive has a path tension control implemented via a dancing roller. The dancing roller
potentiometer is connected to analog input terminals 50/51 and outputs an actual value signal to the technology
controller on the T100 which operates as a dancing controller. A torque-indicating measuring instrument is
connected to analog output terminals 61/62.

Sheets 2 to 4 show a detailed block diagram of the T100 for the configuring example which also indicates the
most important parameter settings. The square brackets contain the reference to the relevant sheet in the block
diagram (Chapter 2).

Dancer controller (sheet 2)

The dancer controller actual value from analog input terminals 50/51 can be viewed in display parameter d010
and is available at connector K003. It is supplied to the technology controller via H330.1=003. The setting
H351=x0xx ensures that the dancer actual value is controlled via the D element adjusted in H332. This
arrangement is used to advantage with dancer controls to dampen the dancer roller. The technology controller
setpoint is fixed to a value of 0% through the setting H334.1=0 (corresponds to dancer neutral position, dancer
potentiometer supplies 0V).

Output K088 of the technology controller is added to the speed setpoint K120 via the setting H430=088. The
adder output (sheet [25] of block diagram) produces the total setpoint K105. The technology controller uses the
speed compensation value K008 to ensure that the dancer is kept constantly in its neutral position.

Peer-to-peer connection (sheet 2)

The serial peer-to-peer interface (terminals 70 to 73) operates at a baud rate of 187.5 kbd (H302=13) in this
configuring example. Data are exchanged by means of a 2-word message (H303=2) in both the receive and
transmit directions. Other parameter settings are shown in the box entitled "Configuration of peer interface" on
Sheet 2.
The drive receives the velocity setpoint K057 and the acceleration value K058 from the preceding drive in the
group via the peer-to-peer connection. Both received signals are multiplied by the VELOCITY RELATION K063
(PROFIBUS "stretch" factor) and brought out at the peer send output.
The speed setpoint K120 obtained in this way is added to the dancer position controller output, producing the
effective total speed setpoint K105 for the drive. The acceleration value K121 is applied to the basic converter as
an acceleration feedforward torque.

Process data exchange via the PROFIBUS (sheet 3)

To allow communication via the Profibus, message type "PP0 type 2" is selected by setting P712=2, i.e. both the
transmit and the receive messages contain 4 parameter words and 6 process data words. Slave bus address 28
is selected by setting P918=28. No further details are given below about the parameter section of the message
via which all basic converter and T100 parameters can be read and written.

The 6 process data words of the Profibus messages are available at connectors K062 ... K067 (sheet 18 of block
diagram). Receive word 2 is applied to the two multipliers on sheet 2 as velocity relation K063. Receive words 1

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 10-1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
Configuring Example 02.99

and 4 include the two control words K062 and K065 from which control bits B064 "DRIVE ON/OFF1" and B080
"ENABLE TECHNOLOGY CONTROLLER" are extracted via connector/binector converters.

The connectors to be entered in the Profibus transmit messages can be selected in parameter H311 (indices .01
to .06). The basic converter status word 1 is linked to transmit word 1 via H311.01=034 and the speed actual
value to transmit word 2 via H311.02=038.

The dancer position actual value K003 from analog input terminals 50/51 is taken to transmit word 3 via
H311.03=003. Status bit B311 "TECHNOLOGY CONTROLLER AT OUTPUT LIMITATION" is entered in bit
position 0 of connector K073 which is applied to transmit word 4 by means of a binector/connector converter.

Data exchange with the Master Drives basic converter (sheet 4)

Only bits 0 and 10 of the basic converter control word 1 are supplied by the T100. The connection of the other
bits can remain in the factory setting state (see P554 to P575). The OFF1 command B064 of the Profibus is
taken to bit 0 via setting H272.01=064. This command is connected on in the basic converter via setting
P554=3100. Bit 10 is connected permanently to 1 via setting H272.11=1, i.e. command "Control requested" is
continuously active. This is the basic prerequisite for the basic converter accepting control commands and
setpoints from the T100.

The speed controller setpoint is specified in the basic converter via setting H275.01=105 and P443=3002. The
acceleration feedforward torque K121 is injected after the speed controller as a supplementary torque setpoint
via settings H275.04=121 and P433=3006. The torque K024 generated in the basic converter is taken to the
T100 where it is available as K039. The torque is output to the measuring instrument connected to terminal 61
via setting H150=047.

The speed actual value K091 is "wired" to connector K038 on the T100 via setting P734.02=148 and is finally
output in the Profibus transmit message. Owing to parameter setting P734.01=32, basic converter status word 1
is available for further connection to the Profibus as connector K034 (sheet 3).

10-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
02.99

PR OFIBUS DP (Slave bus address 28)

Velocity Enable Technology Basic con-

rela- technology Drive Dancer
ON/ OFF1 position controller verter status
tion controller n act at limitation word 1

CBP [18.3] [18.6]

Word 4 Word 1 Word 4
Dancer pos. Word 2 Word 2 Word 3 Word 1
Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0
act. value
50 [21]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1
+ -
- - +
51
0% Technology
controller

+ +
V setpoint V set
x
(from P P
[26]
pre- E E (to
ceding [17] E E next
[17]
drive) R R drive)

dV/dt dV/dt
x
D 61
[26] A
[4] Torque
1
62
Word 1 Word 1
T100 [10] Bit10 Bit 0 Word 2 Word 6 Word 1 Word 3
Word 2
n act n set M set M act

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
CU2 supplem.
Control OFF1 Torque
requested + calculation
and control
Speed
MASTER DRIVE VC controller

Dancing roller

Configuring example T100 Software module "Multi-purpose Drive""

[n] = sheet n in block diagram
Sheet 1: Overview

10-3
Configuring Example
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10-4
Enable H350 (0)
technology controller H338 H344 H332
(Sheet 3) B080 080 Technology controller at output limitation
B112
Dancer
Configuring Example

potentiometer d010 Kp Tn Tv
50 Dancer act. value
+ H330 (0) H430 (0)
.01 - [21.8]
K003 003 K088 088
-
51 [21] +
[2]
H431 (0)
K003 (Sheet 3) K120 120 K105
+
[25] Total speed
Technology controller setpoint
(dancer controller) (Sheet 4)
25 Dancer setpoint = 0%
(Dancer neutral position, 0V) [21] H351=0011
CU2
+10V
[21]
H334 (0)
0% .01
K000 000
26
-10V

[26]
Velocity relation (Sheet 3) H462 (0)
x1
K063 063

y
Peer-to-peer
Peer-to-peer H463 (0) output
input x2
K057 057
72 Rx+ Receive data Transmit data Tx+ 70
from v set H304 (0) to
x1 * x2 .01
preceding Word 1 K120 120 Word 1
dv/dt 100% next
K121 121 .02
drive 73 Rx- Word 2 Word 2 Tx- 71 drive
H464 (0) [26]
[17] [17]
x1
K063 063
RS485 [1] RS485 [1]
y

Configuration of peer interface: H465 (0)

x2
K058 058
H300=1 Peer ON Acceleration torque (Sheet 4)
H301=0 No monitoring K121
H302=13 187.5 kBd
x1 * x2
H303=2 Message length = 2 words
100%

Configuring example T100 Software module "Multi-purpose Drive"

Sheet 2: Dancer position controller, Peer-to-peer, speed and dv/dt calculation
02.99

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
02.99

COM BOARD CBP

from TECH BOARD T100 Connector/

preceding binector converter
bus node H320 (0)
K062 062 .01 Bit field 1
K065 065 .02 0
DRIVE
[19] B064 ON / OFF 1 (Sheet 4)

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1
X148. Bit field 2
P 2
0
RT+ Enable
R B080 technology controller
Receive data (Sheet 2)
O 3
RT-
F
Word 1 Velocity
I 4
Word 2 K063 relation (Sheet 2)
B Word 3
U 5 Word 4
S Word 5
Word 6
[18]
Status word 1 from Transmit data
basic converter (Sheet 4) H311. (0)
K034 034 .01
Word 1
to next Speed actual value from .02
basic converter (Sheet 4) K038 038 Word 2
bus node RT+
K003 .03
003 Word 3
Dancer position .04

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
K073 073 Word 4
act. value (Sheet 2) RT-
Word 5
Word 6
Technology con- H325 (0) .01
B112 [18]
troller at output 112
Configuration of limitation (Sheet 4)
Profibus interface CB1: 0
[20] Bit field 5
P918=28 Bus address
P712=2 PP0 type 2:
Binector/connector converter
6 process data words
4 parameter words

Configuring example T100 Software module "Multi-purpose Drive"

Sheet 3: Process data exchange via Profibus

10-5
Configuring Example
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10-6
TECH BOARD T100
Torque
[10] [4]
H275 (0) H150 (0) 100% = 10V
Acceleration .04 D 61
K121 121 K039 039
Configuring Example

torque (Sheet 2) A
Total speed .01
K105 105
setpoint (Sheet 2)
62
Speed actual
K038 value
(Sheet 3) 10V =
[11] Motor
Drive H272 (0)
ON / OFF 1 .01 rated torque
B064 064
(Sheet 3)
.11 Status word 1
1 B001 001 K034 from basic con-
verter (Sheet 3)
0 0

Word 1: [10] Word 2: [10] Word 6: Word 3: Word 2: Word 1

15 ... 10 ... 1 0
Control word 1 n-soll n set Torque Speed
to basic converter supplem. act. value

P554= P443= P433= P734.03 P734.02 P734.01

3100 3002 3006 =24 =91 =32

r007 r968 Status word 1

Control requested = 1 OFF1
(accept setpoints and control
commands from T100 ) Torque
calculation
+ + and
control

Speed controller Configuration of supplementary boards:

(Control mode P163=4) r219
T100 in slot 2
CBP in slot 3
P053=19 Parameters can be written
from CBP, PMU and T100

Master Drives basic converter (VC) (CUVC)

M
∼

Configuring example T100 Software module "Multi-purpose Drive"

Sheet 4: Data exchange with basic converter, analog output
02.99

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1
T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
02.99

11. Index of Available Instruction Manuals and

Software Components for T100

Item SIEMENS-internal
Designation Order No. (MLFB) order processing
location
/1/ Hardware Operating Instructions for T100 6SE7080-0CX87-0BB0 ASI 1 Erlangen, F80
Technology Board
(additional requirements only; already
included in T100 scope of supply);
Available in 5 languages
/2/ Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi- ASI 1 Erlangen, F80
Purpose Drive" for T100 Board
German 6SE7080-0CX84-0BB0
English 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB0
French 6SE7087-7CX84-0BB0
Spanish 6SE7087-8CX84-0BB0
Italian 6SE7087-2CX84-0BB0
/3/ Specification "Universal Serial Interface AUT WKF RZF Fürth
Protocol, USS® Protocol" Dept. B9.2
German E20125-D0001-S302-A1 Ms. Schmitt
Tel. ++49911/750-2958
English E20125-D0001-S302-A1- Fax ++49911/750-2299
-7600
/4/ Block package "DVA_S5", 6DD1 800-0SW0 AUT WKF RZF Fürth
Communications Blocks for SIMATIC S5 Dept. B1.3
AG115U, 135U and 155U with SIMOREG Mr. Heydorn
and SIMOVERT Drives via SINEC L2-DP Tel. ++49911/750-9382
and USS Protocol. Fax ++49911/750-9155
(3.5" diskette for S5-DOS including
German/English user manual (see item
/5/))
/5/ User manual "Function Blocks for SIMATIC AUT WKF RZF Fürth
S5 AG115U, 135U, 155U User Data Dept. B9.2
Exchange with SIMOREG and SIMOVERT Ms. Schmitt
Drives via USS® Protocol" Tel. ++49911/750-2958
(already included in scope of supply of item Fax ++49911/750-2299
/4/) E20125-C0005-S302-A1
German E20125-C0005-S302-A1-
English -7600

/6/ Operating Instructions "SIMOVERT Master ASI 1 Erlangen, F80

Drives, Application of Serial Interfaces with
USS® Protocol"

German/English 6SE7087-6CX87-4KB0

/7/ PROFIBUS 3.071 PROFIBUS

Profile for Variable-Speed Drives, Nutzerorganisation e.V.
PROFIDRIVE Haid-und-Neu-Strasse
January 1997 Edition 7, D76131 Karlsruhe
Tel.:
++49(0)721-9658-590
FAX:
++49(0)721-9658-589

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1 11-1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
 02.99

11-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 ”Multi-Purpose Drive”
02.99 Changes

12 Changes

12.1 Software version 1.0 (available as of approx. 08.95):

Original version (first officially released software version)

12.2 Software version 1.1 (available as of approx. 05.97):

New functions vis-à-vis V1.0:

• Automatic implementation ("optimization run") of the optimum processing sequence of the function
blocks (see parameter H750 = 2)
• Spontaneous messages (with USS and in DPRAM)
(see parameter H917)
• Parameter texts now also available in English, French, Spanish and Italian (for OP1 and SIMOVIS)
(see parameter H050)
• New function block "B160 - fixed setpoint" H224 (-32768 to +32767) mapped to K177
• Motorized potentiometer (F670):
K180: Motorized potentiometer input (new connector)
H413, H414: The motorized potentiometer output can now be limited by means of the new parameters
H413 and H414

Modified functions vis-à-vis V1.0:

• dy/dt for comfort ramp-function generator (F1010) and motor potentiometer (F670):
Before: dy/dt was set to = 0 if input rate of rise < RFG ramp,
because the RFG has always expired in this case
Now: dy/dt = gradient of input signal if this gradient < RFG ramp
• Fixed-setpoint parameters H210 to H223:
Before: Confirmation parameters, could be modified in UHAB states
Now: Not confirmation parameters, can be modified in UHABR states
• Analog inputs:
Improved suppression of EMC interference through multiple scans, reduction in ripple
The calculation of the input value for the "current input 4...20mA and normalization <> 100%" setting
has been corrected
• Analog outputs:
Improved accuracy
• Comfort ramp-function generator (F1010):
The action of the "ramp-function generator tracking" function when the positive limit has a negative value
and/or the negative limit has a positive value has been improved.
The accuracy of the rounding times has been improved.
The identifiers for parameters H370 and H371 on the display (OP1 and SIMOVIS) have been corrected.
• USS protocol:
The performance of the telegram failure-time monitor has been improved for bus cycle times of less
than approx. 20 ms.
The performance for operation without a PKW component (H295 = 0) has been improved.
The performance when faulty telegrams are detected on the bus (e.g. response messages from other
bus nodes) has been improved.
• Motorized potentiometer (F670):
Before: Minimum settable ramp-up/ramp-down time (H402/H403) = 0.00 s
Now: Minimum settable ramp-up/ramp-down time(H402/H403) = 0.01 s

Siemens AG 6SE7080-0CX84-0BB1 12-1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Changes 02.99

• P-gain adaptation factor for speed controller (with F1670, word 10):
The transfer of the P-gain adaptation factor to the basic unit has been corrected (factor 16).
• Speed → velocity calculator (B50):
The accuracy of the calculations has been improved

List of new or modified parameters:

− H050 Setting range unchanged; other languages now supported. The abbreviated parameter names on
the OP1 and in SIMOVIS are now available in 5 languages.
− H224 New ! Fixed setpoint for K180: -32768 ... 32767
− H413 New ! Upper limit for motorized potentiometer
− H414 New ! Lower limit for motorized potentiometer
− H750 Setting range now 0 ... 2 instead of 0 ... 1
Optimization run now possible for sampling sequence
− H917 New ! Spontaneous messages now available

List of new connectors:

− K180 Fixed setpoint (H224)
− K180 Input of ramp-function generator in motorized potentiometer

12.3 Software version 1.2 (available as of approx. 08.96):

Modified functions vis-à-vis V1.1:

• Timers F1110 and F1290

The following error associated with these two timers has been eliminated. In V1.0 and V1.1, a sporadic
error occurs in timers F1110 and F1290 in the OFF delay modes (modes 1 and 3), i.e. they act as an OFF
and ON delay with an ON delay time that is identical to the selected OFF delay time. Other timers were not
affected by this problem.

12.4 Software version 1.3 (available as of approx. 08.97):

Modified functions vis-à-vis V1.2:
• USS protocol:
The following problem in versions V1.0 to V1.2 has been eliminated: The very first response message
from the T100 after connection of the electronics power supply included additional bytes containing
00H (number of these "scratch bytes" corresponds to length of PZD section). This results in
overloading of some master interfaces, causing the communication link to crash, e.g. on the CP521 SI
for the SIMATIC S5 PLCs, 100U, 95U etc. In software version 1.3 and later, the first message no
longer contains any scratch bytes which might cause the SIMATIC to crash.
• USS protocol:
The broadcast function has been improved ("Messages to all"): In software version 1.3, it is no longer
necessary to send a normal point-to-point message between two broadcast messages for the sake of
the master.
• Peer-to-peer protocol:
The performance at baud rates 115.2 and 187.5 kBd and simultaneous operation of the USS interface
has been improved (no more sporadic message failures).
• Display parameters d20 ... d29 for connectors and binectors:
These display parameters can now also be "rewired" online in the R operating state (=RUN mode) via
parameters H240 ... 253. Parameters H240 ... H253 could only be altered offline, i.e. in the U, H, A
and B modes, in software versions 1.0 to 1.2.

12-2 Siemens AG 6SE7080-0CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99 Changes

• Simple ramp-function generator:

The "Bypass simple-ramp function generator" function is now processed in the foreground (sampling
time 2.2 msec) instead of the background (sampling time 20 msec).
• Comfort ramp-function generator:
The switchover between ramp-function generator settings 1, 2 and 3 (as a function of binectors
selected in H370 and H371) is now a foreground process (sampling time 2.2 msec) instead of a
background process (sampling time 20 msec).
• Technology controller:
The controller performance in response to extremely long integration times Ti (Ti = Tn/Kp), i.e. more
than approximately 144 sec, has been improved.

New parameters, binectors and connectors:

− None

Important! Procedure for installing the MS100

1. Setting the H parameters to their factory settings
As specified in Section "Start-up" in the MS100 Manual, it is absolutely essential to set the
T100 parameters (H parameters) to their factory (default) settings via H970 before a T100 is
started up. The T100 cannot otherwise be guaranteed to operate correctly (any number of
malfunctions are possible, e.g. motorized potentiometer output = 0 continuously, etc.)

2. Procedure for replacing software or board:

All versions of the MS100 are "backwards compatible" with earlier software versions! To install a
new software version or T100 board in an existing system, you merely need to set the MS100
parameters to their factory settings via H970 and then re-enter the old parameter data of the
T100 (H parameters), e.g. by means of the SIMOVIS download function.

Siemens AG 6SE7080-0CX84-0BB1 12-3

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
Changes 02.99

12-4 Siemens AG 6SE7080-0CX84-0BB1

T100 Technology Board Manual for Software Module MS100 "Multi-Purpose Drive"
02.99

The following editions have been published so far: Edition Internal Item No.
A C98130-A1800-A1-01-7647
C C98130-A1800-A1-03-7647
D C98130-A1800-A1-04-7647
F C98130-A1800-A1-06-7647

Edition F consists of the following chapters

Chapter No. of Date of issue

pages
0 General 6 02.99
1 Description 4 02.99
2 Block Diagram 40 02.99
3 Function Descriptions 30 02.99
4 Parameter List 78 02.99
5 List of Connectors and Binectors 12 02.99
6 Start-up and Parameterization 4 02.99
7 Procedure for Replacing Software or T100 Board 2 02.99
8 Faults and Alarms 4 02.99
9 SIMOVIS 2 02.99
10 Configuring Example 6 02.99
11 Index of Available Instruction Manuals and Software Components 2 02.99
for the T100 Board
12 Changes 4 02.99

Group
Elektronikwerk Wien (Vienna)
P.O. Box 83, A-1211 Vienna
Subject to change without notice Order No.: 6SE7087--6CX84-0BB1
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Printed in Austria